HomeMy WebLinkAboutCornell Real Estate Department - Fire Alarm UpgradesCORNELL UNIVERSITY FIRE PROTECTION AND FIRE ALARM
FACILITIES CONTRACTS FOR OFF-CAMPUS HOUSING – PHASE I
121 HUMPHREYS SERVICE BUILDING
ITHACA, NEW YORK 14853-3701
ADDENDUM NO. 1
April 16, 2013
This Addendum contains changes to the requirements of the Contract Documents and Specifications.
Such changes are to be incorporated into the Construction Documents and shall apply to the work with
the same meaning and force as if they had been included in the original document. Wherever this
Addendum modifies a portion of a paragraph of the specifications or a portion of any Drawing, the
remainder of the Paragraph or Drawing shall remain in force.
NOTE: Provisions of all Contract Documents apply.
SPECIFICATIONS
Item 1. Refer to Project Manual Table of Contents
a. Add the following attached sections in their entirety:
1) 31 20 00, “Earth Moving”
2) 32 12 16, “Asphalt Paving”
3) 32 13 13, “Concrete Paving”
4) 32 92 00, “Turf and Grasses”
Item 2. Refer to Specification Section 21 05 53 “Identification For Fire-Suppression Piping
And Equipment”
a. Delete Article 3.2, Paragraph E., in its entirety.
Item 3. Refer to Specification Section 28 05 28 “Pathways For Electronic Safety And
Security”
a. Article 2.2, “Surface Pathways” Paragraph B.
1) Delete second sentence “Manufacturer’s standard enamel…” and replace
with “Provide standard ivory finish.”
b. Add Article 3.1 “Pathway Application” Paragraph A.3.a. as follows:
“Exposed plenum rated cable is allowed above accessible ceilings and ‘fished’
through existing walls and ceilings. Existing pathways may be reused.”
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 2 Addendum #1
FACILITIES CONTRACTS April 16, 2013
Item 4. Refer to Specification Section 28 31 11 “Digital, Addressable Fire Alarm System”
a. Add Article 1.9 “Project Conditions” Paragraph A.3. as follows:
“Existing Fire Alarm system must be operational at the end of each work day,
until new system has been accepted.”
DRAWINGS
Item 5. Refer to Drawing F-001 – Site Plan and Notes:
a. Add Fire Alarm General Note #1 as follows:
“Connect all Flow switches and supervisory switches to Fire Alarm Control
Unit via monitor modules.”
b. Add General Note #5 as follows:
“Some tenants will be occupying the apartments during construction. Provide
precautions to prevent tenant property from being damaged, including placing
drop cloths over personal belongings while working on ceilings. Owner and/or
Tenant will remove personal property and furniture from along the walls that
will be disturbed. Notify Owner of any Tenant belongings that prevent work
from proceeding.”
c. Add the following sentence to General Fire Protection Note #6 as follows:
“Paint all sprinkler piping ivory color to match color of new surface metal
raceway.”
Item 6. Refer to Drawings F-101, F-102, F-103, F-104, F-105, and F-106:
a. Rotate the North arrows 180 degrees for Plans A and B.
Item 7. Refer to Drawing F-101 – Basement and First Floor Plans Building #618-620:
a. Plan A Basement Plan:
1) Revise Smoke Detector to a Heat Detector in Boiler Room.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 3 Addendum No. 1
FACILITIES CONTRACTS April 16, 2013
Item 8. Refer to Drawing F-102 – Second and Third Floor Plans Building #618 – 620:
a. Plan B – Third Floor Plan
1) Provide electric baseboard heat for Storage room located in the northeast
corner of the third floor:
a) Provide a Berko electric baseboard heater, model 2512W, 120v,
400 watts, length 2 feet. Locate on west wall. Provide a wall
mounted thermostat and set at 45 degrees. Provide 120 volt, 20
amp circuit (2#12 and #12 ground in ½” raceway) from nearest
electric panel serving this area.
Item 9. Refer to Drawing F-103 – Basement and First Floor Plans Building #636:
a. Plan A Basement Plan:
1) Revise Smoke Detector to a Heat Detector in Boiler Room.
Item 10. Refer to Drawing F-105 – Basement and First Floor Plans Building #638
a. Plan A - Basement Plan
1) Revise Smoke Detector to a Heat Detector in Boiler Room.
2) Provide fan and controller for the crawlspace where the Fire Protection
water entrance is located
a) Provide Loren Cook model GN-142 (90 CFM, 115v, 1 phase, 54
watt hp) with fan speed controller. Discharge of fan shall
terminate at sidewall (north wall of crawlspace) into laundry room
with a Titus 6x6 grille model 350RL. Provide Titus 6x6 grille for
transfer air in existing access panel located on west wall of
crawlspace.
b) Wire exhaust fan to new thermostat in crawl space and operate fan
as follows: When temperature drops below set point of 45 degrees,
exhaust fan shall turn on. When thermostat rises above set point of
45 degrees fan shall turn off.
c) Provide 120 volt, 20 amp circuit (2#12 and #12 ground in ½”
raceway) from nearest electric panel serving this area.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 4 Addendum No. 1
FACILITIES CONTRACTS April 16, 2013
Item 11. Refer to Drawing F-106 – Second and Third Floor Plans Building #638:
a. Plan A Second Floor Plan:
1) Move A/V notification appliance from Bedroom (north apartment) to
Living Room.
Item 12. Refer to Attached Drawing F-502 – Site Plan and Details:
a. Add the attached Drawing F-502 – Site Plan and Details, to the Drawing Set.
****END OF ADDENDUM****
CORNELL UNIVERSITY BDA #12127
Fire Protection and Fire Alarm
For Off-Campus Housing – Phase I
EARTH MOVING 31 20 00 - 1
SECTION 31 20 00
EARTH MOVING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DEFINITIONS
A. Backfill: Soil material or controlled low-strength material used to fill an excavation.
1. Final Backfill: Backfill placed over bedding course to fill a trench.
B. Bedding Course: Aggregate layer placed over the excavated subgrade in a trench
before laying pipe.
C. Borrow Soil: Satisfactory soil imported from off-site for use as fill or backfill.
D. Excavation: Removal of material encountered above subgrade elevations and to lines
and dimensions indicated.
1. Authorized Additional Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or
beyond indicated lines and dimensions as directed by Architect/Engineer.
Authorized additional excavation and replacement material will be paid for
according to Contract provisions for changes in the Work.
2. Unauthorized Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond
indicated lines and dimensions without direction by Architect/Engineer.
Unauthorized excavation, as well as remedial work directed by
Architect/Engineer, shall be without additional compensation.
E. Fill: Soil materials used to raise existing grades.
F. Rock: Rock material in beds, ledges, unstratified masses, conglomerate deposits, and
boulders of rock material that exceed 1 cu. yd. (0.76 cu. m) for bulk excavation or 3/4
cu. yd. (0.57 cu. m) for footing, trench, and pit excavation that cannot be removed by
rock excavating equipment equivalent to the following in size and performance ratings,
without systematic drilling, ram hammering, ripping, or blasting, when permitted:
1. Excavation of Footings, Trenches, and Pits: Late-model, track-mounted
hydraulic excavator; equipped with a 42-inch- (1065-mm-) wide, maximum,
short-tip-radius rock bucket; rated at not less than 138-hp (103-kW) flywheel
power with bucket-curling force of not less than 28,700 lbf (128 kN) and stick-
crowd force of not less than 18,400 lbf (82 kN) with extra-long reach boom;
measured according to SAE J-1179.
2. Bulk Excavation: Late-model, track-mounted loader; rated at not less than 230-
hp (172-kW) flywheel power and developing a minimum of 47,992-lbf (213.3-kN)
breakout force with a general-purpose bare bucket; measured according to
SAE J-732.
G. Structures: Buildings, footings, foundations, retaining walls, slabs, tanks, curbs,
mechanical and electrical appurtenances, or other man-made stationary features
constructed above or below the ground surface.
H. Subbase Course: Aggregate layer placed between the subgrade and base course for
hot-mix asphalt pavement, or aggregate layer placed between the subgrade and a
cement concrete pavement or a cement concrete or hot-mix asphalt walk.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY BDA #12127
Fire Protection and Fire Alarm
For Off-Campus Housing – Phase I
EARTH MOVING 31 20 00 - 2
I. Subgrade: Uppermost surface of an excavation or the top surface of a fill or backfill
immediately below subbase, drainage fill, drainage course, or topsoil materials.
J. Utilities: On-site underground pipes, conduits, ducts, and cables, as well as
underground services within buildings.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of the following manufactured products required:
1. Warning tapes.
B. Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency.
C. Material Test Reports: For each on-site and borrow soil material proposed for fill and
backfill as follows:
1. Classification according to ASTM D 2487.
2. Laboratory compaction curve according to ASTM D 1557.
3. Submit test data with suppliers name, location of source and sieve analysis of
material showing conformance with the specifications.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Codes and Standards
1. Comply with the provisions of the following codes and standards except where
more stringent requirements are shown or specified.
a. Local Regulations
b. New York State Department of Transportation (NYSDOT) Standard
Specification dated January 2, 2002 and any subsequent addendums.
2. Excavations, trench depths and widths, sheeting, shoring, bracing, and cutback
slopes to be determined by the Contractor and shall comply with standards set
by OSHA, NYS Department of Labor, NYS Industrial Code and all other
applicable safety standards. Refer to Section 31 50 00, Excavation Support and
Protection.
1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Traffic: Minimize interference with adjoining roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent
occupied or used facilities during earth moving operations.
1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used
facilities without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction.
2. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by
Owner or authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Improvements on Adjoining Property: Authority for performing earth moving indicated
on property adjoining Owner's property will be obtained by Owner before award of
Contract.
1. Do not proceed with work on adjoining property until directed by
Architect/Engineer.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY BDA #12127
Fire Protection and Fire Alarm
For Off-Campus Housing – Phase I
EARTH MOVING 31 20 00 - 3
C. Utility Locator Service: Notify Dig Safety New York at (800) 962-7962 and local utility
agencies for area where Project is located before beginning earth moving operations.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SOIL MATERIALS
A. General: Provide borrow soil materials when sufficient satisfactory soil materials are
not available from excavations.
B. Satisfactory Soils: Soil Classification Groups GW, GP, GM, SW, SP, and SM according
to ASTM D 2487 , or a combination of these groups; free of rock or gravel larger than 3
inches (75 mm) in any dimension, debris, waste, frozen materials, vegetation, and
other deleterious matter.
C. Unsatisfactory Soils: Soil Classification Groups GC, SC, CL, ML, OL, CH, MH, OH,
and PT according to ASTM D 2487 , or a combination of these groups.
1. Unsatisfactory soils also include satisfactory soils not maintained within 2
percent of optimum moisture content at time of compaction.
D. Subbase Course: Suitable material conforming to NYSDOT Item 304.12M, Type 2.
Comply with the gradation and material requirements specified below:
SIEVE PERCENT PASSING (%)
BY WEIGHT SIEVE SIZE SIZE OPENING
2 inch 50 mm 100
¼ inch 6.3 mm 25 – 60
No. 40 425 µm 5 – 40
No. 200 75 µm 0 - 10
1. Magnesium Sulfate Soundness Test: 20 percent maximum loss by weight after
four test cycles.
2. Plasticity Index: The plasticity index of the material passing the No. 40 mesh
sieve will not exceed 5.0.
3. Elongated Particles: Not more than 30 percent, by weight, of the particles
retained on a ½ inch sieve will consist of flat or elongated particles. A flat or
elongated particle is defined as one which as its greatest dimension more than
three times its least dimension.
E. Select Granular Material: Suitable material conforming to NYSDOT Item 203.07 M.
Comply with the gradation and material requirements specified below:
SIEVE SIZE
OPENING
PERCENT PASSING (%) BY
WEIGHT
3” 100
1” 80 - 90
½” 45 - 75
#4 30 - 60
CORNELL UNIVERSITY BDA #12127
Fire Protection and Fire Alarm
For Off-Campus Housing – Phase I
EARTH MOVING 31 20 00 - 4
SIEVE SIZE
OPENING
PERCENT PASSING (%) BY
WEIGHT
#40 10 - 40
# 200 0 - 7
1. Magnesium Sulfate Soundness Test: 30 percent maximum loss by weight.
2. RAP shall not be utilized.
F. Pipe Bedding Material: Granular material conforming to NYSDOT Item 304.11M, Type
1. Comply with the gradation and material requirements specified below:
SIEVE PERCENT PASSING (%)
BY WEIGHT SIEVE SIZE SIZE OPENING
3 inch 50 mm 100
2 inch 50 mm 90 - 100
¼ inch 6.3 mm 30 – 65
No. 40 425 µm 5 – 40
No. 200 75 µm 0 - 10
1. Magnesium Sulfate Soundness Test: 20 percent maximum loss by weight after
four test cycles.
2. Plasticity Index: The plasticity index of the material passing the No. 40 mesh
sieve will not exceed 5.0.
3. Elongated Particles: Not more than 30 percent, by weight, of the particles
retained on a ½ inch sieve will consist of flat or elongated particles. A flat or
elongated particle is defined as one which has its greatest dimension more than
three times its least dimension.
G. Backfill for utility pipes and structures (non-paved areas): Satisfactory soils
consisting of on-site or borrow soil materials.
1. Provide satisfactory soil materials free of any organic or other deleterious
materials.
H. Backfill for utility pipes and structures in paved areas shall meet the requirements of
NYSDOT Item 203.07M, Select Granular Fill.
2.2 ACCESSORIES
A. Detectable Warning Tape: Acid- and alkali-resistant, polyethylene film warning tape
manufactured for marking and identifying underground utilities, a minimum of 6
inches (150 mm) wide and 4 mils (0.1 mm) thick, continuously inscribed with a
description of the utility, with metallic core encased in a protective jacket for corrosion
protection, detectable by metal detector when tape is buried up to 30 inches (750 mm)
deep; colored as follows:
1. Red: Electric.
2. Yellow: Gas, oil, steam, and dangerous materials.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY BDA #12127
Fire Protection and Fire Alarm
For Off-Campus Housing – Phase I
EARTH MOVING 31 20 00 - 5
3. Orange: Telephone and other communications.
4. Blue: Water systems.
5. Green: Sewer systems.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage
caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards
created by earth moving operations.
B. Protect and maintain erosion and sedimentation controls during earth moving
operations.
C. Protect subgrades and foundation soils from freezing temperatures and frost. Remove
temporary protection before placing subsequent materials.
3.2 DEWATERING
A. Prevent surface water and ground water from entering excavations, from ponding on
prepared subgrades, and from flooding Project site and surrounding area.
B. Protect subgrades from softening, undermining, washout, and damage by rain or
water accumulation.
1. Reroute surface water runoff away from excavated areas. Do not allow water to
accumulate in excavations. Do not use excavated trenches as temporary
drainage ditches.
3.3 EXCAVATION, GENERAL
A. Unclassified Excavation: Excavate to subgrade elevations regardless of the character
of surface and subsurface conditions encountered. Unclassified excavated materials
may include rock, soil materials, and obstructions. No changes in the Contract Sum
or the Contract Time will be authorized for rock excavation or removal of obstructions.
3.4 EXCAVATION FOR WALKS AND PAVEMENTS
A. Excavate surfaces under walks and pavements to indicated lines, cross sections,
elevations, and subgrades.
3.5 EXCAVATION FOR UTILITY TRENCHES
A. Excavate trenches to indicated gradients, lines, depths, and elevations.
1. Beyond building perimeter, excavate trenches to allow installation of top of pipe
below frost line, unless otherwise indicated on the Contract Documents.
B. Excavate trenches to uniform widths to provide the following clearance on each side of
pipe or conduit. Excavate trench walls vertically from trench bottom to 12 inches (300
mm) higher than top of pipe or conduit unless otherwise indicated.
1. Clearance: 12 inches (300 mm) each side of pipe or conduit.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY BDA #12127
Fire Protection and Fire Alarm
For Off-Campus Housing – Phase I
EARTH MOVING 31 20 00 - 6
C. Trench Bottoms: Excavate trenches 6 inches (150 mm) deeper than bottom of pipe
and conduit elevations to allow for bedding course. Hand-excavate deeper for bells of
pipe.
1. Excavate trenches 6 inches (150 mm) deeper than elevation required in rock or
other unyielding bearing material to allow for bedding course.
3.6 SUBGRADE INSPECTION
A. Notify Architect/Engineer when excavations have reached required subgrade.
B. If Architect/Engineer determines that unsatisfactory soil is present, continue
excavation and replace with compacted backfill or fill material as directed.
C. Proof-roll subgrade below the building slabs and pavements with a pneumatic-tired
and loaded 10-wheel, tandem-axle dump truck weighing not less than 15 tons (13.6
tonnes) to identify soft pockets and areas of excess yielding. Do not proof-roll wet or
saturated subgrades.
1. Completely proof-roll subgrade in one direction, repeating proof-rolling in
direction perpendicular to first direction. Limit vehicle speed to 3 mph (5 km/h).
2. Excavate soft spots, unsatisfactory soils, and areas of excessive pumping or
rutting, as determined by Architect/Engineer, and replace with compacted
backfill or fill as directed.
D. Authorized additional excavation and replacement material will be paid for according
to Contract provisions for changes in the Work.
E. Reconstruct subgrades damaged by freezing temperatures, frost, rain, accumulated
water, or construction activities, as directed by Architect/Engineer, without additional
compensation.
3.7 UNAUTHORIZED EXCAVATION
A. Fill unauthorized excavations under construction, pipe, or conduit as directed by
Architect.
3.8 STORAGE OF SOIL MATERIALS
A. Stockpile borrow soil materials and excavated satisfactory soil materials without
intermixing. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to
prevent windblown dust.
1. Stockpile soil materials away from edge of excavations. Do not store within drip
line of remaining trees.
3.9 UTILITY TRENCH BACKFILL
A. Place backfill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.
B. Place and compact bedding course on trench bottoms and where indicated. Shape
bedding course to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels of pipes
and for joints, fittings, and bodies of conduits.
C. Backfill voids with satisfactory soil while removing shoring and bracing.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY BDA #12127
Fire Protection and Fire Alarm
For Off-Campus Housing – Phase I
EARTH MOVING 31 20 00 - 7
D. Place and compact initial backfill of bedding material to a height of 12 inches (300
mm) over the pipe or conduit.
1. Carefully compact initial backfill under pipe haunches and compact evenly up
on both sides and along the full length of piping or conduit to avoid damage or
displacement of piping or conduit. Coordinate backfilling with utilities testing.
E. Place and compact final backfill using satisfactory soil (non-paved areas) or select
granular material (paved areas) to final subgrade elevation.
F. Install warning tape directly above utilities, 12 inches (300 mm) below finished grade,
except 6 inches (150 mm) below subgrade under pavements and slabs.
3.10 SOIL MOISTURE CONTROL
A. Uniformly moisten or aerate subgrade and each subsequent fill or backfill soil layer
before compaction to within 2 percent of optimum moisture content.
1. Do not place backfill or fill soil material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or
contain frost or ice.
2. Remove and replace, or scarify and air dry, otherwise satisfactory soil material
that exceeds optimum moisture content by 2 percent and is too wet to compact
to specified dry unit weight.
3.11 COMPACTION OF SOIL BACKFILLS AND FILLS
A. Place backfill and fill soil materials in layers not more than 6 inches (150 mm) in loose
depth for material compacted by heavy compaction equipment, and not more than 4
inches (100 mm) in loose depth for material compacted by hand-operated tampers.
B. Place backfill and fill soil materials evenly on all sides of structures to required
elevations, and uniformly along the full length of each structure.
C. Compact soil materials to not less than the following percentages of maximum dry
unit weight according to ASTM D 1557:
1. Under structures, building slabs, steps, and pavements, scarify and recompact
top 12 inches (300 mm) of existing subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill soil
material at 95 percent.
2. Under walkways, scarify and recompact top 6 inches (150 mm) below subgrade
and compact each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 92 percent.
3. Under turf or unpaved areas, scarify and recompact top 6 inches (150 mm)
below subgrade and compact each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 85
percent.
4. For utility trenches, compact each layer of initial and final backfill soil material
at 95 percent.
3.12 GRADING
A. General: Uniformly grade areas to a smooth surface, free of irregular surface changes.
Comply with compaction requirements and grade to cross sections, lines, and
elevations indicated.
1. Provide a smooth transition between adjacent existing grades and new grades.
2. Cut out soft spots, fill low spots, and trim high spots to comply with required
surface tolerances.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY BDA #12127
Fire Protection and Fire Alarm
For Off-Campus Housing – Phase I
EARTH MOVING 31 20 00 - 8
B. Site Rough Grading: Slope grades to direct water away from buildings and to prevent
ponding. Finish subgrades to required elevations within the following tolerances:
1. Turf or Unpaved Areas: Plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm).
2. Walks: Plus or minus 1/2 inch (13 mm).
3. Pavements: Plus or minus 1/2 inch (13 mm).
3.13 SUBBASE COURSE UNDER PAVEMENTS AND WALKS
A. Place subbase course on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.
B. On prepared subgrade, place subbase course under pavements and walks as follows:
1. Shape subbase course to required crown elevations and cross-slope grades.
2. Place subbase course 6 inches (150 mm) or less in compacted thickness in a
single layer.
3. Place subbase course that exceeds 6 inches (150 mm) in compacted thickness in
layers of equal thickness, with no compacted layer more than 6 inches (150 mm)
thick or less than 3 inches (75 mm) thick.
4. Compact subbase course at optimum moisture content to required grades, lines,
cross sections, and thickness to not less than 95 percent of maximum dry unit
weight according to ASTM D 1557.
3.14 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified geotechnical engineering testing agency
to perform tests and inspections.
B. Allow testing agency to inspect and test subgrades and each fill or backfill layer.
Proceed with subsequent earth moving only after test results for previously completed
work comply with requirements.
C. Testing agency will test compaction of soils in place according to ASTM D 1556,
ASTM D 2167, ASTM D 2922, and ASTM D 2937, as applicable.
D. When testing agency reports that subgrades, fills, or backfills have not achieved
degree of compaction specified, scarify and moisten or aerate, or remove and replace
soil materials to depth required; recompact and retest until specified compaction is
obtained.
3.15 PROTECTION
A. Protecting Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic, freezing, and
erosion. Keep free of trash and debris.
B. Repair and reestablish grades to specified tolerances where completed or partially
completed surfaces become eroded, rutted, settled, or where they lose compaction due
to subsequent construction operations or weather conditions.
1. Scarify or remove and replace soil material to depth as directed by Architect;
reshape and recompact.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY BDA #12127
Fire Protection and Fire Alarm
For Off-Campus Housing – Phase I
EARTH MOVING 31 20 00 - 9
C. Where settling occurs before Project correction period elapses, remove finished
surfacing, backfill with additional soil material, compact, and reconstruct surfacing.
1. Restore appearance, quality, and condition of finished surfacing to match
adjacent work, and eliminate evidence of restoration to greatest extent possible.
3.16 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS
A. Remove surplus satisfactory soil and waste materials, including unsatisfactory soil,
trash, and debris, and legally dispose of them off Owner's property.
B. Transport surplus satisfactory soil to designated storage areas on Owner's property.
Stockpile or spread soil as directed by Architect/Engineer.
1. Remove waste materials, including unsatisfactory soil, trash, and debris, and
legally dispose of them off Owner's property.
END OF SECTION
CORNELL UNIVERSITY BDA #12127
Fire Protection and Fire Alarm
For Off-Campus Housing – Phase I
ASPHALT PAVING 32 12 16 - 1
SECTION 32 12 16
ASPHALT PAVING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DEFINITION
A. Hot-Mix Asphalt Paving Terminology: Refer to ASTM D 8 for definitions of terms.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include technical data and tested
physical and performance properties.
1. Job-Mix Designs: Certification, by New York State Department of
Transportation (NYSDOT), of approval of each job mix proposed for the Work.
B. Material Certificates: For each paving material, from manufacturer.
C. Material Test Reports: For each paving material.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A paving-mix manufacturer registered with and
approved by NYSDOT.
B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with materials, workmanship, and other applicable
requirements of NYSDOT for asphalt paving work.
1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not apply asphalt materials if subgrade is wet or
excessively damp, if rain is imminent or expected before time required for adequate
cure, or if the following conditions are not met:
1. Tack Coat: Minimum surface temperature of 60 deg F (15.6 deg C).
2. Asphalt Binder Course: Minimum surface temperature of 40 deg F (4.4 deg C)
and rising at time of placement.
3. Asphalt Top Course: Minimum surface temperature of 60 deg F (15.6 deg C) at
time of placement.
4. Joint Sealant: Minimum surface temperature of 50 degrees F (10.0 Degrees C).
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 AGGREGATES
A. General: Use materials and gradations that have performed satisfactorily in previous
installations.
B. Coarse Aggregate: ASTM D 692, sound; angular crushed stone, crushed gravel, or
cured, crushed blast-furnace slag.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY BDA #12127
Fire Protection and Fire Alarm
For Off-Campus Housing – Phase I
ASPHALT PAVING 32 12 16 - 2
C. Fine Aggregate: ASTM D 1073, sharp-edged natural sand or sand prepared from
stone, gravel, cured blast-furnace slag, or combinations thereof.
1. For hot-mix asphalt, limit natural sand to a maximum of 20 percent by weight of
the total aggregate mass.
D. Mineral Filler: ASTM D 242, rock or slag dust, hydraulic cement, or other inert
material.
2.2 ASPHALT MATERIALS
A. Asphalt Binder: AASHTO M 320 or AASHTO MP 1a, PG 58-28.
B. Asphalt Cement: ASTM D 3381 for viscosity-graded material and ASTM D 946 for
penetration-graded material.
C. Tack Coat: ASTM D 977 emulsified asphalt, or cationic emulsified asphalt, slow
setting, diluted in water, of suitable grade and consistency for application. Comply
with the requirements of NYSDOT Tack Coat, Section 407, Item Number 407.01M.
D. Water: Potable.
2.3 AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A. Joint and Crack Sealant: ASTM D 6690 , Type II or III , hot-applied, single-
component, polymer-modified bituminous sealant.
2.4 MIXES
A. Hot-Mix Asphalt: Dense, hot-laid, hot-mix asphalt plant mixes approved by NYSDOT,
designed according to NYSDOT Design and Construction Division “Standard
Specifications” dated January 2, 2002 and complying with the following requirements:
1. Provide mixes with a history of satisfactory performance in geographical area
where Project is located.
2. Binder Course: Comply with the requirements of NYSDOT, Type 3 Dense
Binder, Section 401, Item 403.138902M.
3. Top Course: Comply with the requirements of NYSDT, Type 7 Top Course,
Section 401, Item 403.198902M.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that subbase is dry and in suitable condition to begin paving.
B. Proof-roll subbase below pavements with heavy pneumatic-tired equipment to identify
soft pockets and areas of excess yielding. Do not proof-roll wet or saturated
subgrades.
1. Completely proof-roll subgrade in one directions, repeating proof-rolling in
direction perpendicular to first direction. Limit vehicle speed to 3 mph (5 km/h).
2. Proof roll with a loaded 10-wheel, tandem-axle dump truck weighing not less
than 15 tons (13.6 tonnes).
CORNELL UNIVERSITY BDA #12127
Fire Protection and Fire Alarm
For Off-Campus Housing – Phase I
ASPHALT PAVING 32 12 16 - 3
3. Excavate soft spots, unsatisfactory subbase, and areas of excessive pumping or
rutting, as determined by Architect/Engineer, and replace with compacted
subbase material as directed.
C. Proceed with paving only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 SURFACE PREPARATION
A. General: Immediately before placing asphalt materials, remove loose and deleterious
material from subbase surfaces. Ensure that prepared subbase is ready to receive
paving.
1. Protect primed substrate from damage until ready to receive paving.
B. Tack Coat: Apply uniformly to surfaces of existing pavement at a rate of 0.05 to 0.15
gal./sq. yd. (0.2 to 0.7 L/sq. m).
1. Allow tack coat to cure undisturbed before applying hot-mix asphalt paving.
2. Avoid smearing or staining adjoining surfaces, appurtenances, and
surroundings. Remove spillages and clean affected surfaces.
3.3 HOT-MIX ASPHALT PLACING
A. Place the asphaltic concrete in strict accordance with the provisions of Section 401
through 405 of NYSDOT Standards.
B. Machine place hot-mix asphalt on prepared surface, spread uniformly, and strike off.
Place asphalt mix by hand to areas inaccessible to equipment in a manner that
prevents segregation of mix. Place each course to required grade, cross section, and
thickness when compacted.
1. Place hot-mix asphalt binder course in number of lifts and thicknesses
indicated.
2. Place hot-mix asphalt top course in single lift.
3. Spread mix at minimum temperature of 250 deg F (121 deg C).
4. Begin applying mix along centerline of crown for crowned sections and on high
side of one-way slopes unless otherwise indicated.
5. Regulate paver machine speed to obtain smooth, continuous surface free of pulls
and tears in asphalt-paving mat.
C. Place paving in consecutive strips not less than 10 feet (3 m) wide unless infill edge
strips of a lesser width are required.
1. After first strip has been placed and rolled, place succeeding strips and extend
rolling to overlap previous strips. Complete a section of asphalt binder course
before placing asphalt top course.
D. Promptly correct surface irregularities in paving course behind paver. Use suitable
hand tools to remove excess material forming high spots. Fill depressions with hot-
mix asphalt to prevent segregation of mix; use suitable hand tools to smooth surface.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY BDA #12127
Fire Protection and Fire Alarm
For Off-Campus Housing – Phase I
ASPHALT PAVING 32 12 16 - 4
3.4 JOINTS
A. Construct joints to ensure a continuous bond between adjoining paving sections.
Construct joints free of depressions, with same texture and smoothness as other
sections of hot-mix asphalt course.
1. Clean contact surfaces and apply tack coat to joints.
2. Offset longitudinal joints, in successive courses, a minimum of 6 inches (150
mm).
3. Offset transverse joints, in successive courses, a minimum of 24 inches (600
mm).
4. Construct transverse joints at each point where paver ends a day's work and
resumes work at a subsequent time. Construct these joints using either
"bulkhead" or "papered" method according to AI MS-22, for both "Ending a Lane"
and "Resumption of Paving Operations."
5. Compact joints as soon as hot-mix asphalt will bear roller weight without
excessive displacement.
6. Compact asphalt at joints to a density within 2 percent of specified course
density.
3.5 COMPACTION
A. General: Begin compaction as soon as placed hot-mix paving will bear roller weight
without excessive displacement. Compact hot-mix paving with hot, hand tampers or
with vibratory-plate compactors in areas inaccessible to rollers.
1. Complete compaction before mix temperature cools to 185 deg F (85 deg C).
B. Breakdown Rolling: Complete breakdown or initial rolling immediately after rolling
joints and outside edge. Examine surface immediately after breakdown rolling for
indicated crown, grade, and smoothness. Correct laydown and rolling operations to
comply with requirements.
C. Intermediate Rolling: Begin intermediate rolling immediately after breakdown rolling
while hot-mix asphalt is still hot enough to achieve specified density. Continue rolling
until hot-mix asphalt course has been uniformly compacted to the following density:
1. Average Density: 96 percent of reference laboratory density according to
ASTM D 6927, but not less than 94 percent nor greater than 100 percent.
D. Finish Rolling: Finish roll paved surfaces to remove roller marks while hot-mix
asphalt is still warm.
E. Edge Shaping: While surface is being compacted and finished, trim edges of pavement
to proper alignment. Bevel edges while asphalt is still hot; compact thoroughly.
F. Repairs: Remove paved areas that are defective or contaminated with foreign
materials and replace with fresh, hot-mix asphalt. Compact by rolling to specified
density and surface smoothness.
G. Protection: After final rolling, do not permit vehicular traffic on pavement until it has
cooled and hardened.
H. Erect barricades to protect paving from traffic until mixture has cooled enough not to
become marked.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY BDA #12127
Fire Protection and Fire Alarm
For Off-Campus Housing – Phase I
ASPHALT PAVING 32 12 16 - 5
3.6 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES
A. Pavement Thickness: Compact each course to produce the thickness indicated within
the following tolerances:
1. Binder Course: Plus or minus 1/4 inch (6 mm).
2. Top Course: Plus 1/4 inch (6 mm), no minus.
B. Pavement Surface Smoothness: Compact each course to produce a surface
smoothness within the following tolerances as determined by using a 10-foot (3-m)
straightedge applied transversely or longitudinally to paved areas:
1. Binder Course: 1/4 inch (6 mm).
2. Top Course: 1/8 inch (3 mm).
3.7 DISPOSAL
A. Except for material indicated to be recycled, remove excavated materials from Project
site and legally dispose of them in an EPA-approved landfill.
1. Do not allow milled materials to accumulate on-site.
END OF SECTION
CORNELL UNIVERSITY BDA #12127
Fire Protection and Fire Alarm
For Off-Campus Housing – Phase I
CONCRETE PAVING 32 13 13 - 1
SECTION 32 13 13
CONCRETE PAVING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DEFINITIONS
A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of
blended hydraulic cement, fly ash and other pozzolans, and ground granulated blast-
furnace slag.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
1. Concrete mix design
2. Concrete mix products.
B. Material Certificates: For the following, from manufacturer:
1. Cementitious materials.
2. Steel reinforcement and reinforcement accessories.
3. Admixtures.
4. Curing compounds.
C. Material Test Reports: For each of the following:
1. Aggregates.
2. Field quality-control reports.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Ready-Mix-Concrete Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in
manufacturing ready-mixed concrete products and that complies with
ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and equipment.
1. Manufacturer certified according to NRMCA's "Certification of Ready Mixed
Concrete Production Facilities" (Quality Control Manual - Section 3, "Plant
Certification Checklist").
B. ACI Publications: Comply with ACI 301 (ACI 301M) unless otherwise indicated.
1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Traffic Control: Maintain access for vehicular and pedestrian traffic as required for
other construction activities.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY BDA #12127
Fire Protection and Fire Alarm
For Off-Campus Housing – Phase I
CONCRETE PAVING 32 13 13 - 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FORMS
A. Form Materials: Plywood, metal, metal-framed plywood, or other approved panel-type
materials to provide full-depth, continuous, straight, and smooth exposed surfaces.
1. Use flexible or uniformly curved forms for curves with a radius of 100 feet
(30.5 m) or less. Do not use notched and bent forms.
B. Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that will not bond
with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and that will not impair subsequent
treatments of concrete surfaces.
2.2 STEEL REINFORCEMENT
A. Plain-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185/A 185M, fabricated from steel
wire into flat sheets.
B. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420); deformed.
C. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting,
and fastening reinforcing bars, welded wire reinforcement, and dowels in place.
Manufacture bar supports according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" from
steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete of greater compressive strength than concrete
specified, and as follows:
2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS
A. Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of same type, brand,
and source throughout Project:
1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, gray portland cement Type I. Provide portland
cement from one manufacturer.
B. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33, Class 4S, uniformly graded. Provide
aggregates from a single source with documented service-record data of at least 10
years' satisfactory service in similar paving applications and service conditions using
similar aggregates and cementitious materials.
1. Coarse-Aggregate: Provide clean, sound, crushed limestone. Comply with
ASTM C33 “Concrete Aggregate”.
2. Fine Aggregate: Provide clean, sharp, natural, sand free from loam, clay lumps
or other deterious materials.
C. Water: Potable and complying with ASTM C 94/C 94M.
D. Air-Entraining Admixture:
1. Comply with ASTM C494 “Chemical Admixtures for Concrete: Type A.
2. Provide product certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other required
admixtures.
3. Subject to compliance with the requirements, provide one of the following:
a. “AHCO A/E by Anti-Hydro.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY BDA #12127
Fire Protection and Fire Alarm
For Off-Campus Housing – Phase I
CONCRETE PAVING 32 13 13 - 3
b. “MB-VR by Master Builders
c. “Seal Tight” by W.R. Meadows
d. “Daravair” by W.R. Grace
e. “AER” by Sika Corporation
E. Chemical Admixtures: Admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with
other admixtures and to contain not more than 0.1 percent water-soluble chloride
ions by mass of cementitious material.
1. Water-Reducing Admixture: Comply with ASTM C 494 “Chemical Admixttures
Concrete, Type A.
2. Subject to compliance with the requirements, provide one of the following:
a. “Pozzolith 200 N” by Master Builders
b. “Plastocrete 161” by Sika Corporation
c. “W.R.D.A.” by W.R. Grace
d. “Eucon WR-75” by Euclid Chemical Company.
3. Calcium Chloride
a. Use of calcium chloride is prohibited in concrete.
2.4 CURBING
A. Concrete Curbing
1. Plant Mixed Concrete
a. Comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents, except as
modified herein.
b. Provide Air Entrained Concrerte with mix design to provide 4000 psi at 28
days.
2. Provide metal or surfaced lumber forms, perfectly clean and smooth, without
blemished or raised grain which may cause flaws in the finished exposed
surfaces, and of sufficient thickness to resist distortion and be rigidly held in
position during construction.
2.5 CURING MATERIALS
A. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 3, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf,
weighing approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. (305 g/sq. m) dry or cotton mats.
B. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-
polyethylene sheet.
C. Water: Potable.
D. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular, film forming, manufactured for
application to fresh concrete.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following
available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not
limited to, the following:
a. Axim Italcementi Group, Inc.; Caltexol CIMFILM.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY BDA #12127
Fire Protection and Fire Alarm
For Off-Campus Housing – Phase I
CONCRETE PAVING 32 13 13 - 4
b. BASF Construction Chemicals, LLC; Confilm.
c. ChemMasters; Spray-Film.
d. Conspec by Dayton Superior; Aquafilm.
e. Dayton Superior Corporation; Sure Film (J-74).
f. Edoco by Dayton Superior; BurkeFilm.
g. Euclid Chemical Company (The), an RPM company; Eucobar.
h. Kaufman Products, Inc.; VaporAid.
i. Lambert Corporation; LAMBCO Skin.
j. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; E-CON.
k. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; EVAPRE.
l. Metalcrete Industries; Waterhold.
m. Nox-Crete Products Group; MONOFILM.
n. Sika Corporation, Inc.; SikaFilm.
o. SpecChem, LLC; Spec Film.
p. Symons by Dayton Superior; Finishing Aid.
q. TK Products, Division of Sierra Corporation; TK-2120 TRI-FILM.
r. Unitex; PRO-FILM.
s. Vexcon Chemicals Inc.; Certi-Vex EnvioAssist.
E. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1,
Class A, dissipating.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the
following available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but
are not limited to, the following:
a. Siko Corporation, Sikagard Cure/hard
b. Anti-Hydro International, Inc.; clear cure.
c. Euclid Chemical Company (The), an RPM company; pliocure.
d. Symons by Dayton Superior; Cure and Seal.
e. Sonneborn Building Products, Kure-n-Seal.
2.6 RELATED MATERIALS
A. Expansion Joint Fillers:
1. Preformed strips of elastic closed cell sponger rubber conforming to ASTM
D1752 “Performed Sponge Rubber and Cork Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete
Paving and Structural Construction, Type 1”.
2. Provide filler thickness exceeding joint width by at least 25% to fill joint
completely. Where sealing compound required, install filler up to depth required
for the compound used.
B. Sealant:
1. For walks and pavements, provide two part, pour grade, polyurethane sealing
compound, Shor A Hardness 40-60, conforming to Fed. Spec TT-S-227, “Sealing
Compound, Elastomeric Type, Multi-Component.
2. For curbs, provide polyurethane sealing compound, gun grade.
3. Comply with requirements of Section 32 13 73 “Concrete Paving Joint Sealants”.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY BDA #12127
Fire Protection and Fire Alarm
For Off-Campus Housing – Phase I
CONCRETE PAVING 32 13 13 - 5
2.7 CONCRETE MIXTURES
A. Prepare design mixtures, proportioned according to ACI 301 (ACI 301M), for each type
and strength of normal-weight concrete, and as determined by either laboratory trial
mixtures or field experience.
1. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed
concrete design mixtures for the trial batch method.
2. When automatic machine placement is used, determine design mixtures and
obtain laboratory test results that meet or exceed requirements.
B. Proportion mixtures to provide normal-weight concrete with the following properties:
1. Compressive Strength (28 Days): 4000 psi (27.6 MPa).
2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio at Point of Placement: 0.45.
3. Slump Limit: 3 inches (75mm).
C. Add air-entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in normal-
weight concrete at point of placement having an air content as follows:
1. Provide air content for all concrete exposed to freezing and thawing and/or
required to be watertight in accordance with ACI 318, Table 4.2.1, Severe
Exposure.
D. Chemical Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
1. Use water-reducing admixture in all concrete as required for placement and
workability.
2.8 CONCRETE MIXING
A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, and mix concrete materials and concrete
according to ASTM C 94/C 94M and ASTM C 1116/C 1116M. Furnish batch
certificates for each batch discharged and used in the Work.
1. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F (30 and 32 deg C), reduce
mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature
is above 90 deg F (32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.
B. Project-Site Mixing: Measure, batch, and mix concrete materials and concrete
according to ASTM C 94/C 94M. Mix concrete materials in appropriate drum-type
batch machine mixer.
1. For concrete batches of 1 cu. yd. (0.76 cu. m) or smaller, continue mixing at
least 1-1/2 minutes, but not more than 5 minutes after ingredients are in mixer,
before any part of batch is released.
2. For concrete batches larger than 1 cu. yd. (0.76 cu. m), increase mixing time by
15 seconds for each additional 1 cu. yd. (0.76 cu. m).
3. Provide batch ticket for each batch discharged and used in the Work, indicating
Project identification name and number, date, mixture type, mixing time,
quantity, and amount of water added.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY BDA #12127
Fire Protection and Fire Alarm
For Off-Campus Housing – Phase I
CONCRETE PAVING 32 13 13 - 6
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine exposed subgrades and subbase surfaces for compliance with requirements
for dimensional, grading, and elevation tolerances.
B. Proof-roll prepared subbase surface below concrete paving to identify soft pockets and
areas of excess yielding.
1. Completely proof-roll subbase in one direction and repeat in perpendicular
direction. Limit vehicle speed to 3 mph (5 km/h).
2. Proof-roll with a pneumatic-tired and loaded, 10-wheel, tandem-axle dump
truck weighing not less than 15 tons (13.6 tonnes).
3. Correct subbase with soft spots and areas of pumping or rutting exceeding
depth of 1/2 inch (13 mm) according to requirements in Division 31 Section
"Earth Moving."
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Remove loose material from compacted subbase surface immediately before placing
concrete.
3.3 EDGE FORMS AND SCREED CONSTRUCTION
A. Set, brace, and secure edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed guides to
required lines, grades, and elevations. Install forms to allow continuous progress of
work and so forms can remain in place at least 24 hours after concrete placement.
B. Clean forms after each use and coat with form-release agent to ensure separation from
concrete without damage.
3.4 STEEL REINFORCEMENT
A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating, placing,
and supporting reinforcement.
B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, or other bond-reducing
materials.
C. Arrange, space, and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in
position during concrete placement. Maintain minimum cover to reinforcement.
D. Install welded wire reinforcement in lengths as long as practicable. Lap adjoining
pieces at least one full mesh, and lace splices with wire. Offset laps of adjoining
widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY BDA #12127
Fire Protection and Fire Alarm
For Off-Campus Housing – Phase I
CONCRETE PAVING 32 13 13 - 7
3.5 JOINTS
A. General: Form construction, isolation, and control joints and tool edges true to line,
with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. Construct transverse joints at
right angles to centerline unless otherwise indicated.
1. When joining existing paving, place transverse joints to align with previously
placed joints unless otherwise indicated.
B. Construction Joints: Set construction joints at side and end terminations of paving
and at locations where paving operations are stopped for more than one-half hour
unless paving terminates at isolation joints.
1. Continue steel reinforcement across construction joints unless otherwise
indicated. Do not continue reinforcement through sides of paving strips unless
otherwise indicated.
2. Provide tie bars at sides of paving strips where indicated.
3. Butt Joints: Use bonding agent at joint locations where fresh concrete is placed
against hardened or partially hardened concrete surfaces.
4. Keyed Joints: Provide preformed keyway-section forms or bulkhead forms with
keys unless otherwise indicated. Embed keys at least 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) into
concrete.
5. Doweled Joints: Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where
indicated. Lubricate or coat with asphalt one-half of dowel length to prevent
concrete bonding to one side of joint.
C. Isolation Joints (Expansion Joints): Form isolation joints of preformed joint-filler
strips abutting concrete curbs, catch basins, manholes, inlets, structures, other fixed
objects, and where indicated.
1. Locate expansion joints at intervals as indicated on the Contract Documents.
2. Extend joint fillers full width and depth of joint.
3. Terminate joint filler 1/4 inch (6.3 mm) below finished surface if joint sealant is
indicated.
4. Place top of joint filler flush with finished concrete surface if joint sealant is not
indicated.
5. Furnish joint fillers in one-piece lengths. Where more than one length is
required, lace or clip joint-filler sections together.
6. During concrete placement, protect top edge of joint filler with metal, plastic, or
other temporary preformed cap. Remove protective cap after concrete has been
placed on both sides of joint.
D. Control Joints: Form weakened-plane control joints, sectioning concrete into areas as
indicated. Construct control joints for a depth equal to at least one-fourth of the
concrete thickness:
1. Grooved Joints: Form control joints after initial floating by grooving and
finishing each edge of joint with grooving tool to a 1/4-inch (6-mm) radius.
Repeat grooving of control joints after applying surface finishes.
E. Edging: After initial floating, tool edges of paving, gutters, curbs, and joints in
concrete with an edging tool to a 1/4-inch (6-mm) radius. Repeat tooling of edges
after applying surface finishes.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY BDA #12127
Fire Protection and Fire Alarm
For Off-Campus Housing – Phase I
CONCRETE PAVING 32 13 13 - 8
3.6 CONCRETE PLACEMENT
A. Before placing concrete, inspect and complete formwork installation, steel
reinforcement, and items to be embedded or cast-in.
B. Remove snow, ice, or frost from subbase surface and steel reinforcement before
placing concrete. Do not place concrete on frozen surfaces.
C. Moisten subbase to provide a uniform dampened condition at time concrete is placed.
Do not place concrete around manholes or other structures until they are at required
finish elevation and alignment.
D. Comply with ACI 301 (ACI 301M) requirements for measuring, mixing, transporting,
and placing concrete.
E. Do not add water to concrete during delivery or at Project site. Do not add water to
fresh concrete after testing.
F. Deposit and spread concrete in a continuous operation between transverse joints. Do
not push or drag concrete into place or use vibrators to move concrete into place.
G. Consolidate concrete according to ACI 301 (ACI 301M) by mechanical vibrating
equipment supplemented by hand spading, rodding, or tamping.
1. Consolidate concrete along face of forms and adjacent to transverse joints with
an internal vibrator. Keep vibrator away from joint assemblies, reinforcement,
or side forms. Use only square-faced shovels for hand spreading and
consolidation. Consolidate with care to prevent dislocating dowels joint devices.
H. Screed paving surface with a straightedge and strike off.
I. Commence initial floating using bull floats or darbies to impart an open-textured and
uniform surface plane before excess moisture or bleed water appears on the surface.
Do not further disturb concrete surfaces before beginning finishing operations or
spreading surface treatments.
3.7 PLACEMENT OF CONCRETE CURBING
A. Thoroughly compact all bearing surfaces for placement of the concrete curbs. Remove
unsuitable materials, replace with granular material and compact.
B. Trowel top of curb and tool all joints and edges. Immediately upon removal of forms,
rub all exposed surfaces of curbs to a smooth uniform and even surface. Plastering
with mortar to build up or finish will not be permitted.
C. Provide control joints placed midway between expansion joints.
D. Cold-Weather Placement: Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced
strength that could be caused by frost, freezing, or low temperatures. Comply with
ACI 306.1 and the following:
1. When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40 deg F (4.4
deg C), uniformly heat water and aggregates before mixing to obtain a concrete
mixture temperature of not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) and not more than 80
deg F (27 deg C) at point of placement.
2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY BDA #12127
Fire Protection and Fire Alarm
For Off-Campus Housing – Phase I
CONCRETE PAVING 32 13 13 - 9
3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents
or chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in design
mixtures.
E. Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 (ACI 301M) and as follows when hot-
weather conditions exist:
1. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F
(32 deg C) at time of placement. Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be
used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated in
total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is
Contractor's option.
2. Cover steel reinforcement with water-soaked burlap so steel temperature will not
exceed ambient air temperature immediately before embedding in concrete.
3. Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete.
Keep subgrade moisture uniform without standing water, soft spots, or dry
areas.
3.8 FLOAT FINISHING
A. General: Do not add water to concrete surfaces during finishing operations.
B. Float Finish: Begin the second floating operation when bleed-water sheen has
disappeared and concrete surface has stiffened sufficiently to permit operations. Float
surface with power-driven floats or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to
power units. Finish surfaces to true planes. Cut down high spots and fill low spots.
Refloat surface immediately to uniform granular texture.
1. Medium-to-Coarse-Textured Broom Finish: Provide a coarse finish by striating
float-finished concrete surface 1/16 to 1/8 inch (1.6 to 3 mm) deep with a stiff-
bristled broom, perpendicular to line of traffic.
3.9 CONCRETE PROTECTION AND CURING
A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or
hot temperatures.
B. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection.
C. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or
windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h (1 kg/sq. m x h)
before and during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written
instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete but before
float finishing.
D. Begin curing after finishing concrete but not before free water has disappeared from
concrete surface.
E. Curing Methods: Cure concrete by moisture curing, moisture-retaining-cover curing ,
curing compound or a combination of these as follows:
1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days
with the following materials:
a. Water.
b. Continuous water-fog spray.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY BDA #12127
Fire Protection and Fire Alarm
For Off-Campus Housing – Phase I
CONCRETE PAVING 32 13 13 - 10
c. Absorptive cover, water saturated and kept continuously wet. Cover
concrete surfaces and edges with 12-inch (300-mm) lap over adjacent
absorptive covers.
2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-
retaining cover, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped
at least 12 inches (300 mm) and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive.
Immediately repair any holes or tears occurring during installation or curing
period using cover material and waterproof tape.
3. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or
roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas that have
been subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application.
Maintain continuity of coating, and repair damage during curing period.
3.10 PAVING TOLERANCES
A. Comply with tolerances in ACI 117 and as follows:
1. Elevation: 1/2 inch (12 mm).
2. Thickness: Plus 3/8 inch (10 mm), minus 1/4 inch (6 mm).
3. Surface: Gap below 10-foot- (3-m-) long, unleveled straightedge not to exceed
1/4 inch (16 mm).
4. Joint Spacing: 3 inches (75 mm).
5. Control Joint Depth: Plus 1/4 inch (6 mm), no minus.
6. Joint Width: Plus 1/8 inch (3 mm), no minus.
3.11 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION
A. Remove and replace concrete paving that is broken, damaged, or defective or that does
not comply with requirements in this Section. Remove work in complete sections from
joint to joint unless otherwise approved by Architect.
B. Drill test cores, where directed by Architect, when necessary to determine magnitude
of cracks or defective areas. Fill drilled core holes in satisfactory paving areas with
portland cement concrete bonded to paving with epoxy adhesive.
C. Protect concrete paving from damage. Exclude traffic from paving for at least 14 days
after placement. When construction traffic is permitted, maintain paving as clean as
possible by removing surface stains and spillage of materials as they occur.
D. Maintain concrete paving free of stains, discoloration, dirt, and other foreign material.
Sweep paving not more than two days before date scheduled for Substantial
Completion inspections.
END OF SECTION
CORNELL UNIVERSITY BDA #12127
Fire Protection and Fire Alarm
For Off-Campus Housing – Phase I
TURF AND GRASSES 32 92 00 - 1
SECTION 32 92 00
TURF AND GRASSES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DEFINITIONS
A. Finish Grade: Elevation of finished surface of planting soil.
B. Manufactured Topsoil: Soil produced off-site by homogeneously blending mineral
soils or sand with stabilized organic soil amendments to produce topsoil or planting
soil.
C. Planting Soil: Standardized topsoil; existing, native surface topsoil; existing, in-place
surface soil; imported topsoil; or manufactured topsoil that is modified with soil
amendments and perhaps fertilizers to produce a soil mixture best for plant growth.
D. Subgrade: Surface or elevation of subsoil remaining after excavation is complete, or
top surface of a fill or backfill before planting soil is placed.
E. Subsoil: All soil beneath the topsoil layer of the soil profile, and typified by the lack of
organic matter and soil organisms.
F. Surface Soil: Soil that is present at the top layer of the existing soil profile at the
Project site. In undisturbed areas, the surface soil is typically topsoil, but in
disturbed areas such as urban environments, the surface soil can be subsoil.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Certification of Grass Seed: From seed vendor for each grass-seed monostand or
mixture stating the botanical and common name, percentage by weight of each
species and variety, and percentage of purity, germination, and weed seed. Include
the year of production and date of packaging.
C. Product Certificates: For soil amendments and fertilizers, from manufacturer.
1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Seed and Other Packaged Materials: Deliver packaged materials in original,
unopened containers showing weight, certified analysis, name and address of
manufacturer, and indication of conformance with state and federal laws, as
applicable.
B. Bulk Materials:
1. Do not dump or store bulk materials near structures, utilities, walkways and
pavements, or on existing turf areas or plants.
2. Accompany each delivery of bulk fertilizers, lime, and soil amendments with
appropriate certificates.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY BDA #12127
Fire Protection and Fire Alarm
For Off-Campus Housing – Phase I
TURF AND GRASSES 32 92 00 - 2
1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Planting Restrictions: Plant during one of the following periods. Coordinate planting
periods with initial maintenance periods to provide required maintenance from date of
planting completion .
1. Spring Planting: April 15th to June 15th.
2. Fall Planting: August 15th to October 15th.
B. Weather Limitations: Proceed with planting only when existing and forecasted
weather conditions permit planting to be performed when beneficial and optimum
results may be obtained. Apply products during favorable weather conditions
according to manufacturer's written instructions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SEED
A. Grass Seed: Fresh, clean, dry, new-crop seed complying with AOSA's "Journal of
Seed Technology; Rules for Testing Seeds" for purity and germination tolerances.
B. Seed Species (General Lawn): Seed of grass species as follows:
COMMON NAME PARTS PURITY MINIMUM
GERMINATION
Kentucky Bluegrass 40% 90% 90%
Creeping Red Fescue 25% 97% 90%
Perennial Ryegrass 35% 90% 90%
2.2 INORGANIC SOIL AMENDMENTS
A. Lime: ASTM C 602, agricultural liming material containing a minimum of 80 percent
calcium carbonate equivalent.
1. Provide lime in form of ground dolomitic limestone or calcitic limestone.
2.3 ORGANIC SOIL AMENDMENTS
A. Compost: Well-composted, stable, and weed-free organic matter, pH range of 5.5 to 8;
moisture content 35 to 55 percent by weight; 100 percent passing through 1-inch (25-
mm) sieve; soluble salt content of 5 to 10 decisiemens/m; not exceeding 0.5 percent
inert contaminants and free of substances toxic to plantings; and as follows:
1. Organic Matter Content: 50 to 60 percent of dry weight.
B. Sphagnum Peat: Partially decomposed sphagnum peat moss, finely divided or of
granular texture, with a pH range of 3.4 to 4.8.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY BDA #12127
Fire Protection and Fire Alarm
For Off-Campus Housing – Phase I
TURF AND GRASSES 32 92 00 - 3
2.4 FERTILIZERS
A. Commercial Fertilizer: Commercial-grade complete fertilizer of neutral character,
consisting of fast- and slow-release nitrogen, 50 percent derived from natural organic
sources of urea formaldehyde, phosphorous, and potassium in the following
composition:
1. Composition: Nitrogen, phosphorous, and potassium in amounts
recommended in soil reports from a qualified soil-testing laboratory.
2.5 PLANTING SOILS
A. Planting Soil: Imported ASTM D 5268 topsoil, with pH range of 5.5 to 7, a minimum
of 4 percent organic material content; free of stones 1 inch (25 mm) or larger in any
dimension and other extraneous materials harmful to plant growth. Mix
ASTM D 5268 topsoil with soil amendments and fertilizers in amounts recommended
in the soil test reports by a qualified soil testing agency.
B. Planting Soil: Existing, native surface topsoil formed under natural conditions and
stockpiled on-site. Verify suitability of native surface topsoil to produce viable
planting soil. Clean soil of roots, plants, sod, stones, clay lumps, and other
extraneous materials harmful to plant growth. Existing topsoil shall be mechanically
screened.
1. Supplement with imported ASTM D 5268 topsoil planting soil when quantities
are insufficient.
2. Mix existing, native surface topsoil with soil amendments and fertilizers in
amounts recommended in the soil test reports by a qualified soil testing
agency :
2.6 MULCHES
A. Straw Mulch: Provide air-dry, clean, mildew- and seed-free, salt hay or threshed
straw of wheat, rye, oats, or barley.
B. Fiber Mulch: Biodegradable, dyed-wood, cellulose-fiber mulch; nontoxic and free of
plant-growth or germination inhibitors; with a maximum moisture content of 15
percent and a pH range of 4.5 to 6.5.
C. Nonasphaltic Tackifier: Colloidal tackifier recommended by fiber-mulch manufacturer
for slurry application; nontoxic and free of plant-growth or germination inhibitors.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas to be planted for compliance with requirements and other conditions
affecting performance.
1. Verify that no foreign or deleterious material or liquid such as paint, paint
washout, concrete slurry, concrete layers or chunks, cement, plaster, oils,
gasoline, diesel fuel, paint thinner, turpentine, tar, roofing compound, or acid
has been deposited in soil within a planting area.
2. Do not mix or place soils and soil amendments in frozen, wet, or muddy
conditions.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY BDA #12127
Fire Protection and Fire Alarm
For Off-Campus Housing – Phase I
TURF AND GRASSES 32 92 00 - 4
3. Suspend soil spreading, grading, and tilling operations during periods of
excessive soil moisture until the moisture content reaches acceptable levels to
attain the required results.
4. Uniformly moisten excessively dry soil that is not workable and which is too
dusty.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
C. If contamination by foreign or deleterious material or liquid is present in soil within a
planting area, remove the soil and contamination as directed by Architect and replace
with new planting soil.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities, trees, shrubs,
and plantings from damage caused by planting operations.
1. Protect adjacent and adjoining areas from hydroseeding and hydromulching
overspray.
2. Protect grade stakes set by others until directed to remove them.
3.3 TURF AREA PREPARATION
A. Limit turf subgrade preparation to areas to be planted.
B. Newly Graded Subgrades: Loosen subgrade to a minimum depth of 4 inches (100
mm). Remove stones larger than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) in any dimension and sticks,
roots, rubbish, and other extraneous matter and legally dispose of them off Owner's
property.
1. Thoroughly blend planting soil before spreading or spread topsoil, apply soil
amendments and fertilizer on surface, and thoroughly blend planting soil.
a. Delay mixing fertilizer with planting soil if planting will not proceed within
a few days.
b. Mix lime with dry soil before mixing fertilizer.
2. Spread planting soil to a depth of 4 inches (100 mm) but not less than
required to meet finish grades after light rolling and natural settlement. Do
not spread if planting soil or subgrade is frozen, muddy, or excessively wet.
a. Reduce elevation of planting soil to allow for soil thickness of sod.
C. Unchanged Subgrades: If turf is to be planted in areas unaltered or undisturbed by
excavating, grading, or surface-soil stripping operations, prepare surface soil as
follows:
1. Remove existing grass, vegetation, and turf. Do not mix into surface soil.
2. Loosen surface soil to a depth of at least 6 inches (150 mm). Apply soil
amendments and fertilizers according to planting soil mix proportions and mix
thoroughly into top 4 inches (100 mm) of soil. Till soil to a homogeneous
mixture of fine texture.
3. Remove stones larger than 1 inch (25 mm) in any dimension and sticks, roots,
trash, and other extraneous matter.
4. Legally dispose of waste material, including grass, vegetation, and turf, off
Owner's property.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY BDA #12127
Fire Protection and Fire Alarm
For Off-Campus Housing – Phase I
TURF AND GRASSES 32 92 00 - 5
D. Finish Grading: Grade planting areas to a smooth, uniform surface plane with loose,
uniformly fine texture. Grade to within plus or minus 1/2 inch (13 mm) of finish
elevation. Roll and rake, remove ridges, and fill depressions to meet finish grades.
Limit finish grading to areas that can be planted in the immediate future.
E. Moisten prepared area before planting if soil is dry. Water thoroughly and allow
surface to dry before planting. Do not create muddy soil.
F. Before planting, obtain Architect's acceptance of finish grading; restore planting areas
if eroded or otherwise disturbed after finish grading.
3.4 SEEDING
A. Sow seed with spreader or seeding machine. Do not broadcast or drop seed when
wind velocity exceeds 5 mph (8 km/h). Evenly distribute seed by sowing equal
quantities in two directions at right angles to each other.
1. Do not use wet seed or seed that is moldy or otherwise damaged.
2. Do not seed against existing trees. Limit extent of seed to outside edge of
planting saucer.
B. Sow seed at a total rate of 4 lb/1000 sq. ft. (1.8 kg/92.9 sq.m or as recommended by
the seed supplier.
C. Rake seed lightly into top 1/8 inch (3 mm) of soil, roll lightly, and water with fine
spray.
D. Protect seeded areas with slopes not exceeding 1:4 by spreading straw mulch. Spread
uniformly at a minimum rate of 2 tons/acre (42 kg/92.9 sq. m) to form a continuous
blanket 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) in loose thickness over seeded areas. Spread by hand,
blower, or other suitable equipment.
3.5 HYDROSEEDING
A. Hydroseeding: Mix specified seed, fertilizer, and fiber mulch in water, using
equipment specifically designed for hydroseed application. Continue mixing until
uniformly blended into homogeneous slurry suitable for hydraulic application.
1. Mix slurry with fiber-mulch manufacturer's recommended tackifier.
2. Apply slurry uniformly to all areas to be seeded in a one-step process. Apply
slurry at a rate so that mulch component is deposited at not less than 1500-
lb/acre (15.6-kg/92.9 sq. m) dry weight, and seed component is deposited at
not less than the specified seed-sowing rate.
3.6 TURF RENOVATION
A. Renovate existing turf.
B. Renovate existing turf damaged by Contractor's operations, such as storage of
materials or equipment and movement of vehicles.
1. Reestablish turf where settlement or washouts occur or where minor regrading
is required.
2. Install new planting soil as required.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY BDA #12127
Fire Protection and Fire Alarm
For Off-Campus Housing – Phase I
TURF AND GRASSES 32 92 00 - 6
C. Remove sod and vegetation from diseased or unsatisfactory turf areas; do not bury in
soil.
D. Remove topsoil containing foreign materials such as oil drippings, fuel spills, stones,
gravel, and other construction materials resulting from Contractor's operations, and
replace with new planting soil.
E. Mow, dethatch, core aerate, and rake existing turf.
F. Remove weeds before seeding. Where weeds are extensive, apply selective herbicides
as required. Do not use pre-emergence herbicides.
G. Remove waste and foreign materials, including weeds, soil cores, grass, vegetation,
and turf, and legally dispose of them off Owner's property.
H. Till stripped, bare, and compacted areas thoroughly to a soil depth of 6 inches (150
mm).
I. Apply soil amendments and initial fertilizers required for establishing new turf and
mix thoroughly into top 4 inches (100 mm) of existing soil. Install new planting soil to
fill low spots and meet finish grades.
J. Apply seed and protect with straw mulch as required for new turf.
K. Water newly planted areas and keep moist until new turf is established.
3.7 TURF MAINTENANCE
A. Maintain and establish turf by watering, fertilizing, weeding, mowing, trimming,
replanting, and performing other operations as required to establish healthy, viable
turf. Roll, regrade, and replant bare or eroded areas and remulch to produce a
uniformly smooth turf. Provide materials and installation the same as those used in
the original installation.
1. Fill in as necessary soil subsidence that may occur because of settling or other
processes. Replace materials and turf damaged or lost in areas of subsidence.
2. In areas where mulch has been disturbed by wind or maintenance operations,
add new mulch and anchor as required to prevent displacement.
3. Apply treatments as required to keep turf and soil free of pests and pathogens
or disease. Use integrated pest management practices whenever possible to
minimize the use of pesticides and reduce hazards.
B. Watering: Install and maintain temporary piping, hoses, and turf-watering equipment
to convey water from sources and to keep turf uniformly moist to a depth of 4 inches
(100 mm).
1. Schedule watering to prevent wilting, puddling, erosion, and displacement of
seed or mulch. Lay out temporary watering system to avoid walking over
muddy or newly planted areas.
2. Water turf with fine spray at a minimum rate of 1 inch (25 mm) per week
unless rainfall precipitation is adequate.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY BDA #12127
Fire Protection and Fire Alarm
For Off-Campus Housing – Phase I
TURF AND GRASSES 32 92 00 - 7
C. Mow turf as soon as top growth is tall enough to cut. Repeat mowing to maintain
specified height without cutting more than 1/3 of grass height. Remove no more than
1/3 of grass-leaf growth in initial or subsequent mowings. Do not delay mowing until
grass blades bend over and become matted. Do not mow when grass is wet.
Schedule initial and subsequent mowings to maintain the following grass height:
1. Mow grass to a height of 2 inches when average height of grass is 3 inches.
D. Turf Postfertilization: Apply fertilizer after initial mowing and when grass is dry.
1. Use fertilizer that will provide actual nitrogen of at least 1 lb/1000 sq. ft. (0.45
kg/92.9 sq. m) to turf area.
3.8 SATISFACTORY TURF
A. Turf installations shall meet the following criteria as determined by Architect:
1. Satisfactory Seeded Turf: At end of maintenance period, a healthy, uniform,
close stand of grass has been established, free of weeds and surface
irregularities, with coverage exceeding 90 percent over any 10 sq. ft. (0.92
sq. m) and bare spots not exceeding 5 by 5 inches (125 by 125 mm).
B. Use specified materials to reestablish turf that does not comply with requirements
and continue maintenance until turf is satisfactory.
3.9 PESTICIDE APPLICATION
A. Apply pesticides and other chemical products and biological control agents in
accordance with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and manufacturer's
written recommendations. Coordinate applications with Owner's operations and
others in proximity to the Work. Notify Owner before each application is performed.
B. Post-Emergent Herbicides (Selective and Non-Selective): Apply only as necessary to
treat already-germinated weeds and in accordance with manufacturer's written
recommendations.
3.10 CLEANUP AND PROTECTION
A. Promptly remove soil and debris created by turf work from paved areas. Clean wheels
of vehicles before leaving site to avoid tracking soil onto roads, walks, or other paved
areas.
B. Erect temporary fencing or barricades and warning signs as required to protect newly
planted areas from traffic. Maintain fencing and barricades throughout initial
maintenance period and remove after plantings are established.
END OF SECTION
FIRE PROTECTION/ALARM
JRB
GAH/MVR
F-502
SITE PLAN
AND
DGM
DETAILS
SCALE:NONE5
SITE PLAN 0ADDENDUM 1GENERAL NOTES
SURROUNDING LAWN AREAS.
CONSTRUCTION WHICH ARE NOT OTHERWISE NOTED TO MATCH
13. FINE GRADE AND SEED ALL AREAS DISTURBED BY THIS
WHICH ARE DISTURBED DURING CONSTRUCTION.
12. REPAIR TO MATCH EXISTING, ALL EXISTING SITE CONDITIONS
ASPHALT PAVEMENT WITH AN ASPHALT EMULSION.
EXISTING. TREAT ALL JOINTS BETWEEN NEW AND EXISTING
11. USE SAW CUTS IN AREAS WHERE NEW PAVEMENT IS JOINED WITH
YORK STATE DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH AND LOCAL MUNICIPAL UTILITIES.
TABLET METHOD EXPECTED, AND SATISFY THE REQUIREMENTS OF THE NEW
10. ALL WATER MAINS TO BE DISINFECTED IN ACCORDANCE WITH AWWA C651,
AND LOCAL MUNICIPAL UTILITIES.
YORK STATE PLUMBING CODE, NEW YORK STATE DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH,
MAINS IN ACCORDANCE WITH REQUIREMENTS OF NFPA 24, AWWA C600, NEW
9. AT THE COMPLETION OF INSTALLATION, FLUSH AND TEST WATER SERVICE
OF PUBLIC WORKS AND THE LOCAL MUNICIPAL UTILITIES.
SERVICES. COORDINATE UTILITY CONNECTIONS WITH LOCAL DEPARTMENT
BACKFILLING, AND SURFACE REPAIRS FOR INSTALLATION OF SITE WATER
ON THE DRAWINGS, AND PROVIDE ALL NECESSARY EXCAVATION, BEDDING,
8. PROVIDE CONNECTION TO EXISTING WATER MAIN AS SHOWN OR INDICATED
AGENCIES HAVING JURISDICTION.
OF ENVIRONMENTAL CONSERVATION, LOCAL UTILITY AUTHORITIES, OR OTHER
NEW YORK STATE DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH, NEW YORK STATE DEPARTMENT
WITH THE REQUIREMENTS OF THE LOCAL DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS,
7. PERFORM ALL WORK FOR INSTALLATION OF WATER LINES IN ACCORDANCE
AND LEGALLY DISPOSED.
6. ALL ITEMS NOTED FOR REMOVAL ARE TO BE COMPLETELY REMOVED
PORTIONS OF PLANTS INCLUDING STUMPS AND ROOT SYSTEM.
ABOVE GROUND PORTIONS OF PLANTS AND GRUB ALL BELOW GROUND
NECESSARY TO INSTALL THE WORK OF THIS CONTRACT. REMOVE ALL
5. CLEAR AND GRUB ALL EXISTING VEGETATION REGARDLESS OF SIZE,
UTILITY COMPANY.
EXCAVATION. SUPPORT SYSTEMS TO BE RECOMMENDED BY THE
4. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL SUPPORT ALL UTILITIES EXPOSED BY HIS
DAMAGE DURING REMOVAL OPERATIONS.
3. MAINTAIN EXISTING UTILITIES IN SERVICE AND PROTECT THEM AGAINST
CAUTION.
STAKEOUT. PERFORM ALL EXCAVATION OPERATIONS WITH EXTREME
ORGANIZATION (U.F.P.O.) PRIOR TO DIGGING FOR A UTILITY
SIZES INCLUDING NOTIFYING THE UNDERGROUND FACILITIES PROTECTIVE
RESPONSIBILITY OF VERIFYING ALL UTILITY LOCATIONS AND
ARE APPROXIMATE. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL BEAR THE
THE LOCATIONS OF ALL EXISTING UNDERGROUND UTILITIES SHOWN
2. DRAWINGS MAY NOT INDICATE ALL EXISTING UTILITIES.
/ ENGINEER.
CONTRACTOR SHALL IMMEDIATELY NOTIFY THE ARCHITECT
TO PREPARATION OF BID. IN CASE OF ANY DISCREPANCY,
1. VERIFY ALL EXISTING CONDITIONS AND DIMENSIONS PRIOR
APRIL 16, 2013
1 2 3 4 5
D
C
B
A
Drawing Number
Date:
Drawn By:
Designed By:
Reviewed By:
Project Number:
1 2 3 4
D
C
B
A
5Filename:Model Name:F-502F:\projects\12127\DRAWINGS\F_Site.dgnpdf.pltcfgPlot Driver:jrb03:02:43 PM on Tuesday, April 16, 2013Plotted:By:DATEBYNOREVISION DESCRIPTION12127WITHOUT WRITTEN PERMISSION FROM BDA.THIS DOCUMENT MAY NOT BE REPRODUCED2013COPYRIGHTCCCOPYRIGHT2013WITHOUT WRITTEN PERMISSION FROM BDA.THIS DOCUMENT MAY NOT BE REPRODUCEDCORNELL UNIVERSITYPHASE 1OFF-CAMPUS HOUSINGFIRE ALARM FOR FIRE PROTECTION AND WARNING
STATE EDUCATION LAW ARE STRICTLY PROHIBITED.
CONFORMING TO SECTION 7307, NEW YORK
ANY ALTERATIONS TO THIS DOCUMENT NOT
OD 12"12"6"ODVARIES5’-0" MIN - WATER LINES1’-6"SCALE:NONE1
PAVEMENT COURSES
LAWN AREAS PAVED AREAS
(SEE PLAN FOR SIZE)
PIPE/UTILITY
AND MULCH
TOPSOIL, SEED
DETECTABLE WARNING TAPE
PIPE BEDDING MATERIAL
SELECTED GRANULAR FILL
COMPACTED BACKFILL:
SUBBASE COURSEMAX
UNDISTURBED SUBGRADE
SOIL MATERIAL
SATISFACTORY
BACKFILL:
COMPACTED
UTILITY TRENCH12"2
4
3
F-502
F-502
F-502
1
F-502
2
4
3
F-502
F-502
F-502
1
F-502
2
4
3
F-502
F-502
F-502
1
F-502
38’ 7"
27’ 8"
32’ 8"
NOTES:
SEALER) TYP
(FINISH JOINT WITH ASPHALT
PAVEMENT SAW CUT LINE
AND SUBBASE
REMOVE EXISTING PAVEMENT
12" DEPTH SUBBASE COURSE
3" ASPHALT BINDER COURSE
1-1/2" ASPHALT TOP COURSE
COMPACTED SUBGRADE
AND SUBBASE TO REMAIN
EXISTING ASPHALT PAVEMENT
SCALE:NONE2
ASPHALT PAVEMENT REPAIR
VARIES
TRENCH WIDTH
CITY OF ITHACA.
SPECIFICATIONS OF CORNELL UNIVERSITY AND THE
ALL WORK TO CONFORM TO THE STANDARDS AND2.
ALL DEPTHS OF MATERIALS ARE AFTER COMPACTION.1.
CL
6"1’-8"8"6"3"3"SCALE:NONE4
CONCRETE CURB
SUBGRADE
COMPACTED
MATERIAL
COMPACTED SUBBASE
DETAIL
REFER TO APPROPRIATE
FOR PAVED AREAS
4" DEPTH TOPSOIL
FINISH GRADE1/2" R
TOP AND BOTTOM
(2) #4 REBAR CONT.
CONCRETE CURB
4000 PSI CAST-IN-PLACE
1"R
NOTES:
REPAIR SEE DETAIL 2/F-502
ASPHALT PAVEMENT,
CITY OF ITHACA.
SPECIFICATIONS OF CORNELL UNIVERSITY AND THE
ALL WORK TO CONFORM TO THE STANDARDS AND1.
EXISTING
MATCH
2"
(SEE NOTE 1)
EXPANSION JOINT
FINISH WITH NEW
OR CONTROL JOINT.
AT NEAREST EXPANSION
CONCRETE PAVEMENT
SAW CUT EXISTING
SUBGRADE
COMPACTED
SUBBASE TO REMAIN
PAVEMENT AND
EXISTING CONCRETE
(TYP)
EXPANSION JOINTS
DISCONTINUE AT
6x6 W2.9xW2.9 WWF
REINFORCING:
BROOM FINISH SURFACE
CONCRETE PAVEMENT
4" DEPTH, 4,000 PSI
SUBBASE COURSE
6" DEPTH
SCALE:NONE3
NOTES:
CONCRETE SIDEWALK REPAIR
CITY OF ITHACA.
SPECIFICATIONS OF CORNELL UNIVERSITY AND THE
ALL WORK TO CONFORM TO THE STANDARDS AND2.
SEALER.
PREMOLD FILLER AND TO SURFACE WITH POLYURETHANE JOINT
" OF PAVEMENT SURFACE WITH AN ASPHALT IMPREGNATED
PROVIDE " WIDE, FULL DEPTH JOINTS. FILL JOINTS TO WITHIN1.
BUILDING #618-620
BUILDING #636
BUILDING #638
WITH 4" CURB VALVE
LIVE-TAP CONNECTION
LATERAL TO BUILDING
FIRE PROTECTION SERVICE
4" COMBINED DOMESTIC/
GRASS
WITH 4" CURB VALVE
LIVE-TAP CONNECTION
LATERAL TO BUILDING
FIRE PROTECTION SERVICE
4" COMBINED DOMESTIC/
LATERAL TO BUILDING
FIRE PROTECTION SERVICE
4" COMBINED DOMESTIC/
STEWART AVE
EXISTING WATER MAIN
LANDSCAPING AS REQUIRED
REMOVE SHRUBS AND
LANDSCAPING AS REQUIRED
REMOVE SHRUBS AND
METAL RAILING
DO NOT DISTURB EX
EX SIDEWALK
EX SIDEWALK
EX SIDEWALK
EX SIDEWALK
EX SIDEWALK
EX SIDEWALK
EX SIDEWALK
EX GRASS
EX CURB
NOTES:
ALL SIDEWALKS ARE CONCRETE.1.
FIRE PROTECTION/ALARM
JRB
GAH/MVR
F-001
SITE PLAN
AND
NOTES
FIRE PROTECTION SYMBOL LEGEND
FS
VS
DS
VS
FIRE ALARM SYMBOL LEGEND
F
F S
C
SHUT OFF VALVE
SWING CHECK VALVE
WATER FLOW SWITCH
SYSTEM RISER
PIPE CAP/PLUG
PIPE TURNS DOWN
DROP FROM BOTTOM OF PIPE
PIPE RISE ABOVE
DRY HORIZONTAL SIDEWALL SPRINKLER
PENDENT SPRINKLER
UPRIGHT SPRINKLER
WET PIPE SYSTEM PIPING
ELECTRONIC SUPERVISORY DEVICE
WATER SUPPLY INFORMATION
F SS
F
SCALE:NONE1
SITE PLAN
FLOW: 1235 GPM
RESIDUAL PRESSURE: 20 PSI
STATIC PRESSURE: 80 PSI
PROVIDED BY: CITY OF ITHACA
HORIZONTAL SIDEWALL SPRINKLER
GENERAL FIRE PROTECTION NOTES
DRAWING INDEX
WATER ENTRIES AND DETAILSF-501
SECOND AND THIRD FLOOR PLANS BUILDING #638F-106
BASEMENT AND FIRST FLOOR PLANS BUILDING #638F-105
SECOND AND THIRD FLOOR PLANS BUILDING #636F-104
BASEMENT AND FIRST FLOOR PLANS BUILDING #636F-103
SECOND AND THIRD FLOOR PLANS BUILDING #618-620F-102
BASEMENT AND FIRST FLOOR PLANS BUILDING #618-620F-101
SITE PLAN AND NOTESF-001
DESIGN CODES
GENERAL ABATEMENT NOTES:
EMPLOYED ON THE PROJECT AS REQUIRED BY OSHA 29 CFR PART 1926.
4. CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR PERSONAL AIR SAMPLING OF ALL PERSONNEL
THE WORK AREA AND PREVENT LEAD EXPOSURE TO THE PUBLIC AND ENVIRONMENT.
3. PROVIDE ALL NECESSARY DUST BARRIERS TO PREVENT THE SPREAD OF DUST FROM
WITH 29 CFR PART 1926.62 AND OTHER APPLICABLE REGULATIONS.
(GREATER THAN 0.5% LEAD BY WEIGHT). PERFORM HANDLING OF ALL PAINTS IN ACCORDANCE
2. ALL PAINTS ARE ASSUMED TO CONTAIN DETECTABLE CONCENTRATIONS OF LEAD
REGULATIONS WILL APPLY.
ABATEMENT; HOWEVER, OSHA WORKER PROTECTION STANDARDS AND OTHER APPLICABLE
ASBESTOS (LESS THAN 1% ASBESTOS BY WEIGHT). THIS MATERIAL DOES NOT REQUIRE
1. SPACKLING COMPOUND AT 638 STEWART AVENUE CONTAINED TRACE AMOUNTS OF
MM MONITOR MODULE
MANUAL FIRE ALARM BOX
SMOKE DETECTOR
FIRE ALARM NOTIFICATION APPLIANCE(AUDIO/VISUAL)
CARBON MONOXIDE DETECTOR
F MS MULTI-CRITERIA DETECTOR WITH SOUND BASE
SMOKE DETECTOR WITH SOUND BASE
LOW TEMPERATURE SENSORT
ABBREVIATIONS
EH&S CORNELL UNIVERSITY ENVIRONMENTAL HEALTH AND SAFETY
GENERAL NOTES
CONTROL VALVE WITH ELECTRONIC SUPERVISORY DEVICE
FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTION (5" STORZ TYPE)
SPRINKLERS IS LOCATED ABOVE CEILINGS.
EXISTING CEILINGS AND PAINTED. BRANCH LINE PIPING SUPPLYING PENDENT
6. TYPICALLY SPRINKLER MAIN PIPING INDICATED IS RUN EXPOSED BELOW
WITH SECTION 6.6.3.
NFPA 13R SECTION 6.6.2. OMIT FIRE SPRINKLER COVERAGE IN CLOSETS COMPLYING
- OMIT FIRE SPRINKLER COVERAGE IN MODULE BATHROOM LESS THAN 55 SQ.FT. PER
- PROVIDE LISTED QUICK RESPONSE TYPE SPRINKLERS IN ALL OTHER AREAS.
- DESIGN DENSITY: 0.10 GPM/SQ. FT. OVER AREA DESIGNATED IN DATA SHEET.
2-5(JAN.2010) AND NFPA 13R USING RESIDENTIAL TYPE SPRINKLERS.
A. LIVING MODULES AND ASSOCIATED CORRIDORS: DESIGN PER FM DATA SHEET
THE FOLLOWING DESIGN BASIS:
5. PROVIDE HYDRAULICALLY DESIGNED AUTOMATIC FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS USING
INSTALLATION OF FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEM.
4. PROVIDE CUTTING AND PATCHING OF WALLS, AND CEILING NECESSARY TO PERFORM
FOR EACH FIRE PROTECTION SERVICE.
3. PROVIDE LISTED/APPROVED DOUBLE CHECK VALVE BACKFLOW PREVENTION ASSEMBLY
HYDRAULIC CALCULATIONS, AND COORDINATION WITH ALL OTHER TRADES.
2. PROVIDE SHOP DRAWING WITH FINAL SPRINKLER SYSTEM LAYOUT, SIZING, SPRINKLER
NEW YORK STATE BUILDING CODE AND FIRE CODE REQUIREMENTS.
DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS FM DATA SHEET 2-5; NFPA 13R; AND APPLICABLE
1. PROVIDE FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM IN ACCORDANCE WITH CORNELL UNIVERSITY
OR PROVIDE AN ESCUTCHEON PLATE TO COVER THE PENETRATION.
4. FOR WALL PENETRATIONS WITHIN APARTMENTS, SEAL WITH ACRYLIC LATEX SEALANT
ACCORDANCE WITH UL SYSTEM W-L-1001 OR OTHER APPROVED UL SYSTEM.
OR ADJACENT APARTMENTS, FIRESTOP WITH UL LISTED FIRESTOP SEALANT IN
3. FOR WALL PENETRATIONS BETWEEN APARTMENTS AND COMMON CORRIDOR
ACCORDANCE WITH UL SYSTEM F-C-1001 OR OTHER APPROVED UL SYSTEM.
2. FOR ALL FLOOR PENETRATIONS, FIRESTOP WITH A UL LISTED FIRESTOP SEALANT IN
AND WITH RECOMMENDATIONS IN THE MPI MANUAL. MATCH EXISTING PAINT COLORS.
APPLY PAINT IN COMPLIANCE WITH MANUFACTURER’S WRITTEN INSTRUCTIONS
PRODUCTS LIST. USE ONLY LOW-VOC PAINTS. MATCH EXISTING FINISHES.
STANDARDS. ALL PRODUCTS MUST BE LISTED IN THE MPI APPROVED
PRODUCTS THAT COMPLY WITH MASTER PAINTERS INSTITUTE’S (MPI)
1. PATCH AND PAINT ALL SURFACES DISTURBED BY WORK. PROVIDE PAINT
DGM
FACU FIRE ALARM CONTROL UNIT
DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS
- CORNELL UNIVERSITY FACILITY SERVICES
WHERE REFERENCED FROM NFPA 13R
- APPLICABLE PORTIONS OF NFPA 13 (2007)
- NFPA 24 - 2007
- NFPA 70 - 2008 - NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE
- NFPA 13R - 2007
- NFPA 72 - 2007 - NATIONAL FIRE ALARM
- NYSBC - 2010 - BUILDING CODE OF NYS
1 2 3 4 5
D
C
B
A
Drawing Number
Date:
Drawn By:
Designed By:
Reviewed By:
Project Number:
1 2 3 4
D
C
B
A
5Filename:Model Name:F-001F:\projects\12127\DRAWINGS\F_ABB.dgnpdf.pltcfgPlot Driver:jrb03:32:49 PM on Monday, April 01, 2013Plotted:By:DATEBYNOREVISION DESCRIPTIONof
12127
8WITHO UT WRITTEN PERMISSIO N FROM BDA.THIS DOCUMENT MAY NOT BE REPRO DUCED2013COPYRIGHTCCCOPYRIGHT2013WITHO UT WRITTEN PERMISSIO N FROM BDA.THIS DOCUMENT MAY NOT BE REPRO DUCEDCORNELL UNIVERSITYPHASE 1OFF-CAMPUS HOUSINGFIRE ALARM FOR FIRE PROTECTION AND MARCH 28, 2013
WARNING
STATE EDUCATION LAW ARE STRICTLY PROHIBITED.
CONFORMING TO SECTION 7307, NEW YORK
ANY ALTERATIONS TO THIS DOCUMENT NOT
BUILDING 638
BUILDING 636
BUILDING 618-620
SCALE:A 1/4"=1’-0"SCALE:B 1/4"=1’-0"
FIRST FLOOR PLAN
FIRE PROTECTION/ALARM
BASEMENT
AND FIRST
FLOOR PLANS
JRB
GAH/MVR
F-101
BUILDING #618-620
0’12’2’4’8’
1/4" = 1’-0"SCALE:
BASEMENT PLAN
618-620 STEWART AVENUE618-620 STEWART AVENUE
BEDROOM
CLO
BOILER ROOM
STORAGE
BEDROOM
LIVING ROOM
KITCHEN
BATHROOM
UTILITY
CLO
CLO
BEDROOM
LIVING ROOM
KITCHEN
BATHROOM
BATHROOM
KITCHEN
LIVING ROOM
CLO
CLO
PORCH
BEDROOM
BEDROOM
CLO
CLO
CLO
CLO
BATHROOM
KITCHEN
LIVING ROOM
FOYER
FOYER
PORCH
LIVING ROOM
BEDROOM
BATHROOM
CLO
CLO
CLO CLO
KITCHEN
1
KEYED NOTES:
GENERAL FIRE ALARM DEMOLITION NOTES:
MONOXIDE DETECTORS TO EH&S.
SUBMITTING BID. TURN OVER ALL REMOVED CARBON
FIELD VERIFY EXACT QUANTITIES PRIOR TO
NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES AND 2 PULL STATIONS.
DETECTORS, 9 CARBON MONOXIDE DETECTORS, 3
2. BUILDING 618-620 HAS APPROXIMATELY 24 SMOKE/HEAT
CIRCUIT TO BE REUSED FOR NEW FACU.
EXISTING TELEPHONE WIRING AND 120V BRANCH
1. REMOVE EXISTING FIRE ALARM SYSTEM COMPLETE.
2
PHONE LINES TO NEW FACU.
EXTEND WIRING TO NEW FACU. CONNECT EXISTING COPPER
CONNECT NEW FACU TO EXISTING 120V BRANCH CIRCUIT.
UP
DGM
AND HEIGHT WITH EH&S.
INDICATE A FIRE ALARM CONDITION. COORDINATE LOCATION
PROVIDE EXTERIOR (WEATHERPROOF) 110cd STROBE TO
1 2 3 4 5
D
C
B
A
Drawing Number
Date:
Drawn By:
Designed By:
Reviewed By:
Project Number:
1 2 3 4
D
C
B
A
5Filename:Model Name:F-101F:\projects\12127\DRAWINGS\F_PL-0-1_BLDG618.dgnpdf.pltcfgPlot Driver:jrb03:32:52 PM on Monday, April 01, 2013Plotted:By:DATEBYNOREVISION DESCRIPTIONof
12127
8WITHO UT WRITTEN PERMISSIO N FROM BDA.THIS DOCUMENT MAY NOT BE REPRO DUCED2013COPYRIGHTCCCOPYRIGHT2013WITHO UT WRITTEN PERMISSIO N FROM BDA.THIS DOCUMENT MAY NOT BE REPRO DUCEDCORNELL UNIVERSITYPHASE 1OFF-CAMPUS HOUSINGFIRE ALARM FOR FIRE PROTECTION AND MARCH 28, 2013
WARNING
STATE EDUCATION LAW ARE STRICTLY PROHIBITED.
CONFORMING TO SECTION 7307, NEW YORK
ANY ALTERATIONS TO THIS DOCUMENT NOT
DS
DSDS
F SS
F
F SS
F MS
F
F
F SS
F SS
F
F
FFSS
F SS
C
C
C
UP TO FIRST FLOOR
SPRINKLER RISER
WATER ENTRY
1" DOMESTIC
EX 1"
WATER ENTRY
4" FIRE PROTECTION
BACKFLOW PREVENTION DEVICE
DOUBLE CHECK VALVE
C
F S
F S
GAS BOILER
F
F
(TYPICAL)
GAS STOVE
F
TO BRING IN NEW ENTRY
SHIFT TANKS AS NEEDED4"
ALARM BELL
ELECTRIC
TEST HEADER
BACKFLOW PREVENTER
FIRE PROTECTION ENTRY
4" COMBINED DOMESTIC/
ON B/F-101
CONTINUE
CONTINUE ON 4/F-501
DSDSDS
F S
C
F
F
FACU
F SS
F SS
F SS
C
F MS
UP TO SECOND FLOOR
SPRINKLER RISER
DOWN TO BASEMENT
SPRINKLER RISER
SWING JOINT UP
F MS
F S
F S
F WP
1
2
F
F
UP TO FIRST FLOOR MID-LANDING
SUPPLIES COVERAGE IN STAIRWAY
(5" STORZ TYPE)
CONNECTION
FIRE DEPARTMENT
4"ON A/F-101
CONTINUE
SCALE:A
SECOND FLOOR PLAN
1/4"=1’-0"SCALE:B 1/4"=1’-0"
THIRD FLOOR PLAN
FIRE PROTECTION/ALARM
AND THIRD
FLOOR PLANS
JRB
GAH/MVR
F-102
SECOND
0’12’2’4’8’
1/4" = 1’-0"SCALE:
618-620 STEWART AVENUE618-620 STEWART AVENUE
BUILDING # 618-620
BEDROOM
CLO
BEDROOM
KITCHEN
BATHROOM
BEDROOM
BEDROOM BEDROOM
KITCHEN
BATHROOM
CLO
CLO
CLO
CLO
CLO CLO
BEDROOMLIVING ROOM
STORAGE
STORAGE
FOYER BATHROOM
BATHROOM
KITCHEN
KITCHEN
LIVING ROOM
BEDROOM
STORAGE
STORAGE
FOYER
MID-LANDING
FIRST FLOOR
LANDING
FLOOR
SECOND
UP
UP
MID-LANDING
SECOND FLOOR
LANDING
FLOOR
THIRD
UP
GENERAL FIRE ALARM DEMOLITION NOTES:
MONOXIDE DETECTORS TO EH&S.
SUBMITTING BID. TURN OVER ALL REMOVED CARBON
FIELD VERIFY EXACT QUANTITIES PRIOR TO
NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES AND 2 PULL STATIONS.
DETECTORS, 9 CARBON MONOXIDE DETECTORS, 3
2. BUILDING 618-620 HAS APPROXIMATELY 24 SMOKE/HEAT
CIRCUIT TO BE REUSED FOR NEW FACU.
EXISTING TELEPHONE WIRING AND 120V BRANCH
1. REMOVE EXISTING FIRE ALARM SYSTEM COMPLETE.
DGM
1 2 3 4 5
D
C
B
A
Drawing Number
Date:
Drawn By:
Designed By:
Reviewed By:
Project Number:
1 2 3 4
D
C
B
A
5Filename:Model Name:F-102F:\projects\12127\DRAWINGS\F_PL-2-3_BLDG618.dgnpdf.pltcfgPlot Driver:jrb03:32:53 PM on Monday, April 01, 2013Plotted:By:DATEBYNOREVISION DESCRIPTIONof
12127
8WITHO UT WRITTEN PERMISSIO N FROM BDA.THIS DOCUMENT MAY NOT BE REPRO DUCED2013COPYRIGHTCCCOPYRIGHT2013WITHO UT WRITTEN PERMISSIO N FROM BDA.THIS DOCUMENT MAY NOT BE REPRO DUCEDCORNELL UNIVERSITYPHASE 1OFF-CAMPUS HOUSINGFIRE ALARM FOR FIRE PROTECTION AND MARCH 28, 2013
WARNING
STATE EDUCATION LAW ARE STRICTLY PROHIBITED.
CONFORMING TO SECTION 7307, NEW YORK
ANY ALTERATIONS TO THIS DOCUMENT NOT
F SS
C
F SS
F SS F S
F SS
DOWN TO FIRST FLOOR
SPRINKLER RISER
UP TO THIRD FLOOR
SPRINKLER RISER
F SS
F SS
C
F SS
F SS
F S
F
F
F SS
F SS
C
F SS
F SS
C
F
DOWN TO THIRD FLOOR
SPRINKLER RISER
SWING JOINT DOWN
F S
F
F
DS
SCALE:A 1/4"=1’-0"SCALE:B 1/4"=1’-0"
FIRST FLOOR PLAN FIRE PROTECTION/ALARM
BASEMENT
AND FIRST
FLOOR PLANS
JRB
GAH/MVR
F-103
BUILDING #636
0’12’2’4’8’
1/4" = 1’-0"SCALE:
BASEMENT PLAN
636 STEWART AVENUE636 STEWART AVENUE
BEDROOM
CLO
BATHROOM
KITCHEN
LIVING ROOM
BEDROOM
KITCHEN
LIVING ROOM
CLO
CLO
BATHROOM
BATHROOM
CLO
LIVING ROOM
BEDROOM
CLO
KITCHEN
BOILER ROOM
PORCH
LIVING ROOM
KITCHEN
BEDROOM
BATHROOM
BEDROOM
BEDROOM
BATHROOM
LIVING ROOM
KITCHEN
CLO
CLO
CLO
CLO
FOYER
FOYER
FOYER
STORAGE
1
KEYED NOTES:
GENERAL FIRE ALARM DEMOLITION NOTES:
2
PHONE LINES TO NEW FACU.
EXTEND WIRING TO NEW FACU. CONNECT EXISTING COPPER
CONNECT NEW FACU TO EXISTING 120V BRANCH CIRCUIT.
DETECTORS TO EH&S.
BID. TURN OVER ALL REMOVED CARBON MONOXIDE
FIELD VERIFY EXACT QUANTITIES PRIOR TO SUBMITTING
5 NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES AND 3 PULL STATIONS.
DETECTORS, 10 CARBON MONOXIDE DETECTORS,
2. BUILDING 636 HAS APPROXIMATELY 25 SMOKE/HEAT
TO BE REUSED FOR NEW FACU.
EXISTING TELEPHONE WIRING AND 120V BRANCH CIRCUIT
1. REMOVE EXISTING FIRE ALARM SYSTEM COMPLETE.
DGM
AND HEIGHT WITH EH&S.
INDICATE A FIRE ALARM CONDITION. COORDINATE LOCATION
PROVIDE EXTERIOR (WEATHERPROOF) 110cd STROBE TO
1 2 3 4 5
D
C
B
A
Drawing Number
Date:
Drawn By:
Designed By:
Reviewed By:
Project Number:
1 2 3 4
D
C
B
A
5Filename:Model Name:F-103F:\projects\12127\DRAWINGS\F_PL-0-1_BLDG636.dgnpdf.pltcfgPlot Driver:jrb03:32:55 PM on Monday, April 01, 2013Plotted:By:DATEBYNOREVISION DESCRIPTIONof
12127
8WITHO UT WRITTEN PERMISSIO N FROM BDA.THIS DOCUMENT MAY NOT BE REPRO DUCED2013COPYRIGHTCCCOPYRIGHT2013WITHO UT WRITTEN PERMISSIO N FROM BDA.THIS DOCUMENT MAY NOT BE REPRO DUCEDCORNELL UNIVERSITYPHASE 1OFF-CAMPUS HOUSINGFIRE ALARM FOR FIRE PROTECTION AND MARCH 28, 2013
WARNING
STATE EDUCATION LAW ARE STRICTLY PROHIBITED.
CONFORMING TO SECTION 7307, NEW YORK
ANY ALTERATIONS TO THIS DOCUMENT NOT
F MS
F
F SS
F MS
C
F
F
F MS
C
F SS
F SS
C
F
UP TO FIRST FLOOR
3" SPRINKLER RISER
TRI
BRI
BPD
BPS
A03
3"
3"
A04
4"
WATER ENTRY
1" DOMESTIC
EX 1"
WATER ENTRY
4" FIRE PROTECTION
C
F S
F
F
F
F
PANELS/METERS
EX ELECTRICAL
ALARM BELL
ELECTRIC
FIRE PROTECTION ENTRY
4" COMBINED DOMESTIC/
TEST HEADER
BACKFLOW PREVENTER
(5" STORZ TYPE)
CONNECTION
FIRE DEPARTMENT
CONTINUE ON 4/F-501
FACU
F SF
F
C
F MS
F SS
F
F SS
F SS
F MS
C
DSDS
A02
UP TO SECOND FLOOR
3" SPRINKLER RISER
DOWN TO BASEMENT
3" SPRINKLER RISER
SWING JOINT UP
2
1
110cd
FWP
F
F
UP TO FIRST FLOOR MID-LANDING
PROVIDE COVERAGE FOR STAIR
SCALE:A
SECOND FLOOR PLAN
1/4"=1’-0"SCALE:B 1/4"=1’-0"
THIRD FLOOR PLAN
FIRE PROTECTION/ALARM
AND THIRD
FLOOR PLANS
JRB
GAH/MVR
F-104
SECOND
BUILDING # 636
0’12’2’4’8’
1/4" = 1’-0"SCALE:
636 STEWART AVENUE636 STEWART AVENUE
BEDROOM
CLO
BATHROOM
KITCHEN
BEDROOM
LIVING ROOM
CLO
CLO
CLO
BATHROOM
BEDROOM
LIVING ROOM
KITCHEN
KITCHEN
LIVING ROOM
BEDROOM
BATHROOM
CLO
BEDROOM
CLO
CLO
LIVING ROOM
KITCHEN
BATHROOM
CLO
BEDROOM
CLO
CLO
CLO
CLO
LIVING ROOM
BATHROOM
KITCHEN
BEDROOM
CLO
CLO
GENERAL FIRE ALARM DEMOLITION NOTES:
DETECTORS TO EH&S.
BID. TURN OVER ALL REMOVED CARBON MONOXIDE
FIELD VERIFY EXACT QUANTITIES PRIOR TO SUBMITTING
5 NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES AND 3 PULL STATIONS.
DETECTORS, 10 CARBON MONOXIDE DETECTORS,
2. BUILDING 636 HAS APPROXIMATELY 25 SMOKE/HEAT
TO BE REUSED FOR NEW FACU.
EXISTING TELEPHONE WIRING AND 120V BRANCH CIRCUIT
1. REMOVE EXISTING FIRE ALARM SYSTEM COMPLETE.
DGM
1 2 3 4 5
D
C
B
A
Drawing Number
Date:
Drawn By:
Designed By:
Reviewed By:
Project Number:
1 2 3 4
D
C
B
A
5Filename:Model Name:F-104F:\projects\12127\DRAWINGS\F_PL-2-3_BLDG636.dgnpdf.pltcfgPlot Driver:jrb03:32:56 PM on Monday, April 01, 2013Plotted:By:DATEBYNOREVISION DESCRIPTIONof
12127
8WITHO UT WRITTEN PERMISSIO N FROM BDA.THIS DOCUMENT MAY NOT BE REPRO DUCED2013COPYRIGHTCCCOPYRIGHT2013WITHO UT WRITTEN PERMISSIO N FROM BDA.THIS DOCUMENT MAY NOT BE REPRO DUCEDCORNELL UNIVERSITYPHASE 1OFF-CAMPUS HOUSINGFIRE ALARM FOR FIRE PROTECTION AND MARCH 28, 2013
WARNING
STATE EDUCATION LAW ARE STRICTLY PROHIBITED.
CONFORMING TO SECTION 7307, NEW YORK
ANY ALTERATIONS TO THIS DOCUMENT NOT
F SS
F SS
C
F SS
F SS
C
F MS
C
F SS
F SS
UP TO THIRD FLOOR
SPRINKLER RISER
TO FIRST FLOOR
SPRINKLER RISER DOWN
F S
F
F
F
F
F SS
F SS
F SS
F SS
F SS
C
F
C
S01 P01
S02
S03
S04P02P03
S05
B03
B02
S14
S13 B05
B01
S08 P04
S06
S07
A01
B04
B09
S15S12B06
B07
S11
P07
S09
P06
S10
1 1/4"
1 1/2"
1 1/4"
B08
3"
1 1/4"
DOWN TO SECOND FLOOR
3" SPRINKLER RISER
P05
1 1/2"
1 1/4"1 1/4"
1 1/4"
1 1/2"
1 1/4"
1 1/4"
1 1/4"
3"
1 1/4"
1 1/4"
3"
F S
F
F
SCALE:A 1/4"=1’-0"SCALE:B 1/4"=1’-0"
FIRST FLOOR PLAN
FIRE PROTECTION/ALARM
BASEMENT
AND FIRST
FLOOR PLANS
JRB
GAH/MVR
F-105
BUILDING #638
0’12’2’4’8’
1/4" = 1’-0"SCALE:
BASEMENT PLAN
638 STEWART AVENUE638 STEWART AVENUE
BEDROOM
CLO
BATHROOM
KITCHEN
LIVING ROOM
CLO
CLO
BEDROOM
BEDROOM
BOILER ROOM
UTILITY
LAUNDRY
FOYER
CLO
PORCH
FOYER
BEDROOM
LIVING ROOM
LIVING ROOM
KITCHENKITCHEN
BEDROOM
BATHROOMBATHROOM
CLO
1
KEYED NOTES:
GENERAL FIRE ALARM DEMOLITION NOTES:
2
PHONE LINES TO NEW FACU.
EXTEND WIRING TO NEW FACU. CONNECT EXISTING COPPER
CONNECT NEW FACU TO EXISTING 120V BRANCH CIRCUIT.
DETECTORS TO EH&S.
BID. TURN OVER ALL REMOVED CARBON MONOXIDE
FIELD VERIFY EXACT QUANTITIES PRIOR TO SUBMITTING
3 NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES AND 2 PULL STATIONS.
DETECTORS, 7 CARBON MONOXIDE DETECTORS,
2. BUILDING 638 HAS APPROXIMATELY 18 SMOKE/HEAT
CIRCUIT TO BE REUSED FOR NEW FACU.
EXISTING TELEPHONE WIRING AND 120V BRANCH
1. REMOVE EXISTING FIRE ALARM SYSTEM COMPLETE.
CLOSET
DGM
AND HEIGHT WITH EH&S.
INDICATE A FIRE ALARM CONDITION. COORDINATE LOCATION
PROVIDE EXTERIOR (WEATHERPROOF) 110cd STROBE TO
1 2 3 4 5
D
C
B
A
Drawing Number
Date:
Drawn By:
Designed By:
Reviewed By:
Project Number:
1 2 3 4
D
C
B
A
5Filename:Model Name:F-105F:\projects\12127\DRAWINGS\F_PL-0-1_BLDG638.dgnpdf.pltcfgPlot Driver:jrb03:32:57 PM on Monday, April 01, 2013Plotted:By:DATEBYNOREVISION DESCRIPTIONof
12127
8WITHO UT WRITTEN PERMISSIO N FROM BDA.THIS DOCUMENT MAY NOT BE REPRO DUCED2013COPYRIGHTCCCOPYRIGHT2013WITHO UT WRITTEN PERMISSIO N FROM BDA.THIS DOCUMENT MAY NOT BE REPRO DUCEDCORNELL UNIVERSITYPHASE 1OFF-CAMPUS HOUSINGFIRE ALARM FOR FIRE PROTECTION AND MARCH 28, 2013
WARNING
STATE EDUCATION LAW ARE STRICTLY PROHIBITED.
CONFORMING TO SECTION 7307, NEW YORK
ANY ALTERATIONS TO THIS DOCUMENT NOT
F SS
F
F
F S
F
F SS
F
FACU
UP TO FIRST FLOOR
SPRINKLER RISER
WATER ENTRY
1" DOMESTIC
EX 1"
T
F S
F
F SS
C
F S
F SS
C
C
F SS
F SS
2
GAS BOILER
F
F
C
WATER ENTRY
4" FIRE PROTECTION
ALARM BELL
ELECTRIC
FIRE PROTECTION ENTRY
4" COMBINED DOMESTIC/
DOMESTIC WATER SYSTEM.
ROOM SERVED BY
SPRINKLERS IN BOILER
REMOVE EXISTING FIRE
TEST HEADER
BACKFLOW PREVENTER
(5" STORZ TYPE)
CONNECTION
FIRE DEPARTMENT
CONTINUE ON 4/F-501
F SS
F SS
C
F
F
F MS
F SS
F
C
DS
DS
UP TO SECOND FLOOR
SPRINKLER RISER
DOWN TO BASEMENT
SPRINKLER RISER
1
110cd
FWP
F S
F
F
SWING JOINT UP
SWING JOINT UP
SCALE:A
SECOND FLOOR PLAN
1/4"=1’-0"SCALE:B 1/4"=1’-0"
THIRD FLOOR PLAN
FIRE PROTECTION/ALARM
AND THIRD
FLOOR PLANS
JRB
GAH/MVR
F-106
SECOND
BUILDING # 638
0’12’2’4’8’
1/4" = 1’-0"SCALE:
638 STEWART AVENUE638 STEWART AVENUE
BEDROOM
CLO
BATHROOM
KITCHEN
LIVING ROOM
BATHROOM
KITCHEN
LIVING ROOM
BEDROOM
CLO CLOCLOCLO
CLO
BATHROOM
KITCHEN
LIVING ROOM
DORMERDORMER
BEDROOM
DETECTORS TO EH&S.
BID. TURN OVER ALL REMOVED CARBON MONOXIDE
FIELD VERIFY EXACT QUANTITIES PRIOR TO SUBMITTING
3 NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES AND 2 PULL STATIONS.
DETECTORS, 7 CARBON MONOXIDE DETECTORS,
2. BUILDING 638 HAS APPROXIMATELY 18 SMOKE/HEAT
CIRCUIT TO BE REUSED FOR NEW FACU.
EXISTING TELEPHONE WIRING AND 120V BRANCH
1. REMOVE EXISTING FIRE ALARM SYSTEM COMPLETE.
GENERAL FIRE ALARM DEMOLITION NOTES:
STORAGESTORAGE
DGM
1 2 3 4 5
D
C
B
A
Drawing Number
Date:
Drawn By:
Designed By:
Reviewed By:
Project Number:
1 2 3 4
D
C
B
A
5Filename:Model Name:F-106F:\projects\12127\DRAWINGS\F_PL-2-3_BLDG638.dgnpdf.pltcfgPlot Driver:jrb03:32:59 PM on Monday, April 01, 2013Plotted:By:DATEBYNOREVISION DESCRIPTIONof
12127
8WITHO UT WRITTEN PERMISSIO N FROM BDA.THIS DOCUMENT MAY NOT BE REPRO DUCED2013COPYRIGHTCCCOPYRIGHT2013WITHO UT WRITTEN PERMISSIO N FROM BDA.THIS DOCUMENT MAY NOT BE REPRO DUCEDCORNELL UNIVERSITYPHASE 1OFF-CAMPUS HOUSINGFIRE ALARM FOR FIRE PROTECTION AND MARCH 28, 2013
WARNING
STATE EDUCATION LAW ARE STRICTLY PROHIBITED.
CONFORMING TO SECTION 7307, NEW YORK
ANY ALTERATIONS TO THIS DOCUMENT NOT
F SS
F SS
C
F
F
F
F MS
F SS
C
DOWN TO FIRST FLOOR
SPRINKLER RISER
UP TO THIRD FLOOR
SPRINKLER RISER
F S
F S
F S
F
F
ON B/F-106
CONTINUE
F SS
F SS
C
DOWN TO SECOND FLOOR
SPRINKLER RISER
F S
F
F
ON A/F-106
CONTINUE
FIRE PROTECTION/ALARM
JRB
GAH/MVR
F-501
DETAILS
WATER ENTRIES
AND
SCALE:NONE1
FIRE PROTECTION RISER DETAIL
SCALE:NONE2
FIRE PROTECTION RISER DETAIL
SCALE:NONE3
FIRE PROTECTION RISER DETAIL
BUILDING 636 STEWART AVENUE
BUILDING 618-620 STEWART AVENUEBUILDING 638 STEWART AVENUE
15. OBTAIN AND PAY FOR ALL PERMITS, TESTING AND INSPECTIONS REQUIRED FOR THE WORK.
14. PROVIDE ALL CUTTING AND PATCHING REQUIRED TO PERFORM FIRE PROTECTION WORK.
MAINTENANCE.
13. LOCATE OPERATING AND CONTROL EQUIPMENT TO PROVIDE EASY ACCESS FOR OPERATION AND
MAXIMUM OVERHEAD CLEARANCES.
12. ARRANGE WORK IN A NEAT, WELL ORGANIZED MANNER RUNNING PARALLEL TO WALLS AND WITH
ESTABLISHED IN COORDINATION WITH ALL OTHER EXISTING WORK.
11. THE DRAWINGS ARE DIAGRAMMATIC IN SHOWING PHYSICAL LAYOUT. EXACT LOCATIONS MUST BE
TO THE INSTALLATION OF BACKFLOW PREVENTER.
PRIOR TO THE PERFORMANCE OF THE WORK. RECEIVE WRITTEN APPROVAL FROM THE OWNER PRIOR
10. SUBMIT PRODUCT LITERATURE CUT SHEETS TO THE OWNER FOR ALL MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
PROTECTION CODES.
IN ACCORDANCE WITH APPLICABLE STATE HEALTH DEPARTMENT AND LOCAL PLUMBING/FIRE
THE WATER SUPPLY SYSTEM (INCLUDING THE BACKFLOW PREVENTION DEVICE). PERFORM ALL WORK
9. FURNISH ALL LABOR, MATERIALS, AND EQUIPMENT NECESSARY FOR A COMPLETE INSTALLATION OF
8. THOROUGHLY FLUSH WATER LINE PRIOR TO INSTALLATION OF BACKFLOW ASSEMBLY.
SEATED SHUT-OFF VALVES INTEGRAL TO THE ASSEMBLY.
7. INSTALL BACKFLOW PREVENTION DEVICE ASSEMBLY WITH MANUFACTURER-SUPPLIED RESILIENT
VALVE.
AND PLACE IN A MANNER THAT WILL NOT OBSTRUCT THE FUNCTION OF, OR ACCESS TO THE RELIEF
USE PIPE HANGERS, BRACES, SADDLES, STANCHIONS, PIERS, ETC., TO SUPPORT THE DEVICE
6. ADEQUATELY SUPPORT AND/OR RESTRAIN ALL ASSEMBLIES TO PREVENT LATERAL MOVEMENT.
PRIOR TO INSTALLATION.
COCKS OR RELIEF VALVES FACING THE BACK WALL. REFER TO MANUFACTURER’S RECOMMENDATIONS
5. CLEARANCE TO BACK SIDE OF THE DEVICE MAY NEED TO BE INCREASED FOR SIDE MOUNTED TEST
AND THE NEAREST WALL OR OBSTRUCTION.
4. PROVIDE 30 INCHES MINIMUM OF CLEAR SPACE BETWEEN THE FRONT SIDE OF THE DEVICE
AND FOR OPERATION OF SHUTOFF VALVES.
3. PROVIDE 12 INCHES MINIMUM OF CLEAR SPACE ABOVE ASSEMBLY TO ALLOW FOR SERVICING
TO PREVENT SUBMERSION AND PROVIDE ACCESS FOR SERVICING.
2. PROVIDE 18 INCH MINIMUM CLEARANCE BETWEEN BOTTOM OF RELIEF VALVE AND THE FLOOR
MANUAL.
WITH NEW YORK STATE DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH CROSS-CONNECTION CONTROL
ASSEMBLY FOR FIRE PROTECTION SERVICE. INSTALL DEVICE IN ACCORDANCE
1. PROVIDE LISTED/APPROVED DOUBLE CHECK VALVE BACKFLOW PREVENTION
BACKFLOW PREVENTION DEVICE GENERAL NOTES
DGM
SCALE:NONE4
TYPICAL WATER MAIN CONNECTION
1 2 3 4 5
D
C
B
A
Drawing Number
Date:
Drawn By:
Designed By:
Reviewed By:
Project Number:
1 2 3 4
D
C
B
A
5Filename:Model Name:F-501F:\projects\12127\DRAWINGS\F_DTL.dgnpdf.pltcfgPlot Driver:jrb03:33:02 PM on Monday, April 01, 2013Plotted:By:DATEBYNOREVISION DESCRIPTIONof
12127
8WITHO UT WRITTEN PERMISSIO N FROM BDA.THIS DOCUMENT MAY NOT BE REPRO DUCED2013COPYRIGHTCCCOPYRIGHT2013WITHO UT WRITTEN PERMISSIO N FROM BDA.THIS DOCUMENT MAY NOT BE REPRO DUCEDCORNELL UNIVERSITYPHASE 1OFF-CAMPUS HOUSINGFIRE ALARM FOR FIRE PROTECTION AND MARCH 28, 2013
WARNING
STATE EDUCATION LAW ARE STRICTLY PROHIBITED.
CONFORMING TO SECTION 7307, NEW YORK
ANY ALTERATIONS TO THIS DOCUMENT NOT
SERVICE
4" FIRE PROTECTION
PREVENTION DEVICE
ASSEMBLY BACKFLOW
4" DOUBLE CHECK VALVE
VS
VS VS
RISER CHECK VALVE
(TYPICAL)
PIPE STANCHION
EXTERIOR GRADE
SUPERVISORY DEVICE
WITH ELECTRONIC
CONTROL VALVE
FEED MAIN
WET PIPE SYSTEM
FS
FLOW SWITCH
TEST HEADER
BACKFLOW DEVICE
SERVICE
4" FIRE PROTECTION
PREVENTION DEVICE
ASSEMBLY BACKFLOW
4" DOUBLE CHECK VALVE
VS VS
VSVS
RISER CHECK VALVE
SUPERVISORY DEVICE
WITH ELECTRONIC
CONTROL VALVE
(TYPICAL)
PIPE STANCHION
FS
TEST HEADER
BACKFLOW DEVICE
CONNECTION
TO FIRE DEPARTMENT
FLOW SWITCH
FEED MAIN
WET PIPE SYSTEM
CHECK VALVE
VS
VS VS VS
SERVICE
4" FIRE PROTECTION
PREVENTION DEVICE
ASSEMBLY BACKFLOW
4" DOUBLE CHECK VALVE
RISER CHECK VALVE
CONNECTION PIPING
FIRE DEPARTMENT
(TYPICAL)
PIPE STANCHION
EXTERIOR GRADE
SUPERVISORY DEVICE
WITH ELECTRONIC
CONTROL VALVE
TEST HEADER
BACKFLOW DEVICE
FS
FLOW SWITCH
CHECK VALVE
FEED MAIN
WET PIPE SYSTEM
DOMESTIC WATER SUPPLY
CAP AND ABANDON FIRE PROTECTION ENTRY
4" COMBINED DOMESTIC/
SIDEWALK
4" CURB VALVE
CURB
STEWART AVE
SPECIFICATIONS FOR
FIRE PROTECTION AND FIRE ALARM
FOR OFF-CAMPUS HOUSING – PHASE I
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
ITHACA, NEW YORK 14853
March 28, 2013
PREPARED BY:
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES, ARCHITECTURE,
ENGINEERING & LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE, P.C.
64 SOUTH STREET
AUBURN, NEW YORK 13021
March 28, 2013
G E N E R A L R E Q U I R E M E N T S
FOR
FIRE PROTECTION AND FIRE ALARM
FOR OFF-CAMPUS HOUSING – PHASE 1
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
ITHACA, NEW YORK 14853
March 28, 2013
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
FOR FIRE PROTECTION AND FIRE ALARM FOR OFF-CAMPUS HOUSING – PHASE 1
TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIVISION PAGE
01 11 00 SUMMARY OF THE WORK
Subsection 1.1 Work Under Contract 01 11 00-1
01 25 00 SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS
Subsection 1.1 General 01 25 00-1
1.2 Products List 01 25 00-1
1.3 Contractor's Options 01 25 00-1
1.4 Substitutions 01 25 00-1
1.5 Contractor's Representation 01 25 00-3
1.6 Architect's Duties 01 25 00-3
01 31 19 PROJECT MEETINGS
Subsection 1.1 Description 01 31 19-1
1.2 Pre-Construction Meeting 01 31 19-1
1.3 Progress Meetings 01 31 19-2
01 32 16 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES
Subsection 1.1 General 01 32 16-1
1.2 Form of Schedules 01 32 16-1
1.3 Content of Schedules 01 32 16-2
1.4 Progress Revisions 01 32 16-3
1.5 Submissions 01 32 16-3
1.6 Distribution 01 32 16-3
1.7 Not Used 01 32 16-4
01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
Subsection 1.1 General 01 33 00-1
1.2 Shop Drawings 01 33 00-1
1.3 Product Data 01 33 00-2
1.4 Samples 01 33 00-2
1.5 Quality Assurance and Quality Control Submittals 01 33 00-3
1.6 Coordination Drawings 01 33 00-4
1.7 Contractor Responsibilities 01 33 00-4
1.8 Submittal Procedures 01 33 00-5
1.9 Resubmission Requirements 01 33 00-7
1.10 Architect's Duties 01 33 00-7
1.11 Distribution 01 33 00-8
01 35 29 GENERAL HEALTH & SAFETY REQUIREMENTS
Subsection 1.1 General 01 35 29-1
1.2 Contractors Safety Plan 01 35 29-1
1.3 Asbestos & Lead 01 35 29-1
1.4 Site Visits 01 35 29-2
Job Specific Safety Manual Checklist
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
FOR FIRE PROTECTION AND FIRE ALARM FOR OFF-CAMPUS HOUSING – PHASE 1
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE 2
March 28, 2013
01 35 43 GENERAL ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
Subsection 1.1 General 01 35 43-1
1.2 Related Sections 01 35 43-1
1.3 Submittals 01 35 43-2
1.4 Job Site Administration 01 35 43-2
1.5 Clearing, Site Preparation and Site Use 01 35 43-2
1.6 Spoil and Borrow 01 35 43-2
1.7 Noise and Vibration 01 35 43-3
1.8 Dust Control 01 35 43-3
1.9 Protection of the Environment 01 35 43-3
1.10 Temporary Re-Routing of Piping and Ductwork 01 35 43-4
1.11 Hazardous or Toxic Materials 01 35 43-5
1.12 Disposal of Waste Material and Title 01 35 43-5
Contractor Waste Material Disposal Plan
Definitions for Use with Contractor Waste Material Disposal Plan
01 35 44 SPILL CONTROL
Subsection 1.1 Spill Prevention 01 35 44-1
1.2 Spill Control Procedures 01 35 44-1
1.3 Spill Reporting and Documentation 01 35 44-3
01 41 00 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
Subsection 1.1 Permits and Licenses 01 41 00-1
1.2 Inspections 01 41 00-1
1.3 Compliance 01 41 00-1
1.4 Owner’s Requirements 01 41 00-1
01 45 00 QUALITY CONTROL
Subsection 1.1 Description 01 45 00-1
1.2 Control of On-Site Construction 01 45 00-1
1.3 Control of Off-Site Operations 01 45 00-2
1.4 Testing 01 45 00-2
1.5 Owner's Representative 01 45 00-2
01 45 29 TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES
Subsection 1.1 General 01 45 29-1
1.2 Qualifications of Laboratory 01 45 29-1
1.3 Laboratory Duties 01 45 29-2
1.4 Limitations of Authority of Testing Laboratory 01 45 29-3
1.5 Contractor's Responsibilities 01 45 29-3
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
FOR FIRE PROTECTION AND FIRE ALARM FOR OFF-CAMPUS HOUSING – PHASE 1
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE 3
March 28, 2013
01 50 00 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
Subsection 1.1 Description 01 50 00-1
1.2 Requirements of Regulatory Agencies 01 50 00-1
2.1 Materials, General 01 50 00-1
2.2 Temporary First Aid Facilities 01 50 00-1
2.3 Temporary Fire Protection 01 50 00-1
2.4 Construction Aids 01 50 00-2
2.5 Temporary Enclosures 01 50 00-2
2.6 Temporary Water Control 01 50 00-3
2.7 Tree and Plant Protection 01 50 00-4
2.8 Guardrails and Barricades 01 50 00-4
2.9 Access Roads and Parking Areas 01 50 00-4
2.10 Project Identification and Signs 01 50 00-4
2.11 Security 01 50 00-4
2.12 Not Used 01 50 00-5
3.1 Preparation 01 50 00-5
3.2 General 01 50 00-5
3.3 Removal 01 50 00-6
01 51 00 TEMPORARY UTILITIES
Subsection 1.1 Description 01 51 00-1
1.2 Requirements of Regulatory Agencies 01 51 00-1
2.1 Materials, General 01 51 00-1
2.2 Temporary Electricity, Lighting and Water 01 51 00-1
2.3 Not Used 01 51 00-3
2.4 Temporary Heat and Ventilation 01 51 00-4
2.5 Not Used 01 51 00-5
2.6 Temporary Sanitary Facilities 01 51 00-5
3.1 Removal 01 51 00-5
01 57 13 SOIL EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL
Subsection 1.1 General 01 57 13-1
1.2 Submittals 01 57 13-1
1.3 Plan and Implementation General Requirements 01 57 13-1
1.4 Performance Standards 01 57 13-1
1.5 Erosion and Sediment Control Plan Components 01 57 13-2
1.6 Inspections 01 57 13-3
01 66 00 STORAGE AND PROTECTION
Subsection 1.1 General 01 66 00-1
1.2 Transportation and Handling 01 66 00-1
1.3 Storage 01 66 00-1
1.4 Protection 01 66 00-2
1.5 Protection After Installation 01 66 00-2
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
FOR FIRE PROTECTION AND FIRE ALARM FOR OFF-CAMPUS HOUSING – PHASE 1
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE 4
March 28, 2013
01 71 23 FIELD ENGINEERING
Subsection 1.1 General 01 71 23-1
1.2 Qualification of Surveyor 01 71 23-1
1.3 Survey Reference Points 01 71 23-1
1.4 Project Survey Requirements 01 71 23-2
1.5 Records 01 71 23-2
1.6 Submittals 01 71 23-2
01 73 29 CUTTING, PATCHING AND REPAIRING
Subsection 1.1 Description 01 73 29-1
1.2 Submittals 01 73 29-2
1.3 Quality Assurances 01 73 29-3
1.4 Warranties 01 73 29-4
2.1 Materials 01 73 29-4
3.1 Inspection 01 73 29-4
3.2 Preparation 01 73 29-5
3.3 Performance 01 73 29-5
3.4 Cleaning 01 73 29-7
01 77 00 PROJECT CLOSE OUT
Subsection 1.1 Project Close Out Inspections 01 77 00-1
1.2 Final Clean-Up 01 77 00-1
1.3 Maintenance Stock 01 77 00-3
01 78 23 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA
Subsection 1.1 General 01 78 23-1
1.2 Form of Submittals 01 78 23-1
1.3 Content of Manual 01 78 23-2
1.4 Manual for Materials and Finishes 01 78 23-3
1.5 Manual for Equipment and Systems 01 78 23-4
1.6 Submittal Schedule 01 78 23-6
1.7 Instructions of Owner's Personnel 01 78 23-6
1.8 Operating Instructions 01 78 23-7
01 78 36 WARRANTIES AND BONDS
Subsection 1.1 General 01 78 36-1
1.2 Submittal Requirements 01 78 36-1
1.3 Form of Submittals 01 78 36-1
1.4 Time of Submittals 01 78 36-2
1.5 Submittals Required 01 78 36-2
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
FOR FIRE PROTECTION AND FIRE ALARM FOR OFF-CAMPUS HOUSING – PHASE 1
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE 5
March 28, 2013
01 78 39 RECORD DOCUMENTS
Subsection 1.1 General 01 78 39-1
1.2 Maintenance of Documents and Samples 01 78 39-1
1.3 Recording 01 78 39-1
1.4 Submittal 01 78 39-3
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 11 00
Ithaca, New York SUMMARY OF THE WORK
FIRE PROTECTION AND FIRE ALARM SUMMARY OF THE WORK 01 11 00-1
FOR OFF-CAMPUS HOUSING – PHASE 1 March 28, 2013
1.1 WORK UNDER THIS CONTRACT
GENERAL
A. Work to be Done
1. The Work shall include providing a complete fire protection system and fire alarm
system. The Work shall include removal of the existing fire alarm system.
B. The Scope of the Work
1. The scope of the WORK in all SECTIONS of this Specification shall consist of the
furnishing of all labor, materials, equipment and appliances and the performance of
the Work required by the Contract Documents and/or by the conditions at the site,
joining all parts of this Work with itself and the Work of others to form a complete,
functioning entity.
2. Items not specifically mentioned in the Specifications or shown on the drawings, but
which are inherently necessary to make a complete working installation, shall be
included.
C. Intent of Contract Documents
1. The use of the word (or words):
a. "provide" means furnish, install and connect ready for use;
b. "furnish" means supply and deliver to job or where directed;
c. "as approved" or "approved" means Architect’s or Owner’s approval;
d. "as directed" means Owner's direction or instruction;
e. "to do", "provide", "furnish", "install", etc., in these Specifications or on
Drawings are directions given to the Contractor;
f. "concealed" means Work installed in pipe shafts, chases or recesses, behind
furred walls, above ceilings, either permanent or removable;
g. "exposed" means all Work not identified as concealed.
2. Notes or instructions shown on any one Drawing, apply where applicable, to all other
Drawings.
3. Reference to a technical society, institution, association or governmental authority is
in accordance with following abbreviations:
a. ACI American Concrete Institution
b. AGA American Gas Association
c. AGCA Associated General Contractors of America, Inc.
d. AIA American Institute of Architects
e. AISC American Institute of Steel Construction
f. AMCA Air Moving and Conditioning Associates, Inc.
g. ANSI American National Standards Institute
h. ARI Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute
i. ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and
Air Conditioning Engineers, Inc.
j. ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers
FIRE PROTECTION AND FIRE ALARM SUMMARY OF THE WORK 01 11 00-2
FOR OFF-CAMPUS HOUSING – PHASE 1 March 28, 2013
k. ASTM American Society for Testing Materials
l. AWSC American Welding Society Code
m. AWWA American Water Works Association
n. IBR Institute of Boiler & Radiation Manufacturers
o. IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
p. NYBFU New York Board of Fire Underwriters
q. NEC National Electric Code
r. NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers' Association
s. NFPA National Fire Protection Association
t. SBI Steel Boiler Institute
u. SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National
Association
v. UFPO Underground Facilities Protective Organization
w. UL Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc.
4. All references to codes, specifications and standards referred to in the Specification
Sections and on the Drawings shall mean, and are intended to be, the latest edition,
amendment and/or revision of such reference standard in effect as of the date of these
Contract Documents.
5. Install All Work in Compliance with:
a. Building Code of New York State
b. National Electric Code
c. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA).
d. Life Safety Code NFPA 101.
e. All local ordinances
f. Plans and Specifications in excess of code requirements and not contrary to
same.
D. Use of the Site
1. The Contractor shall carry on the Work in the manner which will cause the least
interruption to pedestrian and vehicular traffic and permit access of emergency
vehicles at all times.
2. The Work shall be scheduled and performed in such a manner that at least one lane
of traffic will be maintained on all public streets. Two flag persons, equipped with
radio communication devices, must be provided for any activity blocking a traffic
lane. One lane of traffic must be maintained at all times. Where traffic must cross
open trenches, the Contractor shall provide suitable bridges and railings; including
pedestrian bridges.
3. The Contractor shall post flag persons and suitable signs indicating that construction
operations are under way and other warning signs as may be required.
4. The Contractor shall safeguard the use by the public and Owner of all adjacent
highways, roadways and footpaths, and shall conform to all laws and regulations
concerning the use thereof, especially limitations on traffic and the movement of
heavy equipment. Access to the site for delivery of construction materials and/or
equipment shall be made only at the locations shown in the Contract Documents or
approved by the Owner’s Representative.
FIRE PROTECTION AND FIRE ALARM SUMMARY OF THE WORK 01 11 00-3
FOR OFF-CAMPUS HOUSING – PHASE 1 March 28, 2013
5. The Contractor shall immediately remove dirt and debris which may collect on
permanent roadways due to the Work.
6. The Contractor shall limit the extent of its activities to that area of the site defined on
the Contract Drawings as being within the Contract Limit Lines.
7. For that portion of the Work required under this Contract which must be performed
in other than the defined areas, including operations involving delivery and removal
of materials, the Contractor shall schedule and coordinate its activities through the
Owner's Representative, to meet the approval of the Owner and minimize disruption
of the normal scheduled activities of the occupants of adjacent spaces.
8. All portions of the site, including the staging area and those areas affected by the
work, shall be returned to their original condition after completion of Work. Such
repair work shall include reseeding, if required, and shall be included in the
Contractor's Guaranty of Work.
9. Routes to and from the location of the Work shall be as indicated in the Contract or
as directed by the Owner's Representative. Temporary roadways shall be closed only
with prior approval of the Owner's Representative.
E. Parking
1. The Owner will designate an area for Contractor parking. The Contractor shall make
all arrangements, and bear the cost, for transportation from the designated parking
area to the construction site as necessary.
2. It should be noted that there is a fee for all parking on the Cornell University campus.
The Contractor is responsible for the payment for all parking costs imposed by the
Owner. The Contractor should contact the Project Manager for additional
information.
3. Contractor shall cooperate with Cornell Police and/or other police authorities having
jurisdiction, as follows:
a. Ensure parking by all employees of the Contractor, subcontractors, material
suppliers, and others connected with this project only within construction fence
or the designated parking area.
b. Prohibit employees from parking in any other areas, roads, streets, grounds, etc.
c. Discharge any employee refusing to comply with these requirements.
d. Ensure proper transportation of personnel between the designated parking area
and the construction site.
4. The Contractor shall remove from the parking area all temporary trailers, rubbish,
unused materials, and other materials belonging to the Contractor or used under the
Contractor’s direction during construction or impairing the use or appearance of the
property and shall restore such areas affected by the work to their original condition,
FIRE PROTECTION AND FIRE ALARM SUMMARY OF THE WORK 01 11 00-4
FOR OFF-CAMPUS HOUSING – PHASE 1 March 28, 2013
and, in the event of its failure to do so, the same shall be removed by the Owner at
the expense of the Contractor, and the Contractor shall be liable therefore.
F. Changeovers and Continuity of Services
1. Make all changeovers, tie-ins and removals, etc., of any part of the Work that would
affect the continuity of operation of the adjacent areas services at approved times that
will not interfere with the Owner's operations. Secure approval of Owner before
proceeding.
2. Make all necessary temporary connections required to permit operation of the
building services and/or equipment. Remove the connections after need has ceased.
3. The Contractor may be permitted to make changeovers during normal working hours
at the Owner’s discretion. Should the Contractor perform this Work outside of
normal working hours, no extra payment will be made for resulting overtime
expenses.
4. When connecting new facilities do not shut off any existing Mechanical/Electrical
facilities or services without prior written approval of Owner's Representative.
5. The Contractor shall not, except in an emergency condition, shutdown any utility
without the express permission of the Owner's Representative. Major shutdowns of
utilities will be performed by Cornell University to enable Contractor to perform
required work. Major shutdowns shall be defined as those affecting life safety or
which are outside the project site limits.
6. Maintain domestic water and firewater in service at all times. No service may be out
for more than twenty-four (24) hours. Maintain firewater flow capability (hose, if
necessary) to all buildings and coordinate with Cornell Utilities, Cornell
Environmental Health and Safety (EH&S), and City of Ithaca Fire Department. All
shutdowns to be scheduled a minimum of seven (7) calendar days in advance and
requests shall be submitted in writing to the Owner’s Representative.
7. IN THE EVENT OF AN EMERGENCY WHERE THE OWNER'S
REPRESENTATIVE IS NOT AVAILABLE, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL DIAL
911 IMMEDIATELY.
G. Obstacles, Interference and Coordination
1. General
a. Plans show general design arrangement. Install work substantially as indicated
and verify exact location and elevations; DO NOT SCALE PLANS.
b. Due to small scale of Drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fitting,
changes in elevations, interferences, etc. Make necessary changes in the Work,
equipment locations, etc., after notification to the Owner's Representative and
Architect. Obtain approval from same, as part of Contract, to accommodate
work to obstacles and interferences encountered.
FIRE PROTECTION AND FIRE ALARM SUMMARY OF THE WORK 01 11 00-5
FOR OFF-CAMPUS HOUSING – PHASE 1 March 28, 2013
c. Obtain written approval for all major changes before installing. If requested,
submit at least five (5) copies of drawings, detailing all such deviations or
changes.
d. Exposed to view mechanical units, ductwork, conduit, pipes or other building
equipment are essential parts of the artistic effect of the building design and
shall be installed in locations as shown on the drawings. Conformance to given
dimensions and alignments with the structural system, walls, openings,
indicated centerlines are a requirement of the Contract and the Contractor shall
familiarize himself with the critical nature of proper placement of these items.
The Contractor shall notify the Architect of conflicts which would cause such
equipment to be installed in locations other than as indicated on the Drawings.
The Contractor shall not proceed with the installation of exposed to view
mechanical units, ductwork, conduit, pipes, etc. until all conflicts have been
identified by the Contractor and resolutions to conflicts approved by the
Architect.
2. Interference
a. Install work so that all items are operable and serviceable and avoid interfering
with removal of rails, filters, belt guards and/or operation of doors, etc.
Provide easy and safe access to valves, controllers, motor starters and other
equipment requiring frequent attention.
H. Equipment Arrangements
1. Since all equipment of equal capacity is not necessarily of same arrangement, size of
construction, these Plans are prepared on basis of one manufacturer as "design
equipment", even though other manufacturers' names are mentioned.
2. If Contractor elects to use specified equipment other than "design equipment" which
differs in arrangement, size, etc., the Contractor does so subject to following
conditions:
a. Submit detailed drawings indicating proposed installations of equipment and
showing maintenance and service space required.
b. If revised arrangement meets approval, make all required changes in the work
of all trades, including but not limited to louvers, panels, structural supports,
pads, etc. at no increase in Contract. Provide larger motors and any additional
control devices, valves, fittings and other miscellaneous equipment required for
proper operation of revised layout, and assume responsibility for proper
location of roughing in and connections by other trades.
c. If revised arrangement does not meet approval because of increase in pressure
loss, possibility of increase in noise, lack of space or headroom, insufficient
clearance for removal of parts, or for any other reason, provide equipment
which conforms to Contract Drawings and Specifications.
I. Supports
FIRE PROTECTION AND FIRE ALARM SUMMARY OF THE WORK 01 11 00-6
FOR OFF-CAMPUS HOUSING – PHASE 1 March 28, 2013
1. The Contractor shall include cost of all materials and labor necessary to provide all
required supports, beams, angles, hangers, rods, bases, braces, etc. to properly
support the Contract Work. All supports, etc. shall meet the approval of the
Architect.
J. Existing Equipment, Materials, Fixtures, Etc.
1. Where existing equipment, piping, fittings, etc. are to be removed, Contractor shall
submit complete list to Owner. Carefully remove and salvage all items that Owner
wishes to retain shall be delivered to building storage where directed by Owner.
Items that Owner does not wish to retain shall be removed from site and legally
disposed of.
K. Examination of Premises, Drawings, Etc.
1. Before Submitting Proposal
a. Examine all Drawings and Specifications relating to Work of all trades to
determine scope and relation to other work.
b. Examine all existing conditions affecting compliance with Plans and
Specifications, by visiting site and/or building.
c. Ascertain access to site, available storage and delivery facilities.
2. Before Commencing Work on Any Phase or in any Area
a. Verify all governing dimensions at site and/or building.
b. Inspect all adjacent work.
3. Tender of Proposal Confirms Agreement
a. All items and conditions referred to herein and/or indicated on accompanying
Drawings.
b. No consideration, additional monies or time extensions will be granted for
alleged misunderstanding.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS – NOT USED
PART 3 – EXECUTION – NOT USED
***END OF SECTION 01 11 00***
CORNELL SECTION 01 25 00
Ithaca, New York SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS
FIRE PROTECTION AND FIRE ALARM SUBSTITUTIONS AND 01 25 00-1
FOR OFF-CAMPUS HOUSING – PHASE 1 PRODUCT OPTIONS March 28, 2013
1.1 GENERAL
A. The Contractor shall furnish and install the products specified, under the options and
conditions for substitutions stated in this Section.
1.2 PRODUCTS LIST
A. Within thirty (30) days after the award of Contract, submit to the Architect five copies of a
complete list of products which are proposed for installation.
B. Tabulate the products by listing under each specification section title and number.
C. For products specified only by reference standards, list for each such product:
1. Name and address of the manufacturer.
2. Trade name.
3. Model or catalog designation.
4. Manufacturer's data:
a. Reference standards.
b. Performance test data.
1.3 CONTRACTOR'S OPTIONS
A. For products specified only by reference standard, select any product meeting that standard,
by any manufacturer.
B. For products specified by naming several products or manufacturers, select any one of
products and manufacturers named.
C. For products specified by naming one or more products or manufacturers and stating "or
equal", the Contractor shall submit a request as for substitutions, for any product or
manufacturer not specifically named. Such substitution shall have been listed on Bid Form
as required in Instructions to Bidders. If not so listed, no substitution will be allowed.
D. For products specified by naming only one product and manufacturer, no option and no
substitution will be considered unless listed on the Bid Form as provided in the Instructions
to Bidders.
1.4 SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Submit a separate request for each substitution in triplicate. Support each request with:
1. Completed "Data for Evaluation of Materials, Products, and Systems" in an approved
format.
2. Complete data substantiating compliance of the proposed substitution with
requirements stated in Contract Documents:
FIRE PROTECTION AND FIRE ALARM SUBSTITUTIONS AND 01 25 00-2
FOR OFF-CAMPUS HOUSING – PHASE 1 PRODUCT OPTIONS March 28, 2013
a. Product identification, including manufacturer's name and address.
b. Manufacturer's literature; identify:
1) Product description.
2) Reference standards.
3) Performance and test data.
c. Samples, as applicable.
d. Name and address of similar projects on which product has been used, and the
date of each installation.
3. An itemized comparison of the proposed substitution with the product specified
listing any variations.
4. Data relating to any changes in the construction schedule.
5. The effect of the substitution on each separate contract of the Project.
6. List any changes required in other work or projects.
7. Designate any required license fees or royalties.
8. Designate availability of maintenance services, and source of replacement materials.
B. Substitutions shall not result in additions to the Contract Sum.
C. Substitutions will not be considered as having been accepted when:
1. They are indicated or implied on shop drawings or product data submittals without a
formal request from the Contractor.
2. They are requested by a subcontractor or supplier.
3. The acceptance will require substantial revision of Contract Documents.
D. Substitute products shall not be ordered or installed without written acceptance of the
Owner.
E. The Owner and the Architect shall be the sole judges of the acceptability of a proposed
substitution.
FIRE PROTECTION AND FIRE ALARM SUBSTITUTIONS AND 01 25 00-3
FOR OFF-CAMPUS HOUSING – PHASE 1 PRODUCT OPTIONS March 28, 2013
1.5 CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATION
A. In making a formal request for a substitution the Contractor represents that:
1. The Contractor has personally investigated the proposed product and has determined
that it is equal to or superior in all respects to that specified.
2. The Contractor will provide the same warranties or bonds for the substitution as for
the product specified.
3. The Contractor will coordinate the installation of an accepted substitution into the
Work, and will make such changes as may be required for the Work to be complete
in all respects.
4. The Contractor waives all claims for additional costs related to the substitution which
may subsequently become apparent.
1.6 ARCHITECT'S DUTIES
A. Review Contractor's requests for substitutions with reasonable promptness.
B. Transmit evaluations and recommendations to the Owner, so that the Owner can notify the
Contractor of the decision for acceptance or rejection of the request for substitution.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS – NOT USED
PART 3 – EXECUTION – NOT USED
***END OF SECTION 01 25 00***
CORNELL SECTION 01 31 19
Ithaca, New York PROJECT MEETINGS
FIRE PROTECTION AND FIRE ALARM PROJECT MEETINGS 01 31 19-1
FOR OFF-CAMPUS HOUSING – PHASE 1 March 28, 2013
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. The Owner will schedule and administer pre-construction meeting, periodic progress
meetings, and specially called meetings throughout the progress of the work.
1. Prepare agenda for meetings.
2. Distribute written notice of each meeting four days in advance of meeting date.
3. Make physical arrangements for meetings.
4. Preside at meetings.
5. Record the minutes; include all significant proceedings and decisions.
6. Duplicate and distribute copies of minutes after each meeting.
a. To all participants in the meeting.
b. To all parties affected by decisions made at the meeting.
c. To the Architect.
B. Representatives of Contractor, subcontractors and suppliers attending the meetings shall be
qualified and authorized to act on behalf of the entity each represents.
1.2 PRE-CONSTRUCTION MEETING
A. Schedule at least fifteen (15) days after date of Notice to Proceed.
B. Location: A central site, convenient for all parties.
C. Attendance:
1. Owner's Representatives
2. Architect and its professional consultants
3. Major Subcontractors
4. Major suppliers
5. Safety Representatives for the Owner and Contractor
D. Minimum Agendum:
1. Distribution and discussion of:
a. List of major subcontractors and suppliers
b. Projected Construction Schedules
FIRE PROTECTION AND FIRE ALARM PROJECT MEETINGS 01 31 19-2
FOR OFF-CAMPUS HOUSING – PHASE 1 March 28, 2013
2. Critical work sequencing
3. Major equipment deliveries and priorities
4. Project Coordination
a. Designation of responsible personnel
5. Procedures and processing of:
a. Field decisions
b. Proposal requests
c. Submittals
d. Change Orders
e. Applications for Payment
f. Requests for Information
g. Daily Reports
6. Adequacy of distribution of Contract Documents
7. Procedures for maintaining Record Documents
8. Use of premises:
a. Office, work and storage areas
b. Owner's requirements
c. Job site personnel conduct
d. Building access and security
9. Temporary facilities, controls and construction aids
a. Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP)
10. Temporary utilities
11. Safety and first-aid procedures
a. Site specific safety plan
12. Security procedures
13. Housekeeping procedures
FIRE PROTECTION AND FIRE ALARM PROJECT MEETINGS 01 31 19-3
FOR OFF-CAMPUS HOUSING – PHASE 1 March 28, 2013
14. Affirmative Action Plan and Reporting requirements
1.3 PROGRESS MEETINGS
A. Schedule regular periodic meetings on the site, not less than once every two weeks
throughout the Construction period.
B. Attendance:
1. Architect
2. Architect's professional consultants when, in the opinion of the Owner, needed
3. General Contractor, including Site Superintendent
4. Owner's Representatives
5. Subcontractors as appropriate to the agenda
6. Suppliers as appropriate to the agenda
7. Safety Representative
C. Minimum Agendum:
1. Review, approval of minutes of previous meeting
2. Review percentage of work to be in place by next meeting by individual trades.
3. Review of work progress since previous meeting.
4. Field observations, problems, and conflicts.
5. Problems which impede Construction Schedule.
6. Review of off-site fabrication, delivery schedules.
7. Corrective measures and procedures to regain projected schedule.
8. Revisions to Construction Schedule.
9. Planned progress and schedule, during succeeding work period.
10. Coordination of schedules
11. Review submittal schedules; expedite as required.
12. Maintenance of quality standards
13. Review status of all issued proposal requests and change orders.
14. Review proposed changes for:
FIRE PROTECTION AND FIRE ALARM PROJECT MEETINGS 01 31 19-4
FOR OFF-CAMPUS HOUSING – PHASE 1 March 28, 2013
a. Effect on Construction Schedule and on completion date.
b. Effect on other contracts of the Project.
15. Other business
D. All decisions, instructions, and interpretations given by the Architect/Engineer or its
representative at these meetings shall be binding and conclusive on the Contractor.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS – NOT USED
PART 3 – EXECUTION – NOT USED
****END OF SECTION 01 31 19***
CORNELL SECTION 01 32 16
Ithaca, New York CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES
FIRE PROTECTION AND FIRE ALARM CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES 01 32 16-1
FOR OFF-CAMPUS HOUSING – PHASE 1 DATE
1.1 GENERAL
A. The Contractor shall, within seven days after award of the Contract, prepare and submit to
the Owner estimated construction progress schedules for the entire Work, with sub-
schedules of related activities which are essential to the progress of the Work.
B. Conferences will be held with the Architect, Owner and Contractor at the start of the
project to agree mutually on a progress schedule which must be diligently followed.
C. Submit revised progress schedules periodically and when requested to do so by Owner.
D. Submit to Owner and Architect a cash flow projection in accordance with Schedule of
Values.
E. Submit electronic versions of all schedules, including updates, as well as all back-up to the
submitted schedules.
1.2 FORM OF SCHEDULES
A. Prepare Network Analysis system, or prepare schedules in the form of a horizontal bar
chart.
1. Provide separate horizontal bar for each trade or operation.
2. Horizontal time scale: Identify the first work day of each week.
3. Scale and spacing: To allow space for notations and future revisions.
B. Format of listings: The chronological order of the start of each item of work.
C. Identification of listings: By specification section numbers.
1.3 CONTENT OF SCHEDULES
A. Construction Progress Schedule:
1. Show the complete sequence of construction by activity.
2. Show the dates for the beginning, and completion of, each major element of
construction.
3. Show projected percentages of completion for each item, as of the first day of each
month.
4. Show estimated dates for the beginning and completion of work which must be
completed by or coordinated with the Owner such as hazardous materials abatement,
moving, training and other such items as they are identified.
B. Submittals Schedule for Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples: Confer with the
Architect and agree on all elements of the Submittals Schedule. The schedule will be based
on the understanding that minimum turn-around time in the Architect's office is ten (10)
FIRE PROTECTION AND FIRE ALARM CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES 01 32 16-2
FOR OFF-CAMPUS HOUSING – PHASE 1 DATE
working days. Some submittals or groups of submittals may take longer to review.
Submittals which do not conform to the agreed schedule may be subject to delays in
processing. Show:
1. The dates for Contractor's submittals.
2. The dates reviewed submittals will be required from the Architect.
3. Confirmed lead time for manufacturing, production, fabrication and shipment to
the project site of all materials which have an impact on the critical path of the
Project's construction schedule.
1.4 PROGRESS REVISIONS
A. Indicate progress of each activity to date of submission.
B. Show changes occurring since previous submission of schedule:
1. Major changes in scope
2. Activities modified since previous submission
3. Revised projections of progress and completion
4. Other identifiable changes
C. Provide a narrative report as needed to define:
1. Problem areas, anticipated delays, and the impact on the schedule.
2. Corrective action recommended, and its effect.
3. The effect of changes on schedules of other prime contractors.
1.5 SUBMISSIONS
A. Submit initial Construction Progress Schedules within fifteen (15) calendar days after
award of Contract.
1. Owner will review schedules and return review copy within ten (10) days after
receipt.
2. If required, resubmit within seven (7) days after return of review copy.
B. Submit progress revision schedules to accompany each application for payment.
C. Submit Submittals Schedule within thirty (30) calendar days after date of commencement
of work.
D. Submit one reproducible transparency and one opaque reproduction.
1.6 DISTRIBUTION
FIRE PROTECTION AND FIRE ALARM CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES 01 32 16-3
FOR OFF-CAMPUS HOUSING – PHASE 1 DATE
A. Distribute copies of the reviewed schedules to:
1. Job site file
2. Subcontractors
3. Other concerned parties
B. Instruct recipients to report to the Contractor, in writing, any problems anticipated by the
projections of the schedule.
1.7 Not Used.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS – NOT USED
PART 3 – EXECUTION – NOT USED
***END OF SECTION 01 32 16***
CORNELL SECTION 01 33 00
Ithaca, New York SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
FIRE PROTECTION AND FIRE ALARM SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00-1
FOR OFF-CAMPUS HOUSING – PHASE 1 DATE
1.1 GENERAL
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for submittals, including the
following:
1. Shop Drawings
2. Product Data
3. Samples
4. Quality Assurance and Quality Control Submittals
B. Designate in the construction schedule, or in a separate Submittals Schedule, the dates for
submission and the dates reviewed Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples will be
needed.
1.2 SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Drawings shall be newly prepared information drawn accurately to scale by skilled
draftsmen and presented in a clear and thorough manner.
1. Highlight, encircle, or otherwise indicate deviations from Contract Documents.
2. Do not reproduce Contract Documents or copy standard information as basis of Shop
Drawings.
3. Standard information prepared without specific reference to Project is not Shop
Drawing.
B. Shop Drawings include fabrication and installation Drawings, setting diagrams, schedules,
patterns, templates and similar Drawings. Include the following information:
1. Dimensions.
2. Identification of products and materials included by sheet and detail number.
3. Compliance with specified standards.
4. Notation of coordination requirements.
5. Notation of dimensions established by field measurements.
6. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns and similar full-size Drawings, submit
Shop Drawings on sheets at least 8 ½ by 11 inches but no larger than 36 by 48
inches.
FIRE PROTECTION AND FIRE ALARM SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00-2
FOR OFF-CAMPUS HOUSING PHASE 1 March 28, 2013
7. Submittal: Submit one (1) correctable, translucent, reproducible print and three (3)
blue or black line print for Architect’s review. Architect will return reproducible
print and one (1) blue or black line print. Maintain returned print as a “Record
Document”.
1.3 PRODUCT DATA
A. Product Data includes brochures, diagrams, standard schedules, performance charts, and
instructions that illustrate physical size, appearance and other characteristics of materials
and equipment.
B. Collect Product Data into a single submittal for each element of construction or system.
1. Clearly mark each copy to show applicable choices and options.
2. Show performance characteristics and capacities.
3. Show dimensions and clearances required.
4. Show wiring or piping diagrams and controls.
5. Where printed Product Data includes information on products that are not required,
eliminate or mark through information that does not apply.
6. Supplement standard information to provide information specifically applicable to
the Work.
7. Preliminary Submittal: Submit single copy of Product Data where selection of
options by Architect is required.
8. Submittals: Submit four (4) sets of Product Data for Architect’s review. Architect
will return two (2) copies. Maintain one (1) copy as a “Record Document”.
1.4 SAMPLES
A. Samples include partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components, cuts or
containers of materials, color range sets, and swatches showing color, texture, and pattern.
B. Office samples shall be of sufficient size and quantity to clearly illustrate:
1. Functional characteristics of the product, with integrally related parts and attachment
devices.
2. Full range of color, texture and pattern.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE AND QUALITY CONTROL SUBMITTALS
A. Quality assurance and quality control submittals include design data, test reports,
certifications, manufacturer’s instructions, and manufacturer’s field reports.
B. Professional design services or certifications: Where Contract Documents require
professional design services or certifications by a design professional, Contractor shall
FIRE PROTECTION AND FIRE ALARM SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00-3
FOR OFF-CAMPUS HOUSING PHASE 1 March 28, 2013
cause such services or certifications to be provided by a qualified design professional,
whose registration seal shall appear on drawings, calculations, specifications, certifications,
Shop Drawings, and other submittals prepared by such professional. Architect shall be
entitled to rely upon adequacy, accuracy, and completeness of services, certifications, or
approvals performed by such design professionals.
C. Inspection and Test Reports: Requirements for submittal of inspection and test reports
from independent testing agencies as specified in the Contract Documents.
D. Manufacturer’s instruction: Preprinted instructions concerning proper application or
installation of system or product.
E. Manufacturer’s field reports: Reports documenting testing and verification by
manufacturer’s field representative to verify compliance with manufacturer’s standards or
instructions.
F. Submittals: Submit not less than two (2) copies to Architect. Maintain one (1) additional
copy as “Record Document”.
1.6 COORDINATION DRAWINGS
A. Prepare and submit coordinated layouts of the mechanical and electrical systems and
equipment for all areas; drawn at a scale not less than 1/4" per foot showing on both plan
and elevation including but not limited to all equipment, ducts, pipe sleeves, piping
including plumbing and, sprinkler system, lighting, special supports and other items
contained within the space. Show mechanical and electrical services as well as
architectural and structural features drawn to scale. Provide mylar record of each
coordination drawing submitted. Provide coordination drawings for all corridors,
laboratories, offices, mechanical rooms, boiler room, shafts, tunnels, and all congested
areas. Copies of coordination drawings shall be distributed to all trades to assure a
complete, coordinated installation of work within the space available.
B. Submittal and review of coordination drawings will be required before work can start in
any given area of the building.
1.7 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES
A. Review submittals for compliance with Contract Documents and approve submittals prior
to transmitting to the Architect.
B. Specifically record deviations from Contract Document requirements, including minor
variations and limitation. Comply with requirements of Section 01 25 00 Substitutions and
Product Options.
C. Contractor’s approval of submittals shall indicate that the Contractor has determined and
verified materials, field measurements and field construction criteria, and has checked and
coordinated information within each submittal with requirement of the Work and Contact
Documents.
D. Contractor shall be responsible for:
1. Compliance with the Contract Documents
FIRE PROTECTION AND FIRE ALARM SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00-4
FOR OFF-CAMPUS HOUSING PHASE 1 March 28, 2013
2. Confirming and correlating quantities and dimensions
3. Selecting fabrication processes and techniques of construction.
4. Coordination of the work represented by each submittal with other trades.
5. Performing the work in a safe and satisfactory manner.
6. Compliance with the Contractor's Construction Schedule.
7. All other provisions of the agreements.
E. It is understood that the Architect's notation on the submittals is not to be construed as an
authorization for additional work or additional cost.
F. If any notations represent a change to the Contract Sum, submit a cost proposal for the
change in accordance with procedures specified before proceeding with the work.
G. It is understood that the Architect's notation on the submittal is not to be construed as
approval of colors. Make all color-related submittals at one time.
H. Notify the Architect by letter of any notations made by the Architect which the Contractor
finds unacceptable. Resolve such issues prior to proceeding with the Work.
I. Begin no fabrication of work until all specified submittal procedures have been fulfilled.
J. Do not submit shop drawings, product data or samples representing work for which such
submittals are not specified. The Architect shall not be responsible for consequences of
inadvertent review of unspecified submittals.
K. The review of shop drawings shall not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for
proper construction and the furnishing of materials and labor required even though the
same may not be indicated on the review shop drawings.
1.8 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
A. Coordination
1. Coordinate submittals with performance of construction activities.
2. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other
submittals and related activities that require sequential activity.
3. Prepare and transmit each submittal in accordance with the Submittals Schedule,
agreed to by all entities involved.
4. Prepare, review, approve and transmit each submittal sufficiently in advance of
performance of related construction activities to avoid delay.
5. Architect's Review: Allow ten (10) working days for Architect's initial processing of
each submittal requiring the Architect’s review and response, except for longer
FIRE PROTECTION AND FIRE ALARM SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00-5
FOR OFF-CAMPUS HOUSING PHASE 1 March 28, 2013
periods required as noted below, and where processing must be delayed for
coordination with subsequent submittals. The Architect will advise the Contractor
promptly when it is determined that a submittal being processed must be delayed for
coordination. Allowing ten (10) working days for Architect's reprocessing of each
submittal. Advise the Architect when processing time for a submittal is critical to the
progress of the work, and the work would be expedited if its processing time could be
foreshortened.
An additional 5 working days will be required for items specified in Divisions 2, 3, 5,
23 and 26, and for Millwork, Hollow Metal Work and Hardware Schedules.
6. Allow time for delivery in addition to review.
7. Allow time for reprocessing each submittal.
8. No extension of Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to prepare
submittals sufficiently in advance of Work to permit processing.
9. Submittals made which do not conform to the schedule are subject to delays in
processing by the Architect.
10. Refer to Section 01 32 16 Construction Schedules for requirements of the Submittals
Schedule.
11. Failure of the Contractor to obtain approval of Shop Drawings shall render all work
thereafter performed to be at Contractor’s sole risk, cost and expense.
B. Submittal Preparation
1. Place permanent label or title block on each submittal for identification.
2. Indicate name of entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block.
3. Provide space on label or beside title block on Shop Drawings to record Contractor's
stamp, initialed or signed, certifying to review of submittal, action taken, verification
of products, field measurements and field construction criteria, and coordination of
the information within the submittal with requirements of the Work and of Contract
Documents.
4. Include following information on label for processing and recording action taken.
a. Project name and number.
b. Date of submission and the dates of any previous submissions.
c. Contract identification.
d. Name of Architect.
e. Name and address of Contractor.
f. Name of subcontractor.
FIRE PROTECTION AND FIRE ALARM SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00-6
FOR OFF-CAMPUS HOUSING PHASE 1 March 28, 2013
g. Name of manufacturer.
h. Name of supplier.
i. Drawing, detail or specification references, including section number, as
appropriate to clearly identify intended use of product.
j. Field dimensions, clearly identified as such.
k. Relation to adjacent or critical features of the work or materials.
l. Applicable standards, such as ASTM or Federal Specification numbers.
m. A blank space for the Architect’s stamps.
5. Identification of revisions on re-submittals, other than those noted by the Architect
on previous submittals.
6. Shop drawings with the comment "by others" are not acceptable. All such work must
specifically identify the related responsible subcontractor.
C. Submittal Transmittal
1. Package each submittal appropriately for transmittal and handling.
2. Transmit each submittal using a transmittal form.
3. On transmittal, record relevant information including deviations from Contract
Document requirements, including minor variations and limitations.
4. Transmit submittals to Architect unless otherwise noted or directed.
5. Where noted or directed, transmit submittals to Architect’s consultant and forward
copy of transmittal form to Architect.
1.9 RESUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS
A. Make any corrections or changes noted on previous submittals.
B. Shop Drawings and Product Data:
1. Revise initial drawings or data, and resubmit as specified for the initial submittal.
2. Indicate any changes which have been made other than those noted by the Architect.
C. Samples: Submit new samples as required for initial submittal.
1.10 ARCHITECT'S DUTIES
A. Review submittals with reasonable promptness as identified in 1.8, paragraph 5 of this
Section.
FIRE PROTECTION AND FIRE ALARM SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00-7
FOR OFF-CAMPUS HOUSING PHASE 1 March 28, 2013
B. Notations on the Submittal Review Stamp mean the following:
1. "Approved" indicates that no deviations from the design concept have been found
and Work may proceed.
2. "Approved As Noted" indicates that deviations from the design concept which have
been found are noted, and the Contractor may proceed accordingly.
3. "Revise and Resubmit" or “Rejected” indicates that Work covered by submittal,
including purchasing, fabrication, delivery, or other activity may not proceed. Revise
or prepare new submittal according to Architect’s notations; resubmit without delay.
Repeat if necessary to obtain different action mark.
C. Informational Submittals: Submittals for information or record purposes, including Quality
Assurance and Quality Control Submittals, and Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS), will
not require responsive action by the Architect.
1. Architect will forward informational submittals without action.
2. Architect will reject and return informational submittals not in compliance with
Contract Documents.
D. Incomplete Submittals: Architect will return incomplete submittals without action.
E. Unsolicited Submittals: Architect will return unsolicited submittals to sender without
action.
F. Return submittals to Contractor for distribution, or for resubmission.
1.11 DISTRIBUTION
A. Distribute reproductions of reviewed Shop Drawings and copies of Product Data to:
1. Job site file
2. Record Documents file
3. Subcontractors
4. Installers
5. Suppliers
6. Manufacturers
7. Fabricators
8. Architect
9. Owner
B. Do not permit use of unmarked copies or rejected copies of submittals in connection with
construction at Project Site or elsewhere where Work is in progress.
FIRE PROTECTION AND FIRE ALARM SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00-8
FOR OFF-CAMPUS HOUSING PHASE 1 March 28, 2013
PART 2 – PRODUCTS – NOT USED
PART 3 – EXECUTION – NOT USED
***END OF SECTION 01 33 00***
CORNELL SECTION 01 35 29
Ithaca, New York GENERAL HEALTH & SAFETY
FIRE PROTECTION AND FIRE ALARM GENERAL HEALTH & SAFETY 01 35 29-1
FOR OFF-CAMPUS HOUSING PHASE 1 March 28, 2013
1.1 GENERAL
A. This Section provides requirements for general health and safety during the project. The
requirements of this Section shall apply to both Contractor and all tiers of sub-contractors
involved in the project.
B. In addition to the requirements of this Section, all laws and regulations by applicable local,
state, and federal agencies shall apply to the work of this contract. In some cases the
requirements of these Specifications may by intention exceed such legal requirements, but
in no case shall this Specification be interpreted or understood to reduce or eliminate such
requirements.
1.2 CONTRACTOR’S SAFETY PLAN
A. The Contractor will submit a site Safety Plan for review by Cornell University before
commencement of work on the site. The safety plan should address site specific safety
concerns related directly to the Work being done. The following safety plan review
checklist is provided to assist contractors in tailoring their safety plan to the Work. Safety
plans that inadequately address safe operations and equipment will be returned for
resubmission. Failure to submit an appropriate site safety plan may result in denial of the
payment.
1.3 ASBESTOS AND LEAD
A. Attached for the Contractor’s information are asbestos reports which represent samples
taken within the building.
B. Buildings may contain lead based paint. The Contractor shall protect workers in
accordance with OSHA regulations. The Contractor selects the means and/or methods to
address the presence of lead based paint, and must concurrently protect its workers based
on the Contractor’s means and/or methods. Lead was a common ingredient in paint until
1978. The Contractor is required to submit a lead plan that is site specific, indicating that
the protective measures the Contractor proposes meet the OSHA standard 1926.62 “Lead in
Construction Standards”. This site specific plan should address the particular methods the
Contractor intends to protect its workers, the building occupants and the building structure
based on its selection of addressing the presence of lead based paint.
1.4 SITE VISITS
A. The undertaking of periodic Site Visits by Architects and/or Engineers or Owner shall not
be construed as supervision of actual construction, or make them responsible for the safety
of all persons; or make them responsible for means, methods, techniques, sequences or
procedures of construction selected by the Contractor or its Subcontractors; or make them
responsible for safety programs and precautions incident to the Work, or for the safe
access, visit, use, Work, travel or occupancy of any person.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS – NOT USED
PART 3 – EXECUTION – NOT USED
FIRE PROTECTION AND FIRE ALARM GENERAL HEALTH & SAFETY 01 35 29-2
FOR OFF-CAMPUS HOUSING PHASE 1 March 28, 2013
Jobsite Name: Date:
Job No: General Contractor:
Jobsite Location: Subcontractor:
Scope of Work: Prime Contractor:
Completed by: Shops:
Applies Designated
to this Competent
Contractor? Person
Standard Y/N (employee name)
Subpart C - General Provisions
1926.20 - .35
Subpart D - Occupational Health & Environmental. Controls
1926.50 - .66
Gases, Vapors, Fumes, Dusts, Mists
1926.55
Lead
1926.62
Subpart E - Personal Protective Equipment
1926.95 - .107
Subpart F – Fire Protection & Prevention
1926.150 - .159
Subpart G – Signs, Signals and Barricades
1926.200 - .203
Subpart H – Materials Handling, Storage, Use & Disposal
1926.250 - .252
Subpart I – Tools – Hand & Power
1926.300 - .307
Subpart J – Welding & Cutting
1926.350 - .354
Job ‐ Specific
Safety Manual Checklist
FIRE PROTECTION AND FIRE ALARM GENERAL HEALTH & SAFETY 01 35 29-3
FOR OFF-CAMPUS HOUSING PHASE 1 March 28, 2013
Applies Designated
to this Competent
Contractor? Person
Standard Y/N (employee name)
Subpart K – Electrical
1926.400 - .449
Subpart L – Scaffolds
1926.450 - .454
Subpart M – Fall Protection
1926.500 - .503
Subpart N – Cranes, Derricks, Hoists, Elevators, & Conveyors
1926.550 - .556
Subpart P – Excavations
1926.650 - .652
Subpart Q – Concrete & Masonry Construction
1926.700 - .706
Subpart R – Steel Erection
1926.750 - .761
Subpart S – Tunnels, Shafts, Caissons, Cofferdams, & Compressed Air
1926.800 - .804
Subpart T – Demolition
1926.850 - .860
Subpart U – Blasting & Use of Explosives
1926.900 - .914
Subpart V – Power Transmission & Distribution
1926.950 - .960
Subpart X – Stairways & Ladders
1926.1050 - .1060
Subpart Y – Commercial Diving Operations
1926.1071 – 1090
Recordkeeping –
1926.1091 - .1092
Subpart Z – Toxic and Hazardous Substances
1926.1100 - .1152
***END OF SECTION 01 35 29***
CORNELL SECTION 01 35 43
Ithaca, New York GENERAL ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
PROJECT GENERAL ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS 01 35 43-1
Date
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL
A. This Section and the listed Related Sections provides minimum requirements for the
protection of the environment during the project. The requirements of this Section shall
apply to both Contractor and all tiers of sub-contractors involved in the project.
B. In addition to the requirements of this Section and the listed Related Sections, all laws and
regulations by applicable local, state, and federal agencies shall apply to the work of this
contract. In some cases the requirements of these Specifications may by intention exceed
such legal requirements, but in no case shall this Specification be interpreted or understood
to reduce or eliminate such requirements.
C. Prior to bidding, review the entire Bidding Documents and report in writing to the Owner’s
Representative any error, inconsistency, or omission that may have environmental impacts.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 01 57 13 – Soil Erosion and Sediment Control
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittals:
1. Material Certifications for all imported soil and granular materials (“borrow”).
2. Waste Disposal Plan.
1.4 JOB SITE ADMINISTRATION
A. In accordance with Article 2 of the General Conditions, provide a competent supervisory
representative with full authority to act for the Contractor at the site during all working
hours.
B. If at any time operations under the representative’s supervision do not comply with this
Section, or the representative is otherwise unsatisfactory to the Owner, replace, if requested
by the Owner, said representative with another representative satisfactory to the Owner.
There shall be no change in superintendent without the Owner's approval.
C. Remove from the Work any employee of the Contractor or any Subcontractor when so
directed by the Owner. The Owner may request the removal of any employee who does not
comply with these specifications.
1.5 CLEARING, SITE PREPARATION AND SITE USE
A. In accordance with Section 01 11 00 (1.1.D. Use of Site), only that portion of the working
area that is absolutely necessary and essential for the work shall be cleared for construction.
All clearing should be approved and performed to provide minimum practical exposure of
soils.
FIRE PROTECTION AND FIRE ALARM GENERAL ENVIRONMENTAL 01 35 43-2
FOR OFF-CAMPUS HOUSING PHASE 1 REQUIREMENTS March 28, 2013
B. The Contractor shall make every effort to avoid the destruction of plants, trees, shrubs and
lawns outside the area of construction so as not to unduly disturb the ecological or
environmental quality of the area.
C. Topsoil excavated as part of the Project, which can be reused as part of the Project, shall be
stockpiled for future use and temporarily stabilized to prevent erosion.
1.6 SPOIL AND BORROW
A. Spoil
1. Dispose of excavated material which, in the opinion of the Owner’s Representative,
is unfit to be used as backfill or embankment or which is in excess of the amount
required under the Contract, at a location as directed by the Owner’s
Representative.
2. All spoil areas shall be graded and seeded to match the surrounding area.
3. Spoil areas shall be covered and protected from erosion into adjacent storm sewers,
drainage ways, land areas, or water bodies.
B. Borrow Material
1. Borrow material shall be provided from a clean source. Submittals of proposed
borrow material shall be reviewed by the Owner prior to delivery on-site.
Submittals shall include the quantity of materials, source location and certification
by the material supplier that it is free of chemicals or other foreign matter.
1.7 NOISE AND VIBRATION
A. Noise and vibration
1. Limit and control the nature and extent of activities at all times to minimize the
effects of noise and vibrations. Take adequate measures for keeping noise levels, as
produced by construction related equipment, to safe and tolerable limits as set forth
by the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA), the New York
State Industrial Code Guidelines and Ordinances and all City, Town and Local
ordinances. Equip all construction equipment presenting a potential noise nuisance
with noise-muffling devices adequate to meet these requirements.
1.8 DUST CONTROL
A. Take adequate measures for controlling dust produced by drilling, excavation,
backfilling, loading, or other means. The use of calcium chloride or petroleum-based
materials for dust control is prohibited. Dust control measures are required throughout
the duration of construction.
B. If, in the opinion of the Owner’s Representative, the Contractor is not adequately
controlling dust, the Owner will first notify the Contractor. If the Contractor does not
take adequate actions necessary, the Owner may, at the Contractor’s expense, employ
alternative means to control dust.
FIRE PROTECTION AND FIRE ALARM GENERAL ENVIRONMENTAL 01 35 43-3
FOR OFF-CAMPUS HOUSING PHASE 1 REQUIREMENTS March 28, 2013
C. Erect, maintain, and remove when appropriate barriers or other devices, including
mechanical ventilation systems, as required by the conditions of the work for the
protection of users of the project area, the protection of the work being done, or the
containment of dust and debris. All such barriers or devices shall be provided in
conformance with all applicable codes, laws, and regulations including OSHA.
1.9 PROTECTION OF THE ENVIRONMENT
A. Construction procedures observed by the Contractor, its subcontractors and other
employees shall include protection of the environment, in accordance with all pertinent
Cornell standards, policies, local laws, executive orders, ordinances, and federal and
state regulations. Construction procedures that are prohibited in the undertaking of
work associated with this Contract include, but are not limited to:
1. Dumping of spoil material or any liquid or solid pollutant into any storm or
sanitary sewer, drainage way, stream sewer, any wetlands (as defined by federal
and state regulations), any surface waters, or at unspecified locations.
2. Indiscriminate, arbitrary, or capricious operation of equipment in any stream
corridors, any wetlands, or any surface waters.
3. Pumping of any silt-laden water from trenches or other excavations into any storm
sewers, sanitary sewers, drainage ways, wetlands, or surface waters.
4. Damaging vegetation beyond the extent necessary for construction of the facilities.
5. Disposal of trees, brush, and other debris in any location on University property,
unless such areas are specifically identified on the drawing or in the specifications
or specifically approved by the Owner’s site representative.
6. Permanent or unspecified alteration of the flow line of a stream.
7. Burning trash, project debris, or waste materials.
B. Take all necessary precautions to prevent silt or waste of any kind from entering any
drainage or waterways or downstream properties as a result of the Work.
C. Runoff of potable water used for concrete curing or concrete truck or chute cleaning
operations shall not be allowed to reach the storm water system or open water due to
the levels of residual chlorine (New York State water quality standards, 6 NYCRR Part
703.5) and other potential contaminants. If necessary, obtain permission from the local
sewer authority and collect and pump the runoff to the sanitary sewer.
D. Limit the nature and extent of any activities that could result in the release or discharge
of pollutants. Report any such release or discharge immediately to the Owner’s
Representative and clean up spills immediately, as detailed in Section 01 35 44 – Spill
Control Procedures.
1.10 TEMPORARY RE-ROUTING OF PIPING AND DUCTWORK
FIRE PROTECTION AND FIRE ALARM GENERAL ENVIRONMENTAL 01 35 43-4
FOR OFF-CAMPUS HOUSING PHASE 1 REQUIREMENTS March 28, 2013
A. Obtain approval from the Owner’s Representative prior to any temporary re-routing of
piping and exhaust ductwork necessary for the completion of the Work. Submit re-
routing plans to the Owner’s Representative in writing.
The following shall require approval of the Owner:
1. Temporary storm, sanitary or water line connections.
2. Temporary exhaust ductwork connections where such connections may impact
air emissions.
B. Instruct all personnel to observe extreme caution when working in the vicinity of
mechanical equipment and piping. Personnel shall not operate or tamper with any
existing valves, switches, or other devices or equipment without prior approval by the
Owner’s Representative.
1.11 HAZARDOUS OR TOXIC MATERIALS
A. Inform officers, employees, agents, contractors, subcontractors at every tier, and any
other party which may come into contact with any hazardous or toxic materials as a
result of its performance hereunder of the nature of such materials, and any health and
safety or environmental risks associated therewith.
B. Do not use hazardous or toxic materials in a manner that will violate Cornell University
Policies or any state, federal, or municipal environmental health and safety regulations.
In situations where the risks are unclear consult with Environmental Health and Safety
(EH&S) for guidance.
C. Provide complete care and treatment for any injury sustained by any parties coming
into contact with any hazardous or toxic materials as a result of Contractor’s
performance or failure to perform hereunder.
D. At the completion of project Contractor shall remove all unused chemical products and
hazardous materials from campus. Transportation of these materials shall be in
accordance with all federal, state, and local regulations. Request and receive written
approval from EH&S prior to disposal of any on-site disposal.
1.12 DISPOSAL OF WASTE MATERIAL AND TITLE
A. Prior to start of work and first payment, Contractor shall prepare and submit
“Contractor Waste Material Disposal Plan” to the Owner’s Representative. The plan
shall identify the waste transportation and treatment, storage or disposal (TSD)
companies which will manage all waste material and any site(s) for disposal of the
waste material.
B. The “Contractor Waste Material Disposal Plan” form, together with definitions
associated with the form waste descriptions, is attached to this Section. Contractor
must use this form to document waste disposal methods and locations.
C. Contractor shall be responsible for the proper cleanup, containment, storage and
disposal of any hazardous material/chemical spill occurring during its work. For
Cornell University owned hazardous waste EH&S will oversee, approve or effect the
FIRE PROTECTION AND FIRE ALARM GENERAL ENVIRONMENTAL 01 35 43-5
FOR OFF-CAMPUS HOUSING PHASE 1 REQUIREMENTS March 28, 2013
proper disposal. Title, risk of loss, and all other incidents of ownership to the Waste
Material, shall vest in Contractor at the time Contractor or any transporter acting on its
behalf takes physical possession of Waste Material. Complete and maintain full
records of the chain of custody and control, including certificates of disposal or
destruction, of all Waste Materials loaded, transported and/or disposed of. Deliver all
such records to the Owner in accordance with applicable laws and regulations and any
instructions from the Owner in a timely manner and in any event prior to final
payment(s) under this Contract.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS – NOT USED
PART 3 – EXECUTION – NOT USED
***END OF SECTION 01 35 43***
Contractor Waste Material Disposal Plan Revision date: May 2010 Page 1 of 2 1. Contractor Name: ________________________ Contact Name/Number/Email: Project Name/Description: Contract No.: Project Start Date: Project End Date: _ CU Project Manager: 2. Check all hazardous materials that will be generated as waste: Category Description Estimated QiSource MSDS Available Waste Management Re-Use Transporter Destination or Disposal Location Cornell Contractor CU- Mgt Contractor MgtEHS Grounds Solvents PCBs Asbestos Lead Mercury Chromium Other Toxic Metals (describe in section 4) Mold Light Bulbs Thermostats Batteries Used Oil Contaminated PPE & Materials Other (describe in section 4) No hazardous waste
Contractor Waste Material Disposal Plan Revision date: May 2010 Page 2 of 2 3. Check all non-hazardous wastes that will be generated during the project: Category Disposal Facility Name Facility Address Facility Phone Transporter Estimated Quantity C&D Clean soil Non C&D solid waste Other (describe in section IV) No non-hazardous waste will be generated 4. Further description of waste materials expected to be generated during the project: 5. Contractor Certification I, _______________________________________, do hereby certify that I have identified above all waste materials expected to be generated by the Project named in Section 1 and that I will dispose of all such waste materials in a legally permissible manner and location(s), in accordance with all applicable federal, state, and local laws and regulations. I further certify that I will amend this form as appropriate if I, my representatives, employees or subcontractors become aware of any additional wastes that will be generated by the Project. I further agree to notify the CU Project Manager if I become aware of any legal non-compliance associated with disposal of Project wastes by anyone. _____________________________________________ Contractor Signature Print Name Date 6. Submit completed forms to CU Project Manager. CU Project Manager must submit this completed form to CU Environmental Health and Safety Office before start of work and before the first payment will be made. The completed form will be incorporated as an enforceable part of the contract. Forms can be submitted electronically to EHS at mailto:ehsdir-mailbox@cornell.edu or via campus mail to EHS attn: Waste Plans, East Hill Office Building.
Definitions for Use with Contractor Waste Material Disposal Plan:
The following is not solid waste: Discarded materials that are being beneficially used pursuant to
6NYCRR Section 360-1.15
A material is disposed of if it is discharged, deposited, injected, dumped, spilled, leaked or placed
into or on any land or water so that such material or any constituent thereof may enter the
environment or be emitted into the air or discharged into groundwater or surface water.
Asbestos: Any waste material containing the asbestiform varieties of: Chrysotile (serpentine);
crocidolite (riebeckite); amosite (cum- mingtonitegrunerite); anthophyllite; tremolite; and actinolite.
Batteries: All spent batteries being disposed that are regulated by New York State Department of
Environmental Conservation (NYDEC) in 6 New York Code of Rules and Regulations (NYCRR)
Part 374-3, or Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) in 40 Code of Federal Regulations (CFR)
273.2 as Universal Waste Batteries.
Borrow Material: Fill material required for on-site construction that is obtained from other
locations.
Chromium: Any waste containing chromium or contaminated with chromium that exceeds the
Toxicity Characteristic Leaching Procedure (TCLP) limit for chromium as defined in 6 NYCRR Part
371.3 or 40 CFR 261.24.
Clean Soil: Soil that is uncontaminated with any solid or hazardous waste, C&DDebris, trees,
stumps, yard waste or wood chips per definitions of those terms below.
Construction and Demolition (C&D) Debris: Uncontaminated solid waste resulting from the
construction, remodeling, repair and demolition of utilities, structures and roads; and uncontaminated
solid waste resulting from land clearing. Such waste includes, but is not limited to bricks, concrete
and other masonry materials, soil, rock, wood (including painted, treated and coated wood and wood
products), land clearing debris, wall coverings, plaster, drywall, plumbing fixtures, non-asbestos
insulation, roofing shingles and other roof coverings, asphaltic pavement, glass, plastics that are not
sealed in a manner that conceals other wastes, empty buckets ten gallons or less in size and having no
more than one inch of residue remaining on the bottom, electrical wiring and components containing
no hazardous liquids, and pipe and metals that are incidental to any of the above. Solid waste that is
not C&D debris (even if resulting from the construction, remodeling, repair and demolition of
utilities, structures and roads and land clearing) includes, but is not limited to asbestos waste, garbage,
corrugated container board, electrical fixtures containing hazardous liquids such as fluorescent light
ballasts or transformers, fluorescent lights, carpeting, furniture, appliances, tires, drums, containers
greater than ten gallons in size, any containers having more than one inch of residue remaining on the
bottom and fuel tanks. Specifically excluded from the definition of construction and demolition debris
is solid waste (including what otherwise would be construction and demolition debris) resulting from
any processing technique, other than that employed at a department-approved C&D debris processing
facility, that renders individual waste components unrecognizable, such as pulverizing or shredding.
Also, waste contained in an illegal disposal site may be considered C&D debris if the department
determines that such waste is similar in nature and content to C&D debris.
Construction and Demolition Debris Processing Facility means a processing facility that receives
and processes construction and demolition debris by any means.
Revision date: May 2010
Page 2 of 2
Contaminated PPE & Materials: Any personal protective equipment such as gloves, coveralls,
boot covers, respirator cartridges etc.; or rags, tools, articles or other material that has become
adulterated by a hazardous material, and which meets the definition of hazardous waste or is
considered unsuitable for disposal as regular trash.
Exempt C&D and Stump Facilities: The following facilities are exempt from Solid waste
management facility permitting requirements provided the facilities operate only between the hours of
sunrise and sunset, and (if the allowable waste comes from an off-site source) no fee or other form of
consideration is required for the privilege of using the facility for disposal purposes:
(i) A site at which only the following C&D debris is placed: recognizable uncontaminated concrete
and concrete products (including steel or fiberglass reinforcing rods that are embedded in the
concrete), asphalt pavement, brick, glass, soil and rock. (Recognizable means solid waste that can be
readily identified as C&D debris by visual observation.)
(ii) A landfill for the disposal of trees, stumps, yard waste and wood chips generated from these
materials is exempt when origin and disposal of such waste occur on properties under the same
ownership or control.
Hazardous Waste: Any waste material that meets the definition of “hazardous waste” in 6 NYCRR
371.1 and 40 CFR 261.3 and that is not excluded by regulation.
Land Clearing Debris means vegetative matter, soil and rock resulting from activities such as land
clearing and grubbing, utility line maintenance or seasonal or storm-related cleanup such as trees,
stumps, brush and leaves and including wood chips generated from these materials. Land clearing
debris does not include yard waste which has been collected at the curbside.
Lead: Any metallic lead or waste material containing lead, e.g. waste paint chips, that exceed the
Toxicity Characteristic Leaching Procedure (TCLP) limit for lead as defined in 6 NYCRR Part 371.3
or 40 CFR 261.24.
Light Bulbs: All spent lamps or light bulbs being disposed that are regulated in 6 NYCRR Part 374-
3 or 40 CFR 273.5.
Mercury: Liquid mercury or any waste containing mercury at levels exceeding the Toxicity
Characteristic Leaching Procedure (TCLP) limit for mercury as defined in 6 NYCRR Part 371.3 or 40
CFR 261.24.
Mold: Construction material or debris contaminated with mold fungus that is unsuitable for reuse.
Other Toxic Metals: Any waste containing a metal or contaminated by a metal identified in, and
exceeding the Toxicity Characteristic Leaching Procedure (TCLP) limit of 6 NYCRR Part 371.3 or
40 CFR 261.24.PCBs: All electrical articles and equipment or the used oil removed from them,
containing polychlorinated biphenyls at levels regulated by 6 NYCRR 371.4(e)
Scrap Metal: Bits and pieces of metal parts (e.g., bars, turnings, rods, sheets, wire) or metal pieces
that may be combined together with bolts or soldering (e.g., radiators, scrap automobiles, railroad box
cars), which when worn or superfluous can be recycled.
Revision date: May 2010
Page 3 of 2
Solid Waste (Non C&D): Any garbage, refuse, sludge from a wastewater treatment plant, water
supply treatment plant, or air pollution control facility and other discarded materials including solid,
liquid, semisolid, or contained gaseous material, resulting from industrial, commercial, mining and
agricultural operations, and from community activities, but does not include solid or dissolved
materials in domestic sewage, or solid or dissolved materials in irrigation return flows or industrial
discharges that are point sources subject to permit under 33 USC 1342, or source, special nuclear or
by-product material as defined by the Atomic Energy Act of 1954, except as may be provided by
existing agreements between the State of New York and the government of the United States.
Solvents: Substances (usually liquid) suitable for, or employed in, solution, or in dissolving
something; as, water is the appropriate solvent for most salts, alcohol for resins, ether for fats, and
mercury or acids for metals, etc. Typically these are chemicals are used as paint thinners or cleaning
solutions.
Spoil: Refuse material removed from an excavation.
Used Oil: Any oil refined from crude oil, or any synthetic oil, that has been used, and as a result of
such use is contaminated by physical or chemical impurities. “See 6 NYCRR 374-2 or 40 CFR 279”
Thermostats: Any mercury-containing thermostat as defined in 6 NYCRR 374-3.1(d), or 40 CFR
273.4
Uncontaminated C&D Debris: C&D Debris that is not mixed or commingled with other solid
waste at the point of generation, processing or disposal, and that is not contaminated with spills of a
petroleum product, hazardous waste or industrial waste. Contamination from spills of a petroleum
product does not include asphalt or concrete pavement that has come into contact with petroleum
products through normal vehicle use of the roadway.
CORNELL SECTION 01 35 44
Ithaca, New York SPILL CONTROL
FIRE PROTECTION AND FIRE ALARM SPILL CONTROL 01 35 44-1
FOR OFF-CAMPUS HOUSING PHASE 1 March 28, 2013
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SPILL PREVENTION
A. In order to minimize the potential for discharge to the environment of oil, petroleum, or
hazardous substances on site, the following requirements shall apply to all projects:
1. All oil, petroleum, or hazardous materials stored or relocated temporarily on site
during the construction process shall be stored in such a manner as to provide
protection from vehicular damage and to provide containment of leaks or spills.
Horizontal diked oil storage tanks, temporary berms or barriers, or similar
methods shall be employed as appropriate at each site.
2. Any on-site filling or dispensing activities shall occur within an area in which a
temporary berm, boom, or similar containment barrier has been placed to prevent
the inadvertent discharge to the environment of harmful quantities of any
products.
3. All oil, petroleum, or hazardous materials stored on site shall be located in such a
manner as to minimize the potential of damage from construction operations or
vehicles, away from drainage ways and environmentally sensitive areas, and in
accordance with all fire and safety codes.
B. Remove immediately from the site any storage, dispensing, or operating equipment that
is leaking oil or hazardous substances or is in anyway unsuitable for the safe storage of
such materials.
1.2 SPILL CONTROL PROCEDURES
All Contractor personnel working at the project site shall be knowledgeable of the potential
health and safety concerns associated with petroleum and other hazardous substances that
could potentially be released at the project site. Following are a list of activities that should
be conducted by the Contractor in the event of an oil/petroleum spill or the release of any
other hazardous substance. In the event of a large quantity spill that would require cleanup
procedures that are beyond the means of the Contractor, an emergency spill cleanup
contractor shall be hired by the Contractor. In the event the Contractor has the personnel
necessary to cleanup the spill, the following procedures shall be followed:
A. Personnel discovering/responding to a spill shall:
1. Identify and locate the source of the spill. If unsafe conditions exist, then leave
the area, inform nearby personnel, notify the site supervisor, and initiate spill
reporting (Section 1. 3).
2. Limit the discharge of product, if safely possible, by: (1) diverting discharge to a
containment area; (2) creating temporary dikes with soils or other available
materials; and (3) utilizing sorbent materials. If secondary containment is
present, verify that valves and drains are closed prior to diverting the product to
this area.
3. The individual discovering a spill shall initiate containment procedures to prevent
material from reaching a potential migratory route, through implementation of
FIRE PROTECTION AND FIRE ALARM SPILL CONTROL 01 35 44-2
FOR OFF-CAMPUS HOUSING PHASE 1 March 28, 2013
the following actions, or any other methods necessary. Methods employed shall
not compromise worker safety.
a. Stop the spill at once (if possible).
b. Extinguish sources of ignition (e.g., flames, sparks, hot surfaces, cigarettes,
etc.).
c. Clear personnel from the spill location and rope off the area.
d. Utilize available spill control equipment in an effort to ensure that fires,
explosions, and releases do not occur, recur, or spread.
e. Use sorbent materials to control the spill at the source.
f. Construct a temporary containment dike of sorbent materials, cinder
blocks, bricks, or other suitable materials to help contain the spill.
g. Attempt to identify the character, exact source, amount, and area of the
released materials. Identification of the spilled material should be made as
soon as possible so that the appropriate cleanup procedure can be
identified.
h. Assess possible hazards to human health or the environment as a result of
the release, fire, or explosion.
i. If spill response measures involve the temporary cessation of any
operations, the Contractor shall monitor the affected equipment for: (1)
leaks; (2) pressure buildup; (3) gas generation; or (4) ruptures in valves,
pipes, or other equipment.
B. Spill Cleanup:
1. Following containment of the spill, the following spill cleanup procedures shall
be initiated.
a. Use proper waste containers.
b. Remove bulk liquid by using vacuum, pump, sorbents, or shovel and place
material in properly labeled waste container. Be sure not to collect
incompatible or reactive substances in the same container.
c. Cleanup materials not reclaimed on-site shall be disposed of in accordance
with all applicable state and federal regulations.
FIRE PROTECTION AND FIRE ALARM SPILL CONTROL 01 35 44-3
FOR OFF-CAMPUS HOUSING PHASE 1 March 28, 2013
d. Apply sorbent materials to pick up remaining liquid after bulk liquid has
been removed. The Contractor shall not walk over spilled material.
Absorbed material shall be picked up with a shovel and placed in a
separate waste container, and shall not be mixed with bulk liquid.
e. Clean spill control equipment and containers. Replace equipment in its
proper location. Restock or reorder any sorbents used to cleanup the spill.
f. Carefully wash spilled product from skin and clothing using soap. Change
clothes, if necessary, to avoid further contact with product.
g. Disposal of all spilled product shall be made off-site, and shall be arranged
through the Contractor.
h. A Spill Report shall be completed, including a description of the event. A
sample Spill Documentation Form is provided in Appendix B.
C. Fire or Explosion:
1. In the event of a fire or explosion at the site, the Contractor shall:
a. Verify that the local fire department and the appropriate response personnel
(e.g., ambulance, police) have been notified.
b. Report to the scene, if safe to do so, and evaluate the situation (e.g., spill
character, source, etc.). Coordinate, as necessary, with other appropriate
site and emergency personnel.
c. Ensure that people are cleared from the area.
d. Ensure that fires are safely extinguished (if possible), valves closed, and
other immediate actions necessary to mitigate the emergency, if safe to do
so.
e. Initiate responsible measures necessary to prevent subsequent fires,
explosions, or releases from occurring or spreading to other areas of the
site. These measures include stopping processes or operations, collecting
and containing released oil, or removing and isolating containers.
f. Take appropriate action to monitor for: (1) leaks; (2) pressure build-ups;
(3) gas generation; or (4) ruptures in pipes, valves, or other equipment.
1.3 SPILL REPORTING AND DOCUMENTATION
In the event of a spill CALL CORNELL POLICE AT 255-1111 who will notify the
appropriate departments within the university and coordinate with the contractor for external
reporting, if required.
FIRE PROTECTION AND FIRE ALARM SPILL CONTROL 01 35 44-4
FOR OFF-CAMPUS HOUSING PHASE 1 March 28, 2013
The contractor shall be responsible for the initiation of spill reporting and documentation
procedures. All petroleum spills must be reported to NYSDEC Spill Hotline at 1-800- 457-
7362, less than two hours following discovery. Notification must be made to Cornell
Environmental Health and Safety (EH&S), 607.255.8200, within 24 hours of reporting the
release. The Contractor will be expected to provide EH&S with the DEC issued spill
number. Any petroleum spill must be reported to NYSDEC unless ALL of the following
criteria apply:
TABLE 1
CRITERIA TO EXEMPT SPILL REPORTING
CRITERIA DESCRIPTION
Quantity The spill must be known to be less than 5 gallons.
Containment The spill must be contained on an impervious surface or within an impervious
structure, such that it cannot enter the environment.
Control The spill must be under control and not reach a drain or leave the impervious
surface.
Cleanup The spill must be cleaned-up within two hours of occurrence.
Environment The spill must not have already entered into the soil or groundwater or onto
surface water.
A release of a “reportable quantity”1 or unknown amount of a hazardous substance must also be
immediately reported to NYSDEC Spill Hotline. Spills of reportable quantities of chemicals or
“harmful quantities”2 of oil to navigable waters must be reported to the federal National Response
Center, 1-800-424-8802.
Spill Reporting Information. When making a telephone report, the caller should be prepared to
provide the following information, if possible:
1. The date and time of the spill or release.
2. The identity or chemical name of the material released or spilled, including an
indication of whether the material is defined as an extremely hazardous
substance.
3. An estimate of the quantity of material released or spilled into the environment
and the approximate duration of the event.
4. The exact location of the spill, including the name(s) of the waters involved or
threatened, and/or other medium or media affected by the release or spill.
5. The source of the release or spill.
6. The name, address, and telephone number of the party in charge of, or
responsible for, the facility or activity associated with the release or spill.
7. The extent of the actual and potential water pollution.
8. The name and telephone number of the person in charge of operations at the spill
site.
FIRE PROTECTION AND FIRE ALARM SPILL CONTROL 01 35 44-5
FOR OFF-CAMPUS HOUSING PHASE 1 March 28, 2013
9. The steps being taken or proposed to contain and cleanup the released or spilled
material and any precautions taken to minimize impacts, including evacuation.
10. The extent of injuries, if any.
11. Any known or anticipated acute or chronic health risks associated with the
emergency, and information regarding necessary medical attention for exposed
individuals.
12. Assistance required, if any.
If the release of a hazardous substance or oil occurs in an amount which exceeds a reportable quantity
(RQ) as defined in 40 CFR Part 110, 40 CFR Part 117, 40 CFR Part 302, or 6 NYCRR Part 597, then
the Contractor shall do the following:
1. Call to the National Response Center shall be made by the person in charge of
the site. The applicable phone numbers are 1-800-424-8802 or 1-202-426-2675.
2. Within 14 days of the release, submit a written description of the release. The
description should include: (1) a description of the release, (2) the type of material
released, (3) estimated amount of the spill; (4) the date of the release, (5) an
explanation of why the release occurred; and (6) a description of the measures to be
implemented to prevent and control future releases.
1 Reportable Quantity: A Reportable Quantity is the quantity of a hazardous substance or oil that
triggers reporting requirements under the Comprehensive Emergency Response, Compensation, and
Liability Act (CERCLA) (USEPA, September 1992). While the Contractor is legally responsible for
knowing the risks of materials that are part of construction, members of the owner’s spill response
team have access to information that may help identify these quantities with you.
2 Harmful Quantity: A Harmful Quantity of oil includes discharges that violate applicable water
quality standards; cause a film, sheen, or discoloration on a water surface or adjoining shoreline; or
cause a sludge or emulsion to be deposited beneath the water surface or shoreline (40 CFR 110.3).
PART 2 – PRODUCTS – NOT USED
PART 3 – EXECUTION – NOT USED
***END OF SECTION 01 35 44***
CORNELL SECTION 01 41 00
Ithaca, New York REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
FIRE PROTECTION AND FIRE ALARM REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS 01 41 00-1
FOR OFF-CAMPUS HOUSING PHASE 1 March 28, 2013
1.1 PERMITS AND LICENSES
A. The Contractor shall obtain, maintain and pay for all permits and licenses necessary for the
execution of the Work and for the use of such Work when completed. Such permits shall
include but are not limited to building, plumbing, backflow prevention, dig safe and
building demolition.
B. For any projects which include demolition of a structure or load-bearing elements of a
structure, the Contractor is required to complete a “Notification of Demolition and
Renovation” and provide this notification to the United State Environmental Protection
Agency (EPA) in advance of the work as specified in 40 CFR 61.145. The Contractor shall
also provide a copy of this notification to the Owner’s Representative prior to any
demolition.
C. All Construction / Building / Hot Work and Occupancy permits shall be issued and
maintained through Ralph D’Amato Jr. (607-254-6371) or (rjd15@cornell.edu) the SUNY
Codes Official for Contract Colleges Facilities at Cornell, at no cost to the Contractor.
1.2 INSPECTIONS
A. Apply for and obtain all required inspections, pay all fees and charges for same, include all
service charges, pavement cuts and repairs.
1.3 COMPLIANCE
A. The Contractor shall give all notices, pay all fees and comply with all laws, rules and
regulations applicable to the Work.
1.4 OWNER’S REQUIREMENTS
A. The Contractor, Subcontractors, and employees of the Contractor and Subcontractors shall
comply with all regulations governing conduct, access to the premises, operation of
equipment and systems, and conduct while in or near the premises and shall perform the
Work in such a manner as not to unreasonably interrupt or interfere with the conduct of
business of the Owner.
B. Upon completion of the project, the Contractor agrees to provide the Owner with a
summary of municipal permit fees paid. This shall include the name of the permits secured,
the permit fees paid by the Contractor and a copy of the permit.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS – NOT USED
PART 3 – EXECUTION – NOT USED
***END OF SECTION 01 41 00***
CORNELL SECTION 01 45 00
Ithaca, New York QUALITY CONTROL
FIRE PROTECTION AND FIRE ALARM QUALITY CONTROL 01 45 00-1
FOR OFF-CAMPUS HOUSING PHASE 1 March 28, 2013
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. The Contractor shall provide and maintain an effective Contractor Quality Control (CQC)
program and perform sufficient inspections and tests of all items of work, including those
of Subcontractors, to ensure compliance with Contract Documents. Include surveillance
and tests specified in the technical sections of the Specifications. Furnish appropriate
facilities, instruments, and testing devices required for performance of the quality control
function. Controls must be adequate to cover construction operations and be keyed to the
construction sequence. Construction shall not begin until the Owner has approved the CQC
program.
1.2 CONTROL OF ON-SITE CONSTRUCTION
A. Include a control system for the following phases of inspection:
1. Pre-Installation Conference. For all sections where pre-installations are defined, the
Contractor shall arrange for a pre-installation meeting. The Contractor shall make
available, during this meeting, all approved submittals and products. The following
minimum personnel shall be at the meeting:
a. Project Manager.
b. Project Field Supervisor
c. Subcontractor
d. Architect’s Representative
e. Owner’s Representative
f. Commissioning Agent, when applicable
g. Testing Agency, when applicable
2. Preparatory Inspection. Perform this inspection prior to beginning work on any
definable feature of work. Include a review of contract requirements with the
supervisors directly responsible for the performance of the work; check to assure that
materials, products, and equipment have been tested, submitted, and approved; check
to assure that provisions have been made for required control testing; examine the
work area to ascertain that preliminary work has been completed; physically examine
materials and equipment to assure that they conform to shop drawings and data and
that the materials and equipment are on hand.
3. Initial Inspection. Perform this inspection as soon as work commences on a
representative portion of a particular feature of workmanship review control testing
for compliance with contract requirements.
4. Follow-up Inspections. Perform these inspections on a regular basis to assure
continuing compliance with contract requirements until completion of that particular
work.
FIRE PROTECTION AND FIRE ALARM QUALITY CONTROL 01 45 00-2
FOR OFF-CAMPUS HOUSING PHASE 1 March 28, 2013
1.3 CONTROL OF OFF-SITE OPERATIONS
A. Perform factory quality control inspections for items fabricated or assembled off-site as
opposed to "off-the-shelf" items. The CQC Representative at the fabricating plant shall be
responsible for release of the fabricated items for shipment to the job site. The CQC
Representative at the job site shall receive the item and note any damage incurred during
shipment. The Contractor shall be responsible for protecting and maintaining the item in
good condition throughout the period of on-site and during erection or installation.
Although any item found to be faulty may be rejected before its use, final acceptance of an
item by the Owner is based on its satisfactory incorporation into the work and acceptance
of the completed project.
1.4 TESTING
A. The Owner may engage the services of an independent testing laboratory to confirm that an
installed item or element of work conforms to the Specification and workmanship
requirements.
1.5 OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE
A. The Owner shall designate a Representative to monitor the progress and execution of the
work. The Representative shall have the authority to call for test samples, to approve or to
reject work performed and to stop work in progress, if, in its opinion, the work is not in
conformance with the Contract Documents. The Representative shall not be authorized to
make changes or interpretations of the Contract Documents.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS – NOT USED
PART 3 – EXECUTION – NOT USED
***END OF SECTION 01 45 00***
CORNELL SECTION 01 45 29
Ithaca, New York TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES
FIRE PROTECTION AND FIRE ALARM TESTING LABORATORY 01 45 29-1
FOR OFF-CAMPUS HOUSING PHASE 1 SERVICES March 28, 2013
1.1 GENERAL
A. The Owner will employ and pay for the services of an Independent Testing Laboratory to
perform specified services.
1. Contractor shall cooperate with the laboratory to facilitate the execution of its
required services.
2. Employment of the laboratory shall in no way relieve Contractor's obligations to
perform the Work of the Contract.
B. Testing Laboratory services are specified in connection with work including but not limited
to the following:
1. New York State Building Code, Section 17, Special Inspections
2. Excavating, Filling & Grading..
1.2 QUALIFICATIONS OF LABORATORY
A. Meet "Recommended Requirements for Independent Laboratory Qualification", 1971
edition, published by American Council of Independent Laboratories.
B. Meet basic requirements of ASTM E329-05b, "Standard Specifications for Agencies
Engaged in the Testing and/or Inspection of Materials Used in Construction".
C. Authorized to operate in the State of New York.
D. Testing and inspections shall be performed under the direction of Licensed Professional
Engineer registered in the State of New York who shall be responsible for administering all
testing and inspections and shall certify any local agency requirements.
E. Submit copy of report of inspection of facilities made by Materials Reference Laboratory of
National Bureau of Standards during the most recent tour of inspection, with memorandum
of remedies of any deficiencies reported by the inspection.
F. Testing Equipment:
1. Calibrated at maximum 12 month intervals by devices of accuracy traceable to either:
a. National Bureau of Standards
b. Accepted values of natural physical constants.
2. Submit copy of certificate of calibration made by accredited calibration agency.
FIRE PROTECTION AND FIRE ALARM TESTING LABORATORY 01 45 29-2
FOR OFF-CAMPUS HOUSING PHASE 1 SERVICES March 28, 2013
1.3 LABORATORY DUTIES
A. Cooperate with Owner, Architect and Contractor; provide qualified personnel promptly on
notice.
B. Perform specified inspections, sampling and testing of materials and methods of
construction.
1. Comply with specified standards.
2. Ascertain compliance of materials with requirements of Contract Documents.
C. Promptly notify Owner, Architect and Contractor of observed irregularities or deficiencies
of work or products.
D. Should Laboratory tests of material performed at specified intervals of time indicate that
strengths do not meet Specification requirements, the Inspection Agency and Geotechnical
Engineer shall IMMEDIATELY notify the Owner, Contractor and Architect. The
Architect shall determine whether remedial action is necessary.
E. Promptly submit written report of each test and inspection; one copy each to Architect,
Owner, Contractor, and one copy to Record Documents File. Each report shall include:
1. Date issued.
2. Project title and number.
3. Testing laboratory name, address and telephone number.
4. Name and signature of laboratory inspector.
5. Date and time of sampling or inspection.
6. Record of temperature and weather conditions.
7. Date of test.
8. Identification of product and specification section.
9. Location of sample or test in the Project.
10. Type of inspection or test.
11. Observations on compliance with Contract Documents.
F. Prepare a summary report for each category of inspection certifying that the work has been
inspected and meets the Contract Documents. Specifically list all discrepancies found
which have not yet been repaired or resolved.
G. Perform additional tests as required by Architect or the Owner.
FIRE PROTECTION AND FIRE ALARM TESTING LABORATORY 01 45 29-3
FOR OFF-CAMPUS HOUSING PHASE 1 SERVICES March 28, 2013
1.4 LIMITATIONS OF AUTHORITY OF TESTING LABORATORY
A. Laboratory is not authorized to:
1. Release, revoke, alter or enlarge on requirements of Contract Documents.
2. Approve or accept any portion of the Work.
3. Perform any duties of the Contractor.
1.5 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES
A. Cooperate with laboratory personnel, provide access to Work, and Manufacturer's
operations.
B. Secure and deliver to the laboratory adequate quantities of representative samples
of materials proposed to be used and for which testing is specified.
C. Provide to the laboratory the approved design mixes proposed to be used for
concrete, and other material mixes which require control by the testing laboratory.
D. Furnish copies of Products test reports as required.
E. Furnish incidental labor and facilities:
1. To provide access to Work to be tested.
2. To obtain and handle samples at the Project site or at the source of the product to be
tested.
3. To facilitate inspections and tests.
4. For Laboratory's exclusive use for storage and curing of test samples.
F. Notify laboratory a minimum of 24 hours in advance of operations to allow for
laboratory assignment of personnel and scheduling of tests.
1. When tests or inspections cannot be performed after such notice, reimburse
laboratory for personnel and travel expenses incurred due to Contractor's
responsibility.
G. Make arrangements with laboratory and pay for additional samples and tests required for
Contractor's convenience.
H. Employ and pay for the services of a separate, equally qualified independent testing
laboratory to perform additional inspections, sampling and testing required when initial
tests indicate Work does not comply with Contract Documents.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS – NOT USED
FIRE PROTECTION AND FIRE ALARM TESTING LABORATORY 01 45 29-4
FOR OFF-CAMPUS HOUSING PHASE 1 SERVICES March 28, 2013
PART 3 – EXECUTION – NOT USED
***END OF SECTION 01 45 29***
CORNELL SECTION 01 50 00
Ithaca, New York TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
FIRE PROTECTION AND FIRE ALARM TEMPORARY FACILITIES 01 50 00-1
FOR OFF-CAMPUS HOUSING PHASE 1 AND CONTROLS March 28, 2013
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. The Contractor shall furnish, install and maintain temporary facilities and controls required
by all trades for construction, and remove on completion of Work.
1.2 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES
A. Comply with Federal, State and local codes and safety regulations.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Choice of materials, as suitable for the accomplishment of the intended purpose, is the
Contractor’s option.
B. Materials may be new or used, but must not violate requirements of applicable codes,
standards and specifications.
2.2 TEMPORARY FIRST AID FACILITIES
A. Provide first aid equipment and supplies, with qualified personnel continuously available to
render first aid at the site.
2.3 TEMPORARY FIRE PROTECTION
A. Provide a fire protection and prevention program for employees and personnel at the site.
B. Equipment:
1. Provide and maintain fire extinguishing equipment ready for instant use at all areas of
the Project and at specific areas of critical fire hazard.
2. Hand extinguishers of the types and sizes recommended by the National Board of
Fire Underwriters to control fires from particular hazards.
3. Construction period use of permanent fire protection system.
4. Water hoses connected to an adequate water pressure and supply system to reach
each area or level of construction upon building enclosure or heating of the building.
C. Enforce fire-safety discipline:
1. Store volatile materials in an isolated, protected location.
2. Avoid accumulations of flammable debris and waste in or about the Project.
3. Prohibit smoking in the vicinity of hazardous conditions. Smoking is prohibited in
all Cornell University buildings.
FIRE PROTECTION AND FIRE ALARM TEMPORARY FACILITIES 01 50 00-2
FOR OFF-CAMPUS HOUSING PHASE 1 AND CONTROLS March 28, 2013
4. Closely supervise welding and torch-cutting operations in the vicinity of combustible
materials and volatile conditions.
5. Supervise locations and operations of portable heating units and fuel.
D. Maintain fire extinguishing equipment in working condition, with current inspection
certificate attached to each extinguisher.
E. Welding or burning operations will be conducted under a Hot Work Permit. Where such
work is permitted, the Contractor shall provide an approved fire extinguisher in good
operating condition within easy reach of the operating personnel. In each instance, obtain
prior approval of Cornell University Environmental Health & Safety.
F. Advise Cornell University Environmental Health & Safety of any items affecting Life
Safety, e.g., road blockages, exit closing, etc.
2.4 CONSTRUCTION AIDS
A. Provide construction aids and equipment required to assure safety for personnel and to
facilitate the execution of the Work; Scaffolds, staging, ladders, stairs, ramps, runways,
platforms, railings, hoists, cranes, chutes and other such equipment.
B. When permanent stair framing is in place, provide temporary treads, platforms and railings,
for use by construction personnel.
C. Maintain all equipment in a safe condition.
2.5 TEMPORARY ENCLOSURES
A. Provide temporary weather-tight enclosure of exterior walls as work progresses, as
necessary to provide acceptable working conditions, provide weather protection for interior
materials, allow for effective temporary heating, and to prevent entry of unauthorized
persons.
1. Provide temporary exterior doors with self-closing hardware and padlocks or
locksets.
2. Other enclosures shall be removable as necessary for work and for handling of
materials.
B. Provide temporary enclosures to separate work areas from areas of the existing building
occupied by Owner; to prevent penetration of dust or moisture into occupied areas, to
prevent damage to existing equipment, and to protect Owner's employees and operations
from construction work.
1. Temporary partition and ceiling enclosures: Framing and sheet materials which
comply with structural and fire rating requirements of applicable codes and
standards.
a. Close joints between sheet materials, and seal edges and intersections with
existing surfaces, to prevent penetration of dust or moisture.
FIRE PROTECTION AND FIRE ALARM TEMPORARY FACILITIES 01 50 00-3
FOR OFF-CAMPUS HOUSING PHASE 1 AND CONTROLS March 28, 2013
b. In locations where fire protection is required, paint both sides of partitions and
ceilings with fire-retardant paint as required by local fire regulations.
2.6 TEMPORARY WATER CONTROL
A. The Contractor shall provide, maintain and operate pumps required to keep the Work free
of water at all times.
B. The Contractor shall:
1. Provide, maintain and operate pumps as required to keep all exterior work, free of
water at all times.
2. Dispose of all water with due care and shall not infringe on the rights of others on the
Site, of adjacent property owners and of the public. All cost in connection with the
removal of such water shall be paid by the Contractor.
2.7 TREE, PLANT AND LAWN PROTECTION
A. Preserve and protect existing trees, plants and lawns at the site which are designated to
remain, and those adjacent to the site.
B. Consult with Owner to remove agreed upon tree roots and branches which interfere with
construction.
1. Employ or consult with a Certified Arborist to remove, and to treat cuts.
C. Provide temporary fences to a height of six feet, around each, or around each group of trees
and plants. Provide temporary lawn protection to prevent soil compaction. Reference
Cornell University Design Standards and Details:
http://cds.pdc.cornell.edu/TableOfContents.html
D. Protect root zones of trees, plants and lawn areas:
1. Do not allow vehicular traffic or parking.
2. Do not store materials or products.
3. Prevent dumping of refuse or chemically injurious materials or liquids.
4. Prevent puddling or continuous running water.
E. Carefully supervise excavating, grading and filling, and subsequent construction operations
to prevent damage.
F. Replace, or suitably repair, trees, plants and lawn areas designated to remain which are
damaged or destroyed due to construction operations.
G. Roots 2 inches or larger that are damaged or cut during construction are to be sawed off
close to the tree side of the excavation.
FIRE PROTECTION AND FIRE ALARM TEMPORARY FACILITIES 01 50 00-4
FOR OFF-CAMPUS HOUSING PHASE 1 AND CONTROLS March 28, 2013
H. During the leafing-out period in the spring, extra care should be exercised to reduce
root damage such as keeping exposed roots wet, saturating soil when backfilling
around roots, and backfilling as soon as possible.
I. Trees damaged during construction should be fertilized according to standard tree
maintenance practices.
J. If roots are cut back as a result of construction, proper pruning standards should be
applied to compensate for root loss, while maintaining the natural character of the tree.
2.8 GUARDRAILS AND BARRICADES
A. Provide guardrails, barricades, fences, footways and other devices necessary to protect
personnel and employees at the site, and the public, against hazards on or adjacent to the
construction site.
1. Provide signs, warning lights, signals, flags and illumination as necessary to alert
persons to hazards and to provide safe, adequate visibility in areas of hazards.
2.9 ACCESS ROADS AND PARKING AREAS
A. Provide adequate temporary roads and walks to achieve all-weather access into the site
from public thoroughfares, and within and adjacent to the site as necessary to provide
uninterrupted access to field offices, work and storage areas.
B. Grade and provide drainage facilities to assure runoff of rainwater and to avoid blockage of
flow from adjacent areas.
C. During dry weather wet down temporary unpaved areas when necessary to prevent blowing
dust.
2.10 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION AND SIGNS
A. No signs to be displayed at the project site, unless authorized by the Owner.
2.11 SECURITY
G. The Contractor shall provide security services as required to protect the interests of the
Owner.
2.12 NOT USED
FIRE PROTECTION AND FIRE ALARM TEMPORARY FACILITIES 01 50 00-5
FOR OFF-CAMPUS HOUSING PHASE 1 AND CONTROLS March 28, 2013
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Consult with Owner, review site conditions and factors which affect construction
procedures and temporary facilities, including adjacent properties and public facilities
which may be affected by execution of the work.
1. Designate the locations and extent of temporary construction, storage, and other
temporary facilities and controls required for the expeditious accomplishment of
the Work.
2. Allow space for use of the site by Owner and by other contractors, as required by
Contract Documents.
3.2 GENERAL
A. Comply with applicable requirements specified in sections of Division 2 through 28.
B. Make work structurally, mechanically and electrically sound throughout.
C. Install work in a neat and orderly manner.
D. Maintain, clean, service and repair facilities to provide continuous usage, and to the
quality specified for the original installation.
E. Relocate facilities as required by progress of construction, by storage or work
requirements, and to accommodate requirements of Owner and other contractors
employed at the site.
F. Keep the site, at all times during the progress of the Work, free from accumulation of
waste matter or rubbish and shall confine its apparatus, materials and operations of its
workers to the limits prescribed except as the latter may be extended with the approval
of the Owner’s Representative. Cleaning of the structure or structures must be
performed daily and removal of waste matter or rubbish must be performed at least
once a week. Contractor shall at all times keep access road and public roads clean of
mud and construction debris and maintain dust control in compliance with the Storm
Water Pollution Prevention Plan and to the satisfaction of the Owner.
3.3 REMOVAL
A. Completely remove temporary structures, materials, equipment and services:
1. When construction needs can be met by use of permanent construction.
2. At completion of the Project.
B. Repair damage caused by installation or use of temporary facilities. Clean after removal.
C. Restore existing or permanent facilities used for temporary purposes to specified, or to
original condition.
FIRE PROTECTION AND FIRE ALARM TEMPORARY FACILITIES 01 50 00-6
FOR OFF-CAMPUS HOUSING PHASE 1 AND CONTROLS March 28, 2013
1. Remove foundations and underground installations for temporary construction and
utilities.
2. Grade the areas of the site affected by temporary installations to required elevations
and slopes, and clean the area.
***END OF SECTION 01 50 00***
CORNELL SECTION 01 51 00
Ithaca, New York TEMPORARY UTILITIES
FIRE PROTECTION AND FIRE ALARM TEMPORARY UTILITIES 01 51 00-1
FOR OFF-CAMPUS HOUSING PHASE 1 March 28, 2013
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. The Contractor shall furnish, install and maintain temporary utilities required by all trades
for construction. Remove on completion of Work.
B. The Contractor shall provide all labor and materials for temporary connections and
distribution.
1.2 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES
A. Comply with National Electric Code, 2008 edition.
B. Comply with Federal, State and local codes and safety regulations and with utility company
requirements.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Materials may be new or used, but must be adequate in capacity for the required usage,
must not create unsafe conditions, and must not violate requirements of applicable codes
and standards.
2.2 TEMPORARY ELECTRICITY, LIGHTING AND WATER
A. The Contractor shall have access to the Owner's water and electric power for constructing
the Work. Temporary utility connections shall be made by the Contractor as close to its
operations as possible as long as such connections do not over-load the capacity of the
Owner's utilities or interfere with its customary utilization thereof. Utility access points
shall be determined in cooperation with and acceptable to the Owner.
B. All temporary power systems including wiring shall be removed by the Contractor when no
longer required.
C. The minimum temporary lighting to be provided is at the rate of fifty foot candles, is to be
maintained in each room and changed as required when interior walls are being erected.
The required temporary lighting must be maintained for twenty-four (24) hours a day and
seven (7) days a week at all stair levels and in all corridors below ground; in any and all
egress; in all other spaces temporary lighting is to be maintained only during working
hours. All temporary wiring and equipment shall be in conformity with the National
Electric Code.
D. Except as otherwise provided in the Contract, the Contractor shall submit to the Owner or
the Owner's Representative for approval a proposed schedule of all utility shutdowns and
cutovers of all types which may be required in connection with the Work. Such schedule
shall provide a minimum of four (4) weeks advance notice to the Owner prior to the time of
the proposed shutdown and cutover. The Contractor shall be responsible for all charges
relating to shutdowns.
FIRE PROTECTION AND FIRE ALARM TEMPORARY UTILITIES 01 51 00-2
FOR OFF-CAMPUS HOUSING PHASE 1 March 28, 2013
E. Discontinuance, Changes and Removal
The Contractor shall:
1. Discontinue all temporary services required by the Contract when so directed by the
Owner or the Owner's Representative. The discontinuance of any such temporary
service prior to the completion of the Work shall not render the Owner liable for any
additional cost entailed thereby.
2. Remove and relocate such temporary facilities as directed by the Owner or the
Owner's Representative, and shall restore the Site and the Work to a condition
satisfactory to the Owner.
2.3 NOT USED
2.4 TEMPORARY HEAT AND VENTILATION
A. The Contractor shall furnish temporary heat as may be necessary for constructing the
Work.
B. The Contractor will be permitted to use the building's permanent heating system for
temporary heat. Permission to use the building's permanent heating system shall in no way
constitute the Owner's acceptance of that portion of the Work.
C. When using the permanent building systems for space conditioning, provide a written
maintenance plan for acceptance by the Owner’s Representative, prior to utilizing the
equipment. Plan to address temporary filtering of air and water, sealing of open ducts,
lubrication, operation outside of normal ranges, and controls/safeties. Return all equipment
to its newly installed condition prior to acceptance testing.
D. Any temporary system shall be removed when no longer required.
E. During heating cycles the enclosures separating the interior building areas from outside
shall be maintained closed to conserve heat energy.
F. The Contractor shall provide for ventilation of all structures until Physical Completion of
the Work and shall control such ventilation to avoid excessive moisture levels and rates of
drying of construction materials, including but not limited to concrete and to plaster, and to
prevent condensation on sensitive surfaces. The Contractor shall be responsible for any
moisture intrusion that is detrimental to the Project.
2.5 NOT USED
2.6 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES
A. Provide adequate toilet and washing facilities for the use of personnel and employees;
locate convenient to work stations.
B. Existing plumbing facilities shall not be used by construction personnel.
C. Facilities may be portable chemical-type toilets.
FIRE PROTECTION AND FIRE ALARM TEMPORARY UTILITIES 01 51 00-3
FOR OFF-CAMPUS HOUSING PHASE 1 March 28, 2013
D. Service, clean and maintain facilities and enclosures in a neat, clean and sanitary condition.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 REMOVAL
A. Completely remove temporary materials and equipment when their use is no longer
required.
B. Clean and repair damage caused by temporary installations or use of temporary facilities.
C. Restore existing and permanent facilities used for temporary services to specified, or to
original, condition.
***END OF SECTION 01 51 00***
CORNELL SECTION 01 57 13
Ithaca, New York SOIL EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL
FIRE PROTECTION AND FIRE ALARM SOIL EROSION AND 01 57 13-1
FOR OFF-CAMPUS HOUSING PHASE 1 SEDIMENT CONTROL March 28, 2013
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL
A. The Contractor shall be responsible for preparing and implementing an Erosion and
Sediment Control Plan.
B. This Section describes minimum standards for the prevention and control of erosion
during the construction process and may not be sufficient for all sites. The Contractor
shall remain responsible for the means and methods of preventing erosion and may be
required to employ additional means and methods as required to prevent violations of
local, state, or federal standards.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit an Erosion and Sediment Control Plan, as specified herein.
B. Refer to Section 01 33 00 for general submittal requirements.
1.3 PLAN AND IMPLEMENTATION GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Plan shall comply with design specifications in the New York Guidelines for Urban
Erosion and Sediment Control, NYS Stormwater Management Design Manual,
NYSDEC Technical and Operational Guidance Series, good engineering practices, and
this Section.
B. Erosion and Sediment Control Plan shall be reviewed and approved by the
Environmental Health and Safety Office, and implemented prior to any site work.
C. Maintain Erosion and Sediment Control measures throughout the course of site
construction activities until vegetative growth is established to the Owner’s
satisfaction.
D. At conclusion of the Project, remove all remaining temporary erosion control structures
and properly dispose of accumulated sediment on-site in areas approved by the Owner.
1.4 PERFORMANCE STANDARDS
A. At no time shall construction operations or any related disturbance of the site result in
the impairment of local waterways. “Impairment” is defined by regulations as
including, but not limited to, the following:
1. The release of water into receiving waters that causes a substantial visible contrast
to natural conditions; or
2. The deposition of significant sediment into such waters.
B. Such deficiencies shall be corrected immediately by the Contractor to prevent further
impairment.
FIRE PROTECTION AND FIRE ALARM SOIL EROSION AND 01 57 13-2
FOR OFF-CAMPUS HOUSING PHASE 1 SEDIMENT CONTROL March 28, 2013
C. In addition, and without notice to the Contractor, the Owner shall also have the right,
based on the Owner’s independent assessment, to stop work or engage other
contractor(s) to construct or correct such work as may be necessary to prevent the
impairment of waterways, and to charge all costs related to such corrective or
additional actions against the Contract.
D. Acceptance of an Erosion and Sediment Control plan shall not in any way imply that
the plan will be adequate in preventing impairment of waters, or that maintenance and
modification will not be necessary. Rather, acceptance of the plan authorizes the
Contractor to begin installation of the control measures under the assumption the
appropriate maintenance and modification will be required throughout the life of the
project to meet the project requirements.
E. The Contractor’s responsibilities under this Section shall end upon final completion
and payment of the Work of the entire Contract.
1.5 EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL PLAN COMPONENTS
A. The Erosion and Sediment Control Plan submitted shall specifically address project
measures, features, and areas critical to proper site erosion and sediment control. The
Plan shall specifically include, but are not limited to, the following:
Site Map, to scale;
Measures to prevent stormwater from running onto the disturbed areas of the site;
Inlet protection for storm sewers and catch basins;
Measures to be used for dewatering; and
Measures to be used for soil stabilization, runoff control, and sediment control,
including specific measures for the following:
Site entrance stabilization
Staging areas
Material and soil stock piles
Concrete curing operations
Disturbed areas of the site
In addition to the requirements included in these specifications, specific erosion control
measures shown on the Contract Drawings, if any, shall also be required.
B. All features shall be designed and installed in accordance with the references including
in paragraph 1.3.A of this Section.
C. Keep access roads and public roads clear of mud and construction debris at all times.
Maintain dust control measures throughout construction.
1.6 INSPECTIONS
A. At the sole discretion of the Owner, inspections may be performed by a third party or
on-staff representative of the Owner.
1. The Owner may inspect the site at any time, without prior notification, for
compliance with the Erosion and Sediment Control Plan and applicable local,
state and federal regulations. Any instances of non-compliances or failure to
FIRE PROTECTION AND FIRE ALARM SOIL EROSION AND 01 57 13-3
FOR OFF-CAMPUS HOUSING PHASE 1 SEDIMENT CONTROL March 28, 2013
meet the performance standards found must be resolved within 24 hours, with
more immediate responses as required to mitigate active erosion during storm
events or similar instances.
2. Modify the Erosion and Sediment Control Plan as necessary, to provide full
compliance with the performance standards.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS – NOT USED
PART 3 – EXECUTION – NOT USED
***END OF SECTION 01 57 13*
CORNELL SECTION 01 66 00
Ithaca, New York STORAGE AND PROTECTION
FIRE PROTECTION AND FIRE ALARM STORAGE AND PROTECTION 01 66 00-1
FOR OFF-CAMPUS HOUSING PHASE 1 March 28, 2013
1.1 GENERAL
A. The Contractor shall receive, pile, store and handle all materials, equipment and other items
incorporated or to be incorporated in the Work, including items furnished by the Owner in
a careful and prudent manner and shall protect them against loss or damage from every
source.
B. The Contractor shall be responsible for obscuring from public view, in a manner acceptable
to the Owner, staging and storage areas.
1.2 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING
A. Transport and handle products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions; using means
and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft.
B. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent
overcrowding of construction space.
C. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that
are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other
losses.
D. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original
sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for
handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installation.
E. Promptly inspect shipments to assure that products comply with requirements, quantities
are correct and products are undamaged.
F. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling,
disfigurement or damage.
1.3 STORAGE
A. Materials stored on the Site shall be neatly piled and protected, and shall be stored in a neat
and orderly manner in locations that shall not interfere with the progress of the Work or
with the daily functioning of the Institution.
B. Materials subject to weather damage shall be protected against the weather by floored
weatherproof temporary storage sheds.
C. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity,
ventilation, and weather-protection requirements for storage.
D. Storage piles and sheds shall be located within the area designated as the Staging Area.
The Contractor shall work to insure that the condition of the staging area has no
negative impact on the Campus, visually or otherwise; and that outside of that area, the
Contractor has no impact at all on the Campus.
FIRE PROTECTION AND FIRE ALARM STORAGE AND PROTECTION 01 66 00-2
FOR OFF-CAMPUS HOUSING PHASE 1 March 28, 2013
E. Materials stored within the building shall be distributed in such a manner as to avoid
overloading of the structural frame, and never shall be concentrated in such a manner as to
exceed the equivalent of 50 pounds per square foot uniformly distributed loading. Stored
materials shall be moved if they interfere with the progress of the work.
F. Should it become necessary during the course of the Work to move stored materials or
equipment, the Contractor, at the direction of the Owner or the Owner's Representative,
shall move such materials or equipment.
1.4 PROTECTION
A. The Contractor shall provide security personnel and adopt other security measures as may
be necessary to adequately protect materials and equipment stored at the site. The
Contractor shall be obligated to replace or pay for all materials and equipment including
items furnished by the Owner which have been damaged or stolen prior to completion of
the Work.
B. Protection of Utilities
1. If during the course of the Project, it is necessary to work adjacent to existing
utilities, pipelines, structures and equipment, the Contractor shall take all necessary
precautions to protect existing facilities from damage.
2. Locations of utilities as shown on the Contract Documents are approximate only.
The Contractor shall excavate or otherwise locate to verify existing utilities in
advance of its operation.
C. Protective Covering
1. All finished surfaces shall be protected by the Contractor as follows:
a. Door and window sills and the jambs and soffits of openings used as
passageways or through which material is handled, shall be cased and protected
adequately against possible damage resulting from the conduct of the work of
all trades.
b. All surfaces shall be clean and not marred upon delivery of the building to the
Owner. The Contractor shall, without extra compensation, replace all blocks,
gypsum board, plaster, paint, tile, and all other surfaces, whether or not
protected, which are damaged, and shall refinish (including painting as
specified) to satisfaction of Owner.
c. Tight wood sheathing shall be laid under any materials that are stored on
finished concrete surfaces and planking must be laid before moving any
materials over these finished areas. Wheelbarrows used over such areas shall
have rubber tires on wheels.
d. Contractor has the responsibility for protection of carpeting and all finish
flooring during all phases of the work including after installation.
e. All floors exposed to view as a floor finish shall be protected by overlaying
with plywood in all areas subject to construction traffic within and without the
FIRE PROTECTION AND FIRE ALARM STORAGE AND PROTECTION 01 66 00-3
FOR OFF-CAMPUS HOUSING PHASE 1 March 28, 2013
building, special care shall be taken to protect all stair finish surfaces including
but not limited to flooring, wood in-fill stairs, cabinetry, counters, equipment,
etc.
1.5 PROTECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
A. Protect installed products, including Owner-provided products, and control traffic in
immediate area to prevent damage from subsequent operations.
B. Provide protective coverings at walls, projections, corners, and jambs, sills, and soffits of
openings in and adjacent to traffic areas.
C. Cover walls and floors of elevator cabins, and jambs of cab doors, when elevators are used
by construction personnel.
D. Protect finish floors and stairs from dirt, wear, and damage:
1. Secure heavy sheet goods or similar protective materials in place, in areas subject to
foot traffic.
2. Lay planking or similar rigid materials in place, in areas subject to movement of
heavy objects.
3. Lay planking or similar rigid materials in place, in areas where storage of products
will occur.
E. Protect waterproofed and roofed surfaces:
1. Restrict use of surfaces for traffic of any kind, and for storage of products.
2. When an activity is mandatory, obtain recommendations for protection of surfaces
from manufacturer. Install protection and remove on completion of activity. Restrict
use of adjacent unprotected areas.
F. Restrict traffic of any kind across planted lawn and landscape areas.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS – NOT USED
PART 3 – EXECUTION – NOT USED
***END OF SECTION 01 66 00***
CORNELL SECTION -1 71 23
Ithaca, New York FIELD ENGINEERING
FIRE PROTECTION AND FIRE ALARM FIELD ENGINEERING 01 71 23-1
FOR OFF-CAMPUS HOUSING PHASE 1 March 28, 2013
1.1 GENERAL
A. The Contractor shall provide and pay for field engineering services required for the Project.
1. Survey work required in execution of the Project.
2. Verify grades, lines, levels and dimensions shown on Drawings.
3. Lay out Work from established control points and bench marks.
4. Coordinate the Work of all trades.
5. It may be necessary at times to discontinue portions of Contractor's work in order that
the Owner's Representative may check measurements or surveys without
interruptions or other interferences that might impair the accuracy of the results. At
any time, on request of the Owner's Representative, Contractor shall discontinue its
work to such extent as may be necessary for this purpose and shall cooperate in all
reasonable means to the extent of providing labor, tools, or materials to assist the
Owner's Representative in making measurements and surveys.
6. Notwithstanding anything set forth above, it shall be the sole responsibility of the
Contractor to complete the works within the tolerances of lines and grades as given
on the drawings. No direct payment or claim for additional compensation will be
allowed the Contractor for any work or delay occasioned by the Owner's
Representative establishing or checking lines or grades or making other
measurements, and no extension of time will be allowed for such delays.
B. Owner's Representative will identify existing control points and property line corner stakes
indicated on the drawings, as required.
1.2 QUALIFICATION OF SURVEYOR
A. The Surveyor shall be registered civil engineer or registered land surveyor, licensed in the
state in which the Project is located and acceptable to the Owner.
1.3 SURVEY REFERENCE POINTS
A. Basic horizontal and vertical control points for the Project are those designated on
drawings.
B. Locate and protect control points prior to occupation of the site, and preserve all reference
points during construction.
1. Make no changes or relocations without prior written approval of the Architect and
Owner.
2. Report to Owner when any reference point is lost or destroyed, or requires relocation
because of necessary changes in grades or locations.
FIRE PROTECTION AND FIRE ALARM FIELD ENGINEERING 01 71 23-2
FOR OFF-CAMPUS HOUSING PHASE 1 March 28, 2013
3. Require surveyor to replace reference points which may be lost or destroyed.
a. Establish replacements based on original survey control.
C. The Contractor shall provide and shall maintain axis lines on each floor and shall establish
and shall maintain grade marks 4' 0" above the finished floor on each floor level.
D. The Contractor shall furnish such stakes and other required equipment, tools and materials,
and all labor as may be required in laying out any part of the Work.
1.4 PROJECT SURVEY REQUIREMENTS
A. Prior to start of construction operations, review and verify figures shown on Drawings and
on surveys furnished by Owner.
B. Establish lines and levels, locate and lay out, by instrumentation and similar appropriate
means for site improvements, stakes for grading, fill and topsoil replacement, utility slopes
and invert elevations, batter boards for structures, building foundation, column locations
and floor levels, and controlling lines and levels required for the mechanical and electrical
trades.
C. From time to time, verify layouts by the same methods.
1.5 RECORDS
A. Maintain a complete, accurate log of all control and survey work as it progresses.
1. Make available to Architect and Owner on request: field books, notes, logs and other
data developed in performing survey and control work.
2. Maintain a record plat at field office for the information and use of all parties,
recording reference points, control points and bench marks.
B. On completion of foundation walls and major site improvements, prepare a certified survey
on mylar reproducible showing all dimensions, locations, angles and elevations of
construction and turn over to Owner.
C. When all enclosing walls are complete, certify the location and plumb of the walls.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit written qualifications of surveyor to Architect and Owner prior to starting survey
work.
B. Submit name and address of Professional Engineer to the Architect.
C. Submit documentation to verify accuracy of field engineering work.
FIRE PROTECTION AND FIRE ALARM FIELD ENGINEERING 01 71 23-3
FOR OFF-CAMPUS HOUSING PHASE 1 March 28, 2013
D. Submit certificate signed by registered engineer or registered surveyor certifying that
elevations and improvements are in conformance, or nonconformance, with Contract
Documents.
1. Indicate on record drawings all variations from Contract Drawings.
2. Indicate horizontal locations and elevations of all existing underground utilities
encountered during excavation and construction.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS – NOT USED
PART 3 – EXECUTION – NOT USED
***END OF SECTION 01 71 23***
CORNELL SECTION 01 73 29
Ithaca, New York CUTTING, PATCHING AND REPAIRING
FIRE PROTECTION AND FIRE ALARM CUTTING, PATCHING 01 73 29-1
FOR OFF-CAMPUS HOUSING PHASE 1 AND REPAIRING March 28, 2013
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. The Contractor shall be responsible for all cutting, fitting and patching, including
excavation and backfill, required to complete the Work or to:
1. Make its several parts fit together properly.
2. Uncover portions of the Work to provide for installation of ill-timed work.
3. Remove and replace defective work.
4. Remove and replace work not conforming to requirements of Contract Documents.
5. Remove samples of installed work as specified for testing.
B. Upon written instructions of the Owner’s Representative:
1. Uncover designated portions of Work for Architect's observation of covered work.
2. Remove samples of installed materials for testing beyond that specified.
3. Remove work to provide for the alteration of previously incorrectly installed work.
4. Patch work uncovered or removed.
C. Do not damage or endanger any work by cutting or altering the Work or any part thereof.
D. Do not cut or otherwise alter the work of the Owner except with the written consent of the
Owner’s Representative.
E. Where cutting and patching involves adding reinforcement to structural elements, submit
details and engineering calculations showing integration of reinforcement with the original
structure.
F. Openings and Chases
1. The Contractor shall build openings, including but not limited to channels, chases
and flues as required to complete the Work as set forth in the Contract.
2. After installation and completion of any work for which openings, including but
not limited to channels, chases and flues, have been provided the Contractor shall
build in, over, around and finish all such openings as required to complete the
Work.
3. The Contractor shall furnish and install all sleeves, inserts, hangers and supports
required for the execution of the Work.
FIRE PROTECTION AND FIRE ALARM CUTTING, PATCHING 01 73 29-2
FOR OFF-CAMPUS HOUSING PHASE 1 AND REPAIRING March 28, 2013
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit a written request to the Architect prior to executing any cutting, alteration or
excavation which affects the work of the Owner, or which may affect the structural safety
of any portion of the Project. Include:
1. Identification of the Project.
2. Description of the affected work.
3. The necessity for doing the cutting, alteration or excavation.
4. The effect on the work of the Owner’s property, or on the structural integrity of the
Project.
5. Description of the proposed work:
a. The scope of cutting, patching, alteration, or excavation.
b. Contractor and trades who will execute the work.
c. Products proposed to be used.
d. The extent of refinishing to be done.
6. Alternatives to cutting, patching or excavation.
7. Designation of the responsibility for the cost of cutting and patching.
8. Written permission of any separate contractor whose work will be affected.
B. Should conditions of the work of the schedule indicate a change of products from the
original installation, submit a request for substitution as specified in Section 01 25 00 -
Substitutions and Product Options.
C. Contractor shall submit a written notice to the Architect and the Owner designating the date
and the time the work will be uncovered.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Requirements for Structural Work: Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner
that would change their load-carrying capacity of load-deflection ration.
1. Obtain written approval of the cutting and patching proposal before cutting and
patching the following structural elements:
a. Foundation construction
b. Bearing and retaining walls
c. Structural concrete
d. Structural steel and lintels
e. Structural decking
f. Miscellaneous structural metals
FIRE PROTECTION AND FIRE ALARM CUTTING, PATCHING 01 73 29-3
FOR OFF-CAMPUS HOUSING PHASE 1 AND REPAIRING March 28, 2013
g. Exterior wall assemblies
h. Piping, ductwork, vessels, and equipment
i. Equipment supports
B. Operational Limitations: Do not cut and patch operating elements or related components in
a manner that would result in reducing their capacity to perform as intended. Do not cut
and patch operating elements or related components in a manner that would result in
increased maintenance or decreased operation life or safety.
1. Obtain written approval of the cutting and patching proposal before cutting and
patching the following operating elements or safety related systems:
a. Primary operational systems and equipment
b. Air or smoke barriers
c. Water, moisture, or vapor barriers
d. Membranes and flashings
e. Fire protection systems
f. Control systems
g. Communication systems
h. Electrical wiring systems
i. Operating systems of special construction in MEP work
C. Visual Requirements: Do not cut and patch construction exposed on the exterior or in
occupied spaces in a manner that would, in the Owner’s opinion, reduce the building’s
aesthetic qualities. Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that would result in
visual evidence of cutting and patching. Remove and replace construction which was cut
and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner at no expense to the Owner.
D. Waterproofing and Water Tightness: Do not cut or piece waterproofed walls or floors or
any structural members without written permission of the Owner.
1. Waterproofing and Roofing Membranes
a. Employ qualified contractors to accomplish all required cutting, patching, or
repairing of existing waterproofing and roofing membranes.
b. Before beginning cutting, patching or repairing of existing waterproofing and
roofing membranes, obtain approval of all materials, methods and contractor to
be used from the Owner and agency, or agencies, holding bond or
guarantee/warranty in force for membrane.
2. Water Tightness
a. The Contractor shall be responsible for water tightness of product, materials,
and workmanship, including work specified to be watertight and inferred by
general practice to be watertight.
i. All floors (slabs), walls, roof, glazing, windows, doors, sleeves through
foundation walls, flashings, and similar items shall be watertight.
b. If details or materials shown or specified are felt not satisfactory to produce
water tightness, the Contractor shall inform the Owner’s Representative before
FIRE PROTECTION AND FIRE ALARM CUTTING, PATCHING 01 73 29-4
FOR OFF-CAMPUS HOUSING PHASE 1 AND REPAIRING March 28, 2013
installation and submit proposed substitution or alternative method for review
and approval. The Contractor shall execute approved change and make
watertight at no additional cost to the Owner.
1.5 WARRANTIES
A. Replace, patch, and repair material and surfaces cut or damaged by methods and with
materials in such a manner as not to void any warranties required or existing.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Comply with the Contract Documents for each product involved.
B. Use materials identical to existing materials. For exposed surfaces, use materials that
visually match existing adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible. If identical
materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials whose installed performance will
equal or surpass that of existing materials.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Inspect existing conditions of the Project, including elements subject to damage or to
movement during:
1. Cutting and patching.
2. Excavation and backfilling.
B. After uncovering work, inspect the conditions affecting the installation of products, or
performance of the work.
C. Report unsatisfactory or dubious conditions to the Architect in writing; do not proceed with
the work until the Architect has provided further instructions.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Provide shoring, bracing and other support as necessary to assure the structural safety of
that portion of the Work.
B. Provide devices and methods to protect other portions of the Project from damage.
C. Provide for vertical and lateral support required to protect adjacent buildings and
properties.
D. Provide protection from the elements for that portion of the Project which may be exposed
by cutting and patching work, including but not limited to pumping to maintain excavations
free from water.
FIRE PROTECTION AND FIRE ALARM CUTTING, PATCHING 01 73 29-5
FOR OFF-CAMPUS HOUSING PHASE 1 AND REPAIRING March 28, 2013
E. Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining
areas.
F. Avoid cutting existing pipe, conduit, or ductwork serving the building but scheduled to be
removed or relocated until provisions have been made to bypass them.
3.3 PERFORMANCE
A. General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting
and patching at the earliest feasible time and complete without delay.
1. Cut existing construction to provide for installation of other components or
performance of other construction activities and the subsequent fitting and patching
required to restore surfaces to their original condition.
B. Cutting: Cut existing construction using methods which will assure safety, will be least
likely to damage elements retained or adjoining construction, and will provide proper
surfaces to receive new work.
1. In general, where cutting, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing or
grinding, not hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots as small as possible,
neatly to size required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces.
Temporarily cover openings when not in use.
2. To avoid marring existing finished surfaces, cut or drill from the exposed or finished
side into concealed surfaces.
3. Cut through concrete and masonry using a cutting machine, such as a carbon saw or a
diamond-core drill.
4. Comply with the requirements of applicable MEP work where cutting and patching
of services is required.
C. Patching: Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Comply with
specified tolerances.
1. Where feasible, inspect and test patched areas to demonstrate integrity of the
installation.
2. Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained
adjoining construction in a manner that will eliminate evidence of patching and
refinishing.
a. Where patching occurs in a painted surface, apply primer and intermediate
paint coats over patch and apply final paint coat over entire unbroken surface
containing patch. Provide additional coats until patch blends with adjacent
surfaces.
3. Refinish entire surfaces as necessary to provide an even finish to match adjacent
finishes:
a. For continuous surfaces, refinish to nearest intersection.
FIRE PROTECTION AND FIRE ALARM CUTTING, PATCHING 01 73 29-6
FOR OFF-CAMPUS HOUSING PHASE 1 AND REPAIRING March 28, 2013
b. For an assembly, refinish the entire unit.
4. When patching existing plaster finished walls and partitions, the Contractor shall
utilize plaster trim, lath and other metal components to match the integrity of the
existing system. All plaster finishes shall match existing finishes so as to provide a
uniform visual appearance.
5. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are demolished extend one finished
area into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide
an even surface of uniform finish color, texture, and appearance. Remove existing
floor and wall coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve
uniform color and appearance.
a. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Provide materials
and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections of these
Specifications.
6. Ceilings: Patch, repair, or re-hang existing ceilings as necessary to provide an even-
plane surface of uniform appearance.
D. Repairs: Where repairs to existing surfaces are required, patch to produce surfaces suitable
for new materials.
1 Completely fill holes and depressions in existing masonry walls that are to remain
with an approved masonry patching material applied according to manufacturer's
written recommendations.
E. Execute excavating and backfilling by methods which will assure safety, will prevent
settlement or damage to other work.
F. Execute fitting and adjustment of products to provide a finished installation to comply with
specified products, functions, tolerances and finishes.
G. Restore work which has been cut or removed; install new products to provide completed
work in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents.
H. The Contractor shall replace, repair and patch all surfaces of the ground and of any
structure disturbed by its operations and its Work which surfaces and structures are
intended to remain even if such operations and work are outside the property lines. Such
replacement, repair and patching shall be with like material and shall restore surfaces as
they existed.
FIRE PROTECTION AND FIRE ALARM CUTTING, PATCHING 01 73 29-7
FOR OFF-CAMPUS HOUSING PHASE 1 AND REPAIRING March 28, 2013
3.4 CLEANING
A. Clean area and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Completely remove
paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar items. Thoroughly clean piping, conduit, and similar
features before applying paint or other finishing materials. Restore damaged pipe covering
to its original condition.
***END OF SECTION 01 73 29***
CORNELL SECTION 01 77 00
Ithaca, New York PROJECT CLOSEOUT
FIRE PROTECTION AND FIRE ALARM PROJECT CLOSEOUT 01 77 00-1
FOR OFF-CAMPUS HOUSING PHASE 1 March 28, 2013
1.1 INSPECTIONS
A. When the Work has reached such a point of completion that the building or buildings,
equipment and apparatus can be occupied and used for the purpose intended, the Owner's
Representative shall make a detailed inspection of the Work to insure that all requirements
of the Contract have been met and that the Work is complete and is acceptable.
B. A copy of the report of the inspection shall be furnished to the Contractor as the inspection
progresses so that the Contractor may proceed without delay with any part of the Work
found to be incomplete or defective.
C. When the items appearing on the report of inspection have been completed or corrected, the
Contractor shall so advise the Owner's Representative. After receipt of this notification, the
Owner's Representative shall inform the Contractor of the date and time of final inspection.
A copy of the report of the final inspection containing all remaining contract exceptions,
omissions and incomplete work shall be furnished to the Contractor.
D. After receipt of notification of completion and all remaining contract exceptions, omissions
and incomplete work from the Contractor, the Owner's Representative shall make an
inspection to verify completion of the exception items appearing on the report of final
inspection.
1.2 FINAL CLEAN UP
A. Upon completion of the work covered by the Contract the Contractor shall leave the
completed Project ready for use and occupancy without the need of further cleaning of any
kind and with all Work in new condition and in perfect order. In addition, upon completion
of all Work the Contractor shall remove from the vicinity of the Work all plant, buildings,
rubbish, unused materials, concrete forms and other materials belonging to him or used
under its direction during construction or impairing the use or appearance of the property
and shall restore such areas affected by the work to their original condition, and, in the
event of its failure to do so, the same shall be removed by the Owner at the expense of the
Contractor, and the Contractor and/or its surety shall be liable therefore. Final clean-up
shall include but not be limited to the following:
1. All finished surfaces shall be swept, dusted, washed and polished. This includes
cleaning of the Work of all finishing trades where needed, whether or not cleaning by
such trades is included in their respective sections of the specifications.
2. Roofs, utility tunnels, manholes and pipe trenches and spaces between the new and
existing Work shall be left thoroughly cleaned.
3. Finished flooring shall be thoroughly cleaned in accordance with the manufacturer’s
recommendations.
4. Where the finish of floors has been marred or damaged in any space or area, the
entire floor of that space or area shall be refinished as recommended by the
manufacturers of the flooring.
5. All equipment shall be in an undamaged, bright, clean, polished and new appearing
condition.
FIRE PROTECTION AND FIRE ALARM PROJECT CLOSEOUT 01 77 00-2
FOR OFF-CAMPUS HOUSING PHASE 1 March 28, 2013
6. All new glass shall be washed and polished, both sides. The Contractor shall be
responsible for all breakage of glass in the area of the Work from the commencement
of its activities until the building is turned over to Owner. The Contractor shall
replace all broken glass and deliver the entire building with all glazing intact and
clean.
7. Provide new filters for all fan convectors after final cleaning.
8. Refer to exterior clean up. Remove paint and glazing compound from surfaces.
1.3 MAINTENANCE STOCK
A. Turn over to Owner's Representative the maintenance stock specified. Contractor shall
obtain signed receipt from Owner's Representative for all maintenance stock.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS – NOT USED
PART 3 – EXECUTION – NOT USED
**END OF SECTION 01 77 00***
CORNELL SECTION 01 78 23
Ithaca, New York OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA
FIRE PROTECTION AND FIRE ALARM OPERATING AND 01 78 23-1
FOR OFF-CAMPUS HOUSING PHASE 1 MAINTENANCE DATA March 28, 2013
1.1 GENERAL
A. The Contractor shall compile product data and related information appropriate for Owner's
maintenance and operation of products furnished under the Contract.
1. Prepare operating and maintenance data as specified in this Section, as referenced in
other pertinent sections of Specifications and as necessary to operate the completed
work.
2. Operations and maintenance data shall be available to the Owner at time of
substantial completion.
B. Instruct Owner's personnel in the maintenance of products and in the operation of
equipment and systems.
1.2 FORM OF SUBMITTALS
A. Prepare data in the form of an instructional manual and CD for use by Owner's personnel.
B. Format:
1. Size: 8-1/2" x 11" and a CD with electronic files.
2. Text: Manufacturer's printed data, scanned .pdf and/or neatly typewritten Word file.
3. Drawings:
a. Drawings are required in both hard copy and electronic format.
b. Provide reinforced punched binder tab, bind in with text.
c. Fold larger drawings to the size of the text pages.
4. Provide fly-leaf for each separate product, and major component parts of equipment.
a. Provide type description of product, and major component parts of
equipment.
b. Provide indexed thumb tab.
5. Cover: Identify each volume with typed or printed title "OPERATIONS AND
MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS".
List:
a. Title of Project
b. Identity of separate structure as applicable.
c. Identity of general subject matter covered in the manual.
C. Binders:
FIRE PROTECTION AND FIRE ALARM OPERATING AND 01 78 23-2
FOR OFF-CAMPUS HOUSING PHASE 1 MAINTENANCE DATA March 28, 2013
1. Commercial quality three-ring binders with durable and cleanable plastic covers.
2. When multiple binders are used, correlate the data into related consistent groupings.
1.3 CONTENT OF MANUAL
A. Neatly typewritten table of contents for each volume, arranged in a systematic order.
1. Contractor, name of responsible principal, address and telephone number.
2. A list of each product required to be included, indexed to the content of the volume.
3. List, with each product, the name, address and telephone number of:
a. Subcontract or installer.
b. Maintenance contractor, as appropriate.
c. Identify the area of responsibility of each.
d. Local source of supply for parts and replacement.
4. Identify each product by product name and other identifying symbols as set forth in
Contract Documents.
B. Product Data:
1. Include only those sheets which are pertinent to the specific product.
2. Annotate each sheet to:
a. Clearly identify the specific product or part installed.
b. Clearly identify the data applicable to the installation.
c. Delete reference to inapplicable information.
C. Drawings:
1. Supplement product data with drawings as necessary to clearly illustrate:
a. Relations of component parts of equipment and systems.
b. Control and flow diagrams.
2. Coordinate drawings with information on Record Documents to assure correct
illustration of completed installation.
3. Do not use Record Documents as maintenance drawings.
D. Written text, as required to supplement product data for the particular installation:
FIRE PROTECTION AND FIRE ALARM OPERATING AND 01 78 23-3
FOR OFF-CAMPUS HOUSING PHASE 1 MAINTENANCE DATA March 28, 2013
1. Organize in a consistent format under separate headings for different procedures.
2. Provide a logical sequence of instructions for each procedure.
E. Original copy of each warranty, bond and service contract issued.
1. Provide information sheet for Owner's personnel, give:
a. Proper procedures in the event of failure.
b. Instances which might affect the validity of warranties or bonds.
1.4 MANUAL FOR MATERIALS AND FINISHES
A. Submit a CD with electronic files and six (6) copies of complete manual in final form.
B. Content, for architectural products, applied materials and finishes:
1. Manufacturer's data, giving full information on products:
a. Catalog number, size, and composition.
b. Color and texture designations.
c. Information required for reordering special-manufactured products.
2. Instructions for care and maintenance:
a. Manufacturer's recommendation for types of cleaning agents and methods.
b. Cautions against cleaning agents and methods which are detrimental to the
product.
c. Recommended schedule for cleaning and maintenance.
C. Content, for moisture-protection and weather-exposed products:
1. Manufacturer's data, giving full information on products.
a. Applicable standards
b. Chemical composition
c. Details of installation
2. Instructions for inspection, maintenance, and repair.
D. Additional requirements for maintenance data: The respective sections of Specifications.
1.5 MANUAL FOR EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS
FIRE PROTECTION AND FIRE ALARM OPERATING AND 01 78 23-4
FOR OFF-CAMPUS HOUSING PHASE 1 MAINTENANCE DATA March 28, 2013
A. Submit a CD with electronic files and six (6) copies of complete manual in final form.
B. Content, for each unit of equipment and system, as appropriate:
1. Description of unit and component parts.
a. Function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions.
b. Performance curves, engineering data and tests.
c. Complete nomenclature and commercial number of all replaceable parts.
2. Operating procedures:
a. Start-up, break-in, routine and normal operating instructions.
b. Regulation, control, stopping, shut-down and emergency instructions.
c. Summer and winter operating instructions.
d. Special operating instructions.
3. Maintenance Procedures:
a. Routine operations.
b. Guide to "trouble-shooting".
c. Disassembly, repair and reassembly.
d. Alignment, adjusting and checking.
4. Servicing and lubrication required:
a. List of lubricants required.
5. Manufacturer's printed operating and maintenance instructions.
6. Description of sequence of operation by control manufacturer.
7. Original manufacturer's parts list, illustrations, assembly drawings and diagrams
required for maintenance
a. Predicted life of parts subject to wear.
b. Items recommended to be stocked as spare parts.
8. As-installed control diagrams by controls manufacturer.
9. Each contractor's coordination drawings.
a. As-installed color coded piping diagrams.
FIRE PROTECTION AND FIRE ALARM OPERATING AND 01 78 23-5
FOR OFF-CAMPUS HOUSING PHASE 1 MAINTENANCE DATA March 28, 2013
10. Charts of valve tag numbers, with the location and function of each valve.
11. List of original manufacturer's spare parts, manufacturer's current prices, and
recommended quantities to be maintained in storage.
12. Other data as required under pertinent sections of Specifications.
C. Content, for each electric and electronic system, as appropriate:
1. Description of system and component parts:
a. Function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions.
b. Performance curves, engineering data and tests.
c. Complete nomenclature and commercial number of replaceable parts.
2. Circuit directories of panelboards:
a. Electrical service.
b. Controls.
c. Communications.
3. As-installed color coded wiring diagrams.
4. Operating procedures:
a. Routine and normal operating instructions.
b. Sequences required.
c. Special operating instructions.
5. Maintenance procedures:
a. Routine operations.
b. Guide to "trouble-shooting".
c. Disassembly, repair and reassembly.
d. Adjustment and checking.
6. Manufacturer's printed operating and maintenance instructions.
7. List of original manufacturer's spare parts, manufacturer's current prices, and
recommended quantities to be maintained in storage.
8. Other data as required under pertinent sections of Specifications.
FIRE PROTECTION AND FIRE ALARM OPERATING AND 01 78 23-6
FOR OFF-CAMPUS HOUSING PHASE 1 MAINTENANCE DATA March 28, 2013
D. Additional requirements for operations and maintenance data: See the respective sections
of Specifications and General Conditions.
1.6 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE
A. Submit two (2) copies of preliminary draft of proposed formats and outlines of contents
sixty (60) calendar days prior to acceptance.
1. Architect will review draft and return one copy (1) with comments.
B. Submit one copy (1) of completed data in final form twenty (20) calendar days prior to
final acceptance.
1. Copy will be returned with comments.
C. Submit specified number of copies of approved data in final form prior to final acceptance.
1.7 INSTRUCTIONS OF OWNER'S PERSONNEL
A. Prior to final inspections or acceptance, fully instruct Owner's designated operating and
maintenance personnel in the operation, adjustment and maintenance of all products,
equipment and systems:
1. Instruction time shall be sufficient to fully instruct all shifts of the Owner's operating
and maintenance personnel.
B. Operations and maintenance shall constitute the basis of instruction:
1. Review contents of manual with personnel in full detail to explain all aspects of
operations and maintenance.
C. Submit typewritten statement, signed by each of Owner's Representatives who have been
instructed, describing:
1. Method of Instruction.
2. Equipment and Systems Operated.
3. Length of Instruction Period.
D. Contractor is fully responsible until final acceptance, even though operated by Owner's
personnel, unless otherwise agreed in writing.
FIRE PROTECTION AND FIRE ALARM OPERATING AND 01 78 23-7
FOR OFF-CAMPUS HOUSING PHASE 1 MAINTENANCE DATA March 28, 2013
1.8 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
A. List under clear plastic (1/8" thick) all operating, maintenance and starting precautions and
procedures to be followed by Owner for operating all systems and equipment.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS – NOT USED
PART 3 – EXECUTION – NOT USED
***END OF SECTION 01 78 23***
CORNELL SECTION 01 78 36
Ithaca, New York WARRANTIES AND BONDS
FIRE PROTECTION AND FIRE ALARM WARRANTIES AND BONDS 01 78 36-1
FOR OFF-CAMPUS HOUSING PHASE 1 March 28, 2013
1.1 GENERAL
The Contractor shall:
A. Compile specified warranties and bonds.
B. Compile specified service and maintenance contracts.
C. Co-execute submittals when so specified.
D. Review submittals to verify compliance with Contract Documents.
E. Submit to Architect for transmittal to Owner.
1.2 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Assemble warranties, bonds and service and maintenance contracts, executed by each of the
respective manufacturers, suppliers and subcontractors.
B. Number of original copies required: Two (2) each.
C. Table of Contents: Neatly typed, in orderly sequence. Provide complete information for
each item.
1. Product or work item.
2. Firm, with name of principal, address and telephone number.
3. Scope.
4. Date of beginning of warranty, bond or service and maintenance contract.
5. Duration.
6. Provide information for Owner's personnel:
a. Proper procedure in case of failure.
b. Instances which might affect the validity of warranty or bond.
7. Contractor, name of responsible principal, address and telephone number.
1.3 FORM OF SUBMITTALS
A. Prepare in duplicate packets.
B. Format:
1. Size 8-1/2 in. x 11 in., punch sheets for 3-ring binder.
a. Fold larger sheets to fit binders.
FIRE PROTECTION AND FIRE ALARM WARRANTIES AND BONDS 01 78 36-2
FOR OFF-CAMPUS HOUSING PHASE 1 March 28, 2013
2. Cover: Identify each packet with typed or printed title "WARRANTIES AND
BONDS". List:
a. Title of Project
b. Name of Contractor
C. Binders: Commercial quality, three-ring, with durable and cleanable plastic covers.
1.4 TIME OF SUBMITTALS
A. Make final submittals within ten (10) days after Date of Substantial Completion, prior to
final request for payment.
B. For items of work when acceptance is delayed materially beyond the Date of Substantial
Completion, provide updated submittal within ten days after acceptance, listing the date of
acceptance as the start of the warranty period.
1.5 SUBMITTALS REQUIRED
A. Submit warranties, bonds, and service and maintenance contracts as specified in the
respective sections of Specifications.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS – NOT USED
PART 3 – EXECUTION – NOT USED
***END OF SECTION 01 78 36***
CORNELL SECTION 01 78 39
Ithaca, New York RECORD DOCUMENTS
FIRE PROTECTION AND FIRE ALARM RECORD DOCUMENTS 01 78 39-1
FOR OFF-CAMPUS HOUSING PHASE 1 March 28, 2013
1.1 GENERAL
A. The Contractor shall maintain at the site, during construction, one record copy of:
1. Drawings
2. Specifications
3. Addenda
4. Change Orders and other Modifications to the Contract
5. Architect's Field Orders or written instructions.
6. Final Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples
7. Field Test records
8. Construction photographs
1.2 MAINTENANCE OF DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES
A. Store documents and samples in Contractor's field office apart from documents used for
construction.
1. Provide files and racks for storage of documents.
2. Provide cabinet or storage space for storage of samples.
B. File documents and samples in accordance with Data Filing Format of the Uniform
Construction Index.
C. Maintain documents in a clean, dry, legible condition and in good order. Do not use record
documents for construction purposes.
D. Make documents and samples available at all times for review by the Owner’s
Representative and the Architect.
1.3 RECORDING
A. Label each document "PROJECT RECORD" in neat large printed letters.
B. Record information concurrently with construction progress.
1. Do not conceal any work until required information is recorded.
FIRE PROTECTION AND FIRE ALARM RECORD DOCUMENTS 01 78 39-2
FOR OFF-CAMPUS HOUSING PHASE 1 March 28, 2013
C. Drawings
Record drawings shall consist of making any changes neatly and clearly on the Contract
Drawings using colored ink or pencil, and the construction record drawings shall be kept
current on a day-to-day basis in concert with the progress of the work. Where applicable,
the change marked on a drawing is to carry the notation “per Change Order No. X”, or
similar reference which cites the reason for the change. The day-to-day construction record
drawings shall be made available to the Architect or Owner’s Representative for review
upon request. The "Record" drawings shall show the following information:
1. all significant changes in plan, sections, elevations and details, such as shifts in
location of walls, doors, windows, stairs and the like made during construction;
2. all significant changes in foundations, columns, beams, openings, concrete
reinforcing, lintels, concealed anchorages and "knock-out" panels made during
construction;
3. final location of electric signal system panels, final arrangement of all circuits and
any significant changes made in electrical signal system design as a result of Change
Order or job conditions;
4. final location and arrangement of all mechanical equipment and concealed gas,
sprinkler, domestic, sanitary and drainage systems piping and other plumbing,
including, but not limited to, supply and circulating mains, principal valves, meters,
clean-outs, drains, pumps and controls, vent stacks, sanitary and storm water
drainage; and
5. final location and arrangement of all underground utilities, connections to building
and/or rerouting of existing utilities, including, but not limited to, sanitary, storm,
heating, electric, signal, gas, water and telephone..
6. Final topographic contours of finished earth surfaces, finished grades, streets, etc.
7. Additions to project, elimination of project components, relocation of components.
D. Specifications and Addenda
Legibly mark each section to record:
1. Manufacturer, trade name, catalog number, and Supplier of each product and item of
equipment actually installed.
2. Changes made by Field Order or by Change Order.
FIRE PROTECTION AND FIRE ALARM RECORD DOCUMENTS 01 78 39-3
FOR OFF-CAMPUS HOUSING PHASE 1 March 28, 2013
1.4 SUBMITTAL
A. At Contract close-out, deliver all record documents to the Owner’s Representative.
B. Accompany submittal with transmittal letter in duplicate, containing:
1. Date
2. Project title and number
3. Contractor's name and address
4. Title and number of each record document
5. Certification that each document is complete and accurate
6. Signature of Contractor or its authorized representative.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS – NOT USED
PART 3 – EXECUTION – NOT USED
***END OF SECTION 01 78 39***
CORNELL UNIVERSITY BDA #12127
Fire Protection and Fire Alarm
For Off-Campus Housing – Phase I
TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIVISION 02 - EXISTING CONDITIONS
LIMITED ASBESTOS SURVEY REPORT
02 83 04 HANDLING OF LEAD-CONTAINING MATERIALS
DIVISION 21 – FIRE SUPPRESSION
21 05 17 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING
21 05 18 ESCUTCHEONS FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING
21 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
21 11 00 FACILITY FIRE-SUPPRESSION WATER-SERVICE PIPING
21 13 13 WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
DIVISION 28 – ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY
28 05 13 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY
28 05 28 PATHWAYS FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY
28 31 11 DIGIAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM AND MASS NOTIFICATION SYSTEM
END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS
5789 Widewaters Parkway
Dewitt, New York 13214
Phone: 315-472-6980
Fax: 315-472-3523
E-mail: bda@beardsley.com
www.beardsley.com
Richard C. Elliott, P.E., LEED® AP
Carmen J. Lapine, P.E.
Steven F. Moolin, R.A., LEED® AP
Mark A. Rebich, P.E., LEED® AP
Barry Halperin, RA
LIMITED ASBESTOS SURVEY REPORT
FOR
Cornell University
Off-Campus Housing
618-620, 636, and 638 Stewart Avenue
Ithaca, New York
BDA Project #12127
March 22, 2013
Prepared For:
Cornell University
Facility Services
Ithaca, New York
TABLE OF CONTENTS
F:\projects\12127\REPORTS\HazMat\RPT_Cornell_OffCampus_StewartAve_Asbestos_Survey_InProcess.doc
Section Page
EXECUTIVE SUMMARY ............................................................................................................. 1
1.0 INTRODUCTION ........................................................................................................... 2
1.1 Purpose .................................................................................................................... 2
1.2 Limitations ................................................................................................................ 2
2.0 ASBESTOS SURVEY ........................................................................................................ 2
2.1 Purpose .................................................................................................................... 2
2.2 Classification ............................................................................................................. 2
2.3 Field Sampling ............................................................................................................ 2
2.4 Conclusions ............................................................................................................... 5
3.0 DISCLAIMER................................................................................................................ 5
4.0 RECOMMENDATIONS .................................................................................................... 6
4.1 Asbestos Abatement .................................................................................................... 6
4.2 Suspicious Material ..................................................................................................... 6
FIGURES
1. 618-620 Stewart Avenue – Basement Sample Location Sketch
2. 618-620 Stewart Avenue – First Floor Sample Location Sketch
3. 618-620 Stewart Avenue – Second Floor Sample Location Sketch
4. 618-620 Stewart Avenue – Third Floor Sample Location Sketch
5. 636 Stewart Avenue – Basement Sample Location Sketch
6. 636 Stewart Avenue – First Floor Sample Location Sketch
7. 636 Stewart Avenue – Second Floor Sample Location Sketch
8. 636 Stewart Avenue – Third Floor Sample Location Sketch
9. 638 Stewart Avenue – Basement Sample Location Sketch
10. 638 Stewart Avenue – First Floor Sample Location Sketch
11. 638 Stewart Avenue – Second Floor Sample Location Sketch
12. 638 Stewart Avenue – Third Floor Sample Location Sketch
ATTACHMENTS
A. Asbestos Analysis Reports
B. Resumes and Certifications of Key Individuals
Limited Asbestos Survey
March 22, 2013
Page 1
EXECUTIVE SUMMARY
Beardsley Design Associates (BDA) has conducted a Limited Asbestos Survey at 618-620, 636, and 638 Stewart
Avenue located in Ithaca, New York.
Purpose:
A Limited Asbestos Survey was conducted to identify asbestos-containing materials prior to a planned fire
protection and fire alarm project.
Findings:
· Trace asbestos-containing spackling compound was identified at 638 Stewart Avenue during the limited
survey.
Recommendations:
· Trace asbestos-containing spackling compound must be handled in accordance with all applicable
regulations. See Section 4.1.
Limited Asbestos Survey
March 22, 2013
Page 2
1.0 INTRODUCTION
1.1 Purpose
BDA conducted a Limited Asbestos Survey at the following Cornell University Off-Campus Housing properties:
618-620, 636, and 638 Stewart Avenue located in Ithaca, New York. The scope of the Limited Asbestos Survey
was limited to areas affected by the planned fire protection and fire alarm project.
1.2 Limitations
The survey was further limited as follows:
1. No destructive sampling through building walls or ceilings (i.e. mastic behind adhered ceiling tiles) was
conducted to limit destruction of finished materials.
2. A few closets were locked or inaccessible during the survey:
· 636 Stewart Avenue Unit TNW, 1N, and 2NE.
· 638 Stewart Avenue Unit C.
2.0 ASBESTOS SURVEY
2.1 Purpose
The purpose of the asbestos survey was to determine whether or not the building or structure, or portion(s)
thereof to be demolished, renovated, remodeled, or have repair work, contains asbestos-containing material
(ACM). Refer to Section 1.2 Limitations. The survey was conducted in accordance with New York State
Department of Labor (NYSDOL) Industrial Code Rule 56.
2.2 Classification
Asbestos-containing material (ACM) is defined by the United States Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) as a
material containing greater than 1% asbestos by weight. The Occupational Safety and Health Administration
(OSHA) defines ACM as a material containing any detectable concentration of asbestos.
2.3 Field Sampling
The survey, conducted on February 13 and March 18, 2013, consisted of bulk sampling and analysis of exposed
suspect ACMs observed on the interior of the buildings in areas affected by the planned project. A total of 134
bulk samples of suspect ACM were collected from the project area. In general, the types of materials sampled
consisted of:
Limited Asbestos Survey
March 22, 2013
Page 3
618-620 STEWART AVENUE - SAMPLED MATERIALS
Finishes Homogeneous Material Sample Locations
No.* Material
Walls/Ceilings
1 Plaster skim and base
coat
Various locations throughout the building. See chain of
custody.
2 Gypsum wall board First floor common area closet and Unit H closet wall.
3 Spackling compound First floor common area closet and Unit C bedroom
closet wall.
4 Gypsum wall board Boiler room wall.
5
Ceiling tile #1
(Smooth texture with
pin holes)
Unit H living room ceiling and Unit C bedroom ceiling.
6 Ceiling tile #2
(Smooth 1’x1’)
Unit H kitchen ceiling.
7
Ceiling tile #3
(Pin hole with worm
tracks)
Unit H bedroom ceiling.
8 Ceiling tile #4
(smooth/no texture)
Unit H entry ceiling.
9
Ceiling tile #5
(Pin hole with small
worm track)
Unit A bathroom ceiling.
10 Ceiling tile #6
(Fine smooth texture)
Unit G living room ceiling.
11 Stucco Exterior wall.
*Homogeneous material number corresponds to the first number in the Sample ID on the Chain of Custody
636 STEWART AVENUE - SAMPLED MATERIALS
Finishes Homogeneous Material Sample Locations
No.* Material
Walls/Ceilings
1 Plaster skim and base
coat
Various locations throughout the building. See chain of
custody.
2 Gypsum wallboard First floor stairs.
3 Gypsum wallboard #2 Boiler room wall.
4
Spackling compound
#1
Unit 3W bedroom wall and Unit 2SE bedroom closet.
5 Spackling compound
#2
Boiler room walls.
6 Ceiling tile #1
(Smooth 1’x1’)
Unit 3E bedroom ceiling.
Limited Asbestos Survey
March 22, 2013
Page 4
636 STEWART AVENUE - SAMPLED MATERIALS
Finishes Homogeneous Material Sample Locations
Walls/Ceilings
No.* Material
7
Ceiling tile #2
(1’x1’ with seams)
Unit 2SE kitchen ceiling.
8
Ceiling tile #4
(Pin hole with small
worm track)
Unit 2NE bathroom ceiling.
9 Ceiling tile #5
(smooth texture)
Unit 2NE bathroom ceiling.
10 Ceiling tile #6
(Rough texture)
Unit TSE living room ceiling.
11
Ceiling tile #6
(Smooth texture with
worm tracks)
Unit 1S bedroom #1.
12 Textured plaster Unit 1S bedroom #2 wall.
13 Stucco Exterior wall.
Flooring 14 Brown mastic Second floor stair landing under carpet backing.
*Homogeneous material number corresponds to the first number in the Sample ID on the Chain of Custody
638 STEWART AVENUE - SAMPLED MATERIALS
Finishes Homogeneous Material Sample Locations
No.* Material
Walls/Ceilings
1 Gypsum wallboard Laundry room wall.
2 Spackling compound Laundry room wall and Unit F entry wall.
3 Gypsum wallboard #2 Boiler room wall.
4
Plaster skim and base
coat
Various locations throughout the building. See chain of
custody.
5 Plaster backing Second floor closet behind plaster wall.
6 Ceiling tile
(Smooth 1’x1’)
Unit E kitchen ceiling.
7
Ceiling tile #1
(Pin hole with worm
tracks)
Unit D bedroom ceiling.
8
Ceiling tile #2
(Textured with worm
track)
Unit D bedroom ceiling.
9 Ceiling tile #5
rough texture)
Unit A bathroom ceiling.
10 Ceiling tile #6
(smooth texture)
Unit A bathroom ceiling.
11 Stucco Exterior wall.
Limited Asbestos Survey
March 22, 2013
Page 5
*Homogeneous material number corresponds to the first number in the Sample ID on the Chain of Custody
See Figures 1-12 for sample locations.
2.4 Conclusions
EMSL Analytical, Inc., a New York State Department of Health (NYSDOH) ELAP-accredited testing laboratory,
conducted the laboratory analyses. Samples of friable materials were analyzed by the polarized light
microscopy (PLM) method. Samples of non-friable organically-bound (NOB) materials were analyzed by both
the PLM and transmission electron microscopy (TEM) methods. Following a review of the asbestos laboratory
analyses, materials containing greater than 1% asbestos by weight were classified as ACM, and those materials
containing less than or equal to 1% asbestos by weight were classified as trace-ACM. The following table
summarizes the analytical results for material samples found to contain asbestos:
SUMMARY OF ANALYTICAL RESULTS
Sample # Sample Location Homogenous Material Analysis
Method Asbestos Content
2-638-2 638 Stewart Ave- Unit F entry Spackling compound PLM <1% Chrysotile
2-638-4 638 Stewart Ave- Unit F entry Spackling compound PLM <1% Chrysotile
All other sampled materials did not contain asbestos. A copy of the laboratory analytical report is provided in
Attachment A.
ACMs affected by the planned fire protection and fire alarm project by material type are summarized below:
SUMMARY OF ASBESTOS-CONTAINING MATERIALS
Material Location Approximate Quantity1. Condition
Spackling compound 638 Stewart Avenue: Walls and
ceilings located throughout the
building.
N/A Good
Notes:
1. Approximate quantity is provided for only materials that require abatement.
3.0 DISCLAIMER
· BDA assumes no responsibility, liability, or risk for the use of this report for any purpose other than as a
Limited Asbestos Survey. A Limited Asbestos Survey in not intended to be used as an abatement design
document. Furthermore, due to the potential for concealed asbestos-containing materials, this report
should not be construed to represent all suspect asbestos-containing materials present at the site, and
all quantities of asbestos-containing materials identified in this report are approximate and shall be
verified on-site.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY BDA #12127
Fire Protection and Fire Alarm
For Off-Campus Housing – Phase I
HANDLING OF LEAD CONTAINING MATERIALS 02 83 04 - 1
SECTION 02 83 04
HANDLING OF LEAD CONTAINING MATERIALS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies the requirements for the detection and prevention of lead
dust, paint chips, or debris contamination of lead dust control work areas and
areas adjacent to them, protection of workers, post-work cleaning, predisposal
testing and appropriate disposal of removed material.
B. All paints within the work area are assumed to contain lead at concentrations
above the HUD/EPA action level.
1.2 INFORMATION AVAILABLE TO THE CONTRACTOR
A. The subject buildings are considered “target housing” as defined by EPA/HUD.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. New York State Department of Environmental Conservation (DEC) 6NYCRR:
1. Part 360 Solid Waste Management Facilities.
2. Part 364 Waste Transporter Permits.
3. Part 370 Hazardous Waste Management System-General.
4. Part 371 Identification and Listing of Hazardous Wastes.
5. Part 372 Hazardous Waste Manifest System and Related Standards for
Generators, Transporters and Facilities.
6 Part 373 Hazardous Waste Management Facilities.
B. New York State Department of Transportation (DOT): Follow all regulations of
49 CFR Part 100 through 199.
C. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA):
1. 29 CFR 1910-General Industry Standards
2. 29 CFR 1910.1025-Lead Standard for General Industry
3. 29 CFR 1926-Construction Industry Standards
4. 29 CFR 1926.62-Construction Industry Lead Standard
D. United States Department of Housing and Urban Development (HUD):
1. Guidelines for the Evaluation and Control of Lead-Based Paint Hazards
in Housing
E. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA):
1. Resource Conservation and Recovery Act (RCRA) Section 3004
Hazardous and Solid Waste Amendments.
2. Toxicity Characteristics Leaching Procedure EPA Method 1311.
3. 40 CFR Part 261-Identification and Listing of Hazardous Waste
4. 40 CFR Part 745-Lead-Based Paint Poison Prevention in Certain
Residential Structures
CORNELL UNIVERSITY BDA #12127
Fire Protection and Fire Alarm
For Off-Campus Housing – Phase I
HANDLING OF LEAD CONTAINING MATERIALS 02 83 04 - 2
1.4 DEFINITIONS
A. Authorized Personnel: Facility or the Director’s Representative, and all other
personnel who are authorized officials of any regulating agency, be it State,
Local, Federal or Private entity who possess legal authority for enforcement or
inspection of the work.
B. Containment: The enclosure within the building which establishes a
contaminated area and surrounds the location where lead handling is taking
place and establishes a Lead Control Work Area.
C. Floor Surface Clearance Criteria: Shall be determined and established by an
independent testing lab hired by the Owner’s Representative, conforming to all
standards set forth by all authorities having jurisdiction, mentioned in the
references, and issue the certification of cleaning. At a minimum no single post
work lead wipe sample test values shall have reading levels greater than the
levels established by pre-work wipe sampling test values, or greater than 40
mg/ft2. Record levels in mg/ft2.
D. Fixed Object: Mechanical equipment, electrical equipment, fire detection
systems, alarms, and all other fixed equipment, furniture, fixtures or other
items which cannot be removed from the work area.
E. HEPA: High Efficiency Particulate Absolute filtration efficiency of 99.97 percent
down to 0.3 microns. Filtration provided on specialized vacuums and air
filtration devices to trap particles.
F. Lead Based Paint (LBP): Paints or other surface coatings that contain lead equal
to or greater than 1.0 milligrams per square centimeter or 0.5 percent of lead by
weight.
G. Lead Dust Control Work Area: A cordoned off area with drop clothes or an
enclosed area or structure with containment to prevent the spread of lead dust,
paint chips, or debris from lead-containing paint disturbance operations.
H. PPE: Personal Protective Equipment.
1.5 ABBREVIATIONS
A. ASTM: American Society for Testing and Materials
1916 Race Street
Philadelphia, PA 19103
B. CFR: Code of Federal Regulations
Government Printing Office
Washington, DC 20402
C. DOT: Department of Transportation
Main Office, 50 Wolf Road
Albany, NY 12232
D. NIOSH: National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health
Building J, N.E. Room 3007
Atlanta, Georgia 30333
E. OSHA: Occupational Safety and Health Administration
200 Constitution Avenue
Washington, DC 20210
CORNELL UNIVERSITY BDA #12127
Fire Protection and Fire Alarm
For Off-Campus Housing – Phase I
HANDLING OF LEAD CONTAINING MATERIALS 02 83 04 - 3
F. USEPA: United States Environmental Protection Agency
401 M Street SW
Washington, DC 20460
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Quality Control Submittals:
1. Workers removing lead-containing/coated material and their supervisors
shall be personally experience in this type of work. Submit a copy of
documentation of completion of the EPA lead renovators training
program.
2. Submit the name of the lead supervisor on-site during the work.
3. Submit a copy of documentation for each worker of respirator fit testing
results.
4. Submit one copy of the work plan required under Quality Assurance
Article.
5. Submit one copy of transporter’s current waste transporter permit.
B. Operation and Maintenance Data:
1. Provide an affidavit stating that the HEPA filters to be used for this
project are new and unused.
C. Contract Closeout Submittals:
1. Assessment Report compiled by a testing lab certifying that the work
area has lead concentrations below the levels specified under the
cleaning criteria.
2. Copies of waste shipment records and disposal site receipt showing that
the lead-containing materials have been properly disposed.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with applicable codes and standards including those referenced in
Section 1.3. Where multiple requirements are specified, adhere to the more
stringent requirements.
B. Before the Work of this Section is scheduled to commence, a conference will be
held by the Owner’s Representative at the Site with the contractor and the lead
handling subcontractor (if any) for the purpose of reviewing the Contract
Documents, discussing requirements for the Work, and reviewing the Work
procedures.
C. Before the physical Work begins, prepare a detailed project specific lead-
containing material handling and removal work plan.
1. The work plan shall include, but not be limited to, the location, size, and
details of lead dust control work areas, containment, sequencing of lead
containing material handling, work procedures, types of equipment, crew
size, and emergency procedures for fire and medical emergencies.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY BDA #12127
Fire Protection and Fire Alarm
For Off-Campus Housing – Phase I
HANDLING OF LEAD CONTAINING MATERIALS 02 83 04 - 4
1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Complete the Work of this Section within the time limitation allowed for
shutdown of the air handling system serving the work area.
1. The air handling system will not be restarted until approval of the post-
work dust-wipe testing following the last cleaning.
B. Cover and seal all fin-tube radiator covers, diffusers, duplex outlets, speakers,
smoke and heat detectors, etc. Use temporary plasticized partitions as required.
1. Prevent lead containing dust from entering hard to clean areas within
the dust containment area.
2. Items judged to be too difficult to protect may be disconnected, removed
and replaced at contractor’s option.
C. Remove or encase all movable equipment in the work area with two layers of six
mil fire retardant polyethylene sheeting.
1.9 HEALTH AND SAFETY
A. Where in the performance of the work, workers, supervisory personnel or sub-
contractors may encounter, disturb, or otherwise function in the immediate
vicinity of contaminated items and materials, all personnel shall take
appropriate continuous measures as necessary to protect all adjacent building
occupants/workers from the potential lead exposure.
1. Such measures shall include the procedures and methods described
herein and shall be in compliance with all applicable regulations of
Federal, State and Local agencies.
2. Workers not directly involved with the handling of lead-containing paints
shall not be permitted within the work area.
1.10 FIRE PROTECTION, EMERGENCY EGRESS AND SECURITY
A. Establish a system for alerting workers of fire or other hazards that require
escape routes, evacuation of the work area, and development of an assigned
meeting place.
B. Develop a building floor plan showing work areas and emergency exits from
each.
C. Mark arrows on the floor and walls in work areas to all emergency exits and
provide lighted routes.
D. Provide a person on-site who is trained in First Aid and in the treatment of heat
stress and hypothermia.
E. Provide temporary battery operated smoke alarms in work area.
F. Provide chemical fire extinguishers on-site for emergencies.
G. Institute fire drills on a regular basis.
H. Shut off negative air machines (if used) during a fire.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY BDA #12127
Fire Protection and Fire Alarm
For Off-Campus Housing – Phase I
HANDLING OF LEAD CONTAINING MATERIALS 02 83 04 - 5
1.11 PERSONAL PROTECTIVE CLOTHING AND EQUIPMENT
A. Workers must wear protective suits, protective gloves, eye protection and a
minimum of half-face respirator with new HEPA filter cartridge for all projects.
Respiratory protection shall be in accordance with OSHA regulation 1910.134
and ANSI Z88.2.
B. Workers must be trained per EPA, have medical clearance and must have
recently received pulmonary function test (PFT) and respirator fit tested by a
trained professional.
1. A personal air sampling program shall be in place as required by OSHA.
2. The use of respirators must also follow a complete respiratory protection
program as specified by OSHA.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 RESPIRATORS
A. Type: Approved by the Mine Safety and Health Administration (MSHA),
Department of Labor, or the National Institute for Occupational Safety and
Health (NIOSH), Department of Health and Human Services.
2.2 VACUUM CLEANERS
A. Type: Vacuums equipped with true HEPA filters.
2.3 PLASTIC SHEETS
A. Type: Minimum 6 mil., clear, fire retardant polyethylene sheets.
B. Floor Protective Layer: Minimum 10 mil., reinforced polyethylene sheets.
2.4 DISPOSAL BAGS
A. Type: Minimum 6 mil thick, clear polyethylene bags with preprinted Caution
Label. Properly containerize/drum prior to disposal.
2.5 EQUIPMENT
A. Temporary lighting, heating, hot water heating units, ground fault interrupters,
and all other equipment on site shall be UL listed and shall be safe, proper, and
sufficient for the purpose intended.
B. All electrical equipment shall be in compliance with the National Electric Code,
Article 305 - Temporary Wiring.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY BDA #12127
Fire Protection and Fire Alarm
For Off-Campus Housing – Phase I
HANDLING OF LEAD CONTAINING MATERIALS 02 83 04 - 6
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PRE-WORK WIPE TESTING
A. The Owner will employ the services of an independent testing laboratory to
perform the pre-work testing within the lead dust control work areas and the
areas adjacent to the lead dust control work areas.
1. The testing lab used throughout the project will be New York State
Department of Health, Environmental Laboratory Accreditation Program
(NYS ELAP) certified.
2. The number of samples shall in accordance with Table 15.1 of the HUD
Guidelines.
3.2 EMPLOYEE PROTECTION
A. Comply with all applicable Occupational Safety and Health Administration
(OSHA) Requirements.
3.3 LEAD-CONTAINING/COATED MATERIAL HANDLING, REMOVAL, AND DISPOSAL
A. Handle and dispose of lead-containing materials in accordance with OSHA
1926.62 and the approved lead-containing material work plan. Use procedures
and equipment required to limit occupational and environmental exposure to
lead when material containing or coated with lead containing paint is handled
and disposed of in accordance with referenced standards.
B. Provide all necessary dust barriers to prevent the spread of dust from the work
area and prevent lead exposure to the public and environment.
C. The following work methods are prohibited on painted surfaces:
1. Dry hand tool cleaning
2. Power tools not equipped with shrouds and HEPA exhaust
3. Blast cleaning
4. High speed grinding
D. Cut and altar existing materials as required to conduct the work. Limit cutting
to the smallest amount necessary.
3.4 INTERIM WORK TESTING
A. When handling of lead-based paints is performed concurrent with other
construction, workers not directly involved with handling of lead-containing
materials shall not enter the Work Area until clearance has been obtained.
3.5 POST-WORK WIPE TESTING
A. The Owner’s third-party independent testing laboratory shall perform the post-
work testing within the lead dust control work areas and the areas adjacent to the
lead dust control work areas
1. The number of samples shall in accordance with Table 15.1 of the HUD
Guidelines.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY BDA #12127
Fire Protection and Fire Alarm
For Off-Campus Housing – Phase I
HANDLING OF LEAD CONTAINING MATERIALS 02 83 04 - 7
3.6 MULTIPLE WORK LOCATIONS
A. The first work area encountered shall be utilized to develop a method for an
acceptable baseline approach for the lead dust control area, pre work wipe
samples, employee protection, work method, post work wipe samples, cleaning
criteria and disposal.
1. Once an acceptable method is developed and verified by the independent
testing lab employed by the Owner, subsequent testing shall not be
required.
2. Do not change the methodology of the verified work plan during the
course of the entire project.
3.7 CLEANING CRITERIA
A. Cleaning criteria is separated into two categories; areas within the lead dust
control work area, and areas adjacent to the lead dust control work area:
1. Surfaces within the Lead Dust Control Work Area: In each area where
the lead containing/coated materials have been disturbed, compare the
post work wipe sample values with the pre work wipe sample values. If
any of the sample values exceed the pre work values, clean again and
schedule retesting until the lead levels are equal to or less than the pre
work values or less than the HUD guidelines listed below. Any other
surfaces inside the lead dust control work area that are not listed below
shall be cleaned to the pre work values:
a. Floors: 40 micrograms of lead per square foot.
b. Window Sills: 250 micrograms of lead per square foot.
c. Window Troughs: 400 micrograms of lead per square foot.
2. Areas Adjacent to the Lead Dust Control Work Area: In each area where
the work has been performed, compare the post work wipe sample
values with the pre work wipe sample values. If any of the sample values
exceed the pre work values, the area has been contaminated by the work
and cleaning is mandatory.
a. Clean all affected surfaces and schedule retesting. If results still
exceed pre work wipe sample values, clean again and schedule
retesting until the following criteria is met or until the lead dust
values are equal to or lower than the pre-work wipe sample
values.
3.8 CERTIFICATION OF CLEANING
A. Schedule dust wipe testing with the Owner’s Representative at the site, when work
area is ready for clearance testing.
B. Prior to removal of any isolation barrier, the Owner will obtain a written
statement and a final assessment report from the lab stating that the tests
conform to all standards set forth by all authorities having jurisdiction,
mentioned in the references.
C. The Owner shall have final determination of an acceptable clearance level.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY BDA #12127
Fire Protection and Fire Alarm
For Off-Campus Housing – Phase I
HANDLING OF LEAD CONTAINING MATERIALS 02 83 04 - 8
3.9 PRE-DISPOSAL TESTING
A. Prior to disposal, the Owner will employ the services of an independent testing lab
to perform clearance testing of the removed materials for toxicity in accordance
with EPA Method 1311, Toxicity Characteristic Leaching Procedure (TCLP).
1. Test results indicating a value greater than 5 ppm lead or 5 mg/L classifies
the removed material as Hazardous Waste.
3.10 DISPOSAL OF LEAD-CONTAINING/COATED MATERIAL AND RELATED DEBRIS
A. Transport and dispose of lead-containing material classified as Hazardous Waste
in accordance with the standards referenced in Part 1 of this Section.
B. Transport and dispose of lead-containing material classified as Non- Hazardous
Waste in accordance with the standards referenced in Part 1 of this Section.
3.11 RESTORATION
A. Remove temporary decontamination facilities and restore area designated for
these facilities to its original condition or better.
B. Where existing construction is damaged or contaminated during the course of
performing this project, restore area to its condition or better.
END OF SECTION
CORNELL UNIVERSITY BDA #12127
Fire Protection and Fire Alarm
For Off-Campus Housing – Phase I
SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING 21 05 17 - 1
SECTION 21 05 17
SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SLEEVES
A. Cast-Iron Wall Pipes: Cast or fabricated of cast or ductile iron and equivalent to
ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends unless otherwise indicated.
B. Galvanized-Steel-Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40,
zinc coated, with plain ends.
C. Galvanized-Steel-Sheet Sleeves: 0.0239-inch (0.6-mm) minimum thickness; round
tube closed with welded longitudinal joint.
2.2 SLEEVE-SEAL SYSTEMS
A. Description: Modular sealing-element unit, designed for field assembly, for filling
annular space between piping and sleeve.
1. Sealing Elements: EPDM-rubber interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe.
Include type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe.
2. Pressure Plates: Carbon steel or Stainless steel.
3. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel, with corrosion-resistant coating, or
Stainless steel of length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements.
2.3 GROUT
A. Standard: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, Grade B, post-hardening and volume-adjusting,
dry, hydraulic-cement grout.
B. Characteristics: Nonshrink; recommended for interior and exterior applications.
C. Design Mix: 5000-psi (34.5-MPa), 28-day compressive strength.
D. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 SLEEVE INSTALLATION
A. Install sleeves for piping passing through penetrations in floors, partitions and walls.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY BDA #12127
Fire Protection and Fire Alarm
For Off-Campus Housing – Phase I
SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING 21 05 17 - 2
B. For sleeves that will have sleeve-seal system installed, select sleeves of size large
enough to provide 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space between piping and concrete
slabs and walls.
1. Sleeves are not required for core-drilled holes.
C. Install sleeves in concrete floors, concrete roof slabs, and concrete walls as new slabs
and walls are constructed.
1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.
a. Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical equipment
areas or other wet areas 2 inches (50 mm) above finished floor level.
2. Using grout, seal the space outside of sleeves in slabs and walls without sleeve-
seal system.
D. Install sleeves for pipes passing through interior partitions.
1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.
2. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) annular clear
space between sleeve and pipe.
3. Seal annular space between sleeve and piping use joint sealants appropriate for
size, depth, and location of joint.
E. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings,
and floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials.
3.2 SLEEVE-SEAL-SYSTEM INSTALLATION
A. Install sleeve-seal systems in sleeves in exterior walls and slabs-on-grade at service
piping entries into building.
B. Select type, size, and number of sealing elements required for piping material and size
and for sleeve ID or hole size. Position piping in center of sleeve. Center piping in
penetration, assemble sleeve-seal system components, and install in annular space
between piping and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing
elements to expand and make a watertight seal.
3.3 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL SCHEDULE
A. Use sleeves and sleeve seals for the following piping-penetration applications:
1. Exterior Walls above Grade:
a. Piping Smaller Than NPS 6 (DN 150)Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves.
2. Exterior Walls below Grade:
a. Piping Smaller Than NPS 6 (DN 150) Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves with
sleeve-seal system.
1) Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space
between piping and sleeve for installing sleeve-seal system.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY BDA #12127
Fire Protection and Fire Alarm
For Off-Campus Housing – Phase I
SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING 21 05 17 - 3
3. Concrete Slabs-on-Grade:
a. Piping Smaller Than NPS 6 (DN 150) Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves with
sleeve-seal system.
1) Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space
between piping and sleeve for installing sleeve-seal system.
4. Interior Partitions:
a. Piping Smaller Than NPS 6 (DN 150) Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves.
b. Piping NPS 6 (DN 150) and Larger: Galvanized-steel-sheet sleeves.
END OF SECTION
CORNELL UNIVERSITY BDA #12127
Fire Protection and Fire Alarm
For Off-Campus Housing – Phase I
ESCUTCHEONS FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING 21 05 18 - 1
SECTION 21 05 18
ESCUTCHEONS FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ESCUTCHEONS
A. One-Piece, Galvanized Malleable Iron: With galvanized finish and setscrew fastener.
B. One-Piece, Stamped-Steel or Plastic Type: With chrome-plated finish and spring-clip
fasteners.
C. Split-Plate, Stamped-Steel Type: With chrome-plated finish, concealed and exposed-
rivet hinge, and spring-clip fasteners.
2.2 FLOOR PLATES
A. One-Piece Floor Plates: Cast-iron or malleable iron flange with holes for fasteners.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and finished floors.
B. Install escutcheons with ID to closely fit around piping and with OD that completely
covers opening.
1. Escutcheons for New Piping:
a. Bare Piping at Floor and Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-
piece, galvanized malleable iron type with galvanized finish.
b. Bare Piping at Wall Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, or split-
plate, stamped-steel or plastic type with concealed hinge.
c. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece, stamped-steel or
plastic type or split-plate, stamped-steel or plastic type with concealed
hinge.
C. Install floor plates for piping penetrations of equipment-room floors.
D. Install floor plates with ID to closely fit around piping and with OD that completely
covers opening.
1. New Piping: One-piece, floor-plate type.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY BDA #12127
Fire Protection and Fire Alarm
For Off-Campus Housing – Phase I
ESCUTCHEONS FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING 21 05 18 - 2
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Replace broken and damaged escutcheons and floor plates using new materials.
END OF SECTION
CORNELL UNIVERSITY BDA #12127
Fire Protection and Fire Alarm
For Off-Campus Housing – Phase I
IDENTIFICATION FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 21 05 53 - 1
SECTION 21 05 53
IDENTIFICATION FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1.2 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance Data: For each piping system to include in maintenance manuals.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 EQUIPMENT LABELS
A. Metal Labels for Equipment:
1. Material and Thickness: aluminum, 0.032 inch (0.8 mm thick, with predrilled
holes for attachment hardware.
2. Letter Color: White.
3. Background Color: Red.
4. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not
less than 2-1/2 by 3/4 inch (64 by 19 mm).
5. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) for name of units if viewing distance is
less than 24 inches (600 mm), 1/2 inch (13 mm) for viewing distances up to 72
inches (1830 mm), and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing
distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of
principal lettering.
6. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws or #16 single jack chain.
7. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with
substrate.
B. Plastic Labels for Equipment:
1. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical
engraving, 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) thick, with predrilled holes for attachment
hardware.
2. Letter Color: White.
3. Background Color: Red.
4. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F (71
deg C).
5. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not
less than 2-1/2 by 3/4 inch (64 by 19 mm).
6. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) for name of units if viewing distance is
less than 24 inches (600 mm), 1/2 inch (13 mm) for viewing distances up to 72
inches (1830 mm), and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing
distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of
principal lettering.
7. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws or #26 single jack chain.
8. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with
substrate.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY BDA #12127
Fire Protection and Fire Alarm
For Off-Campus Housing – Phase I
IDENTIFICATION FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 21 05 53 - 2
2.2 WARNING SIGNS AND LABELS
A. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical
engraving, 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) thick, with predrilled holes for attachment hardware.
B. Letter Color: White.
C. Background Color: Red.
D. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F (71 deg C).
E. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less
than 2-1/2 by 3/4 inch (64 by 19 mm).
F. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) for name of units if viewing distance is less
than 24 inches (600 mm), 1/2 inch (13 mm) for viewing distances up to 72 inches
(1830 mm), and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include
secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering.
G. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws.
H. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with
substrate.
I. Label Content: Include caution and warning information, plus emergency notification
instructions.
2.3 PIPE LABELS
A. General Requirements for Manufactured Pipe Labels: Preprinted, color-coded, with
lettering indicating service and showing flow direction.
B. Pretensioned Pipe Labels: Precoiled, semirigid plastic formed to partially cover
circumference of pipe and to attach to pipe without fasteners or adhesive.
C. Self-Adhesive Pipe Labels: Printed plastic with contact-type, permanent-adhesive
backing.
D. Pipe-Label Contents: Include identification of piping service using same designations
or abbreviations as used on Drawings; pipe size; and an arrow indicating flow
direction.
1. Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with piping-system service lettering to
accommodate both directions, or as separate unit on each pipe label to indicate
flow direction.
2. Lettering Size: At least 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) high.
E. Pipe-Label Colors:
1. Background Color: Red.
2. Letter Color: White.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY BDA #12127
Fire Protection and Fire Alarm
For Off-Campus Housing – Phase I
IDENTIFICATION FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 21 05 53 - 3
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Clean piping and equipment surfaces of substances that could impair bond of
identification devices, including dirt, oil, grease, release agents, and incompatible
primers, paints, and encapsulants.
3.2 LABEL INSTALLATION
A. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting
of surfaces where devices are to be applied.
B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with locations of access panels and
doors.
C. Install or permanently fasten labels on each major item of mechanical equipment.
D. Locate equipment labels where accessible and visible.
E. Piping Color-Coding: Painting of piping is specified in Section 09 91 23 "Interior
Painting.
1. Identification Paint: Use for contrasting background.
2. Stencil Paint: Use for pipe marking.
F. Pipe-Label Locations: Locate pipe labels where piping is exposed in machine rooms;
accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, closets, and plenums locations as
follows:
1. Near each valve and control device.
2. Where flow pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch.
3. Near penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, and inaccessible enclosures.
4. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of
concealed piping.
5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination.
6. Spaced at maximum intervals of 50 feet (15 m) along each run. Reduce intervals
to 25 feet (7.6 m) in areas of congested piping and equipment.
7. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings. Omit intermediately spaced
labels.
3.3 WARNING-TAG INSTALLATION
A. Write required message on, and attach warning tags to, equipment and other items
where required.
END OF SECTION
CORNELL UNIVERSITY BDA #12127
Fire Protection and Fire Alarm
For Off-Campus Housing – Phase I
FACILITY FIRE-SUPPRESSION WATER-SERVICE PIPING 21 11 00 - 1
SECTION 21 11 00
FACILITY FIRE-SUPPRESSION WATER-SERVICE PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
1.2 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Coordination Drawings: For piping and specialties including relation to other services
in same area, drawn to scale. Show piping sizes and valves, locations, and elevations.
B. Field quality-control reports including NFPA contractor’s material and test certificate
for underground piping, and disinfection reports.
1. New York State Department of Health Form DOH-1013
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Regulatory Requirements:
1. Comply with requirements of utility company supplying water. Include tapping
of water mains and backflow prevention.
2. Comply with standards of authorities having jurisdiction for fire-suppression
water-service piping, including materials, installation, and testing.
B. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.
C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and
application.
D. Comply with the "Approval Guide," published by FM Global, or UL's "Fire Protection
Equipment Directory" for fire-service-main products.
E. NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 24 for materials, installations, tests, flushing,
and valve supervision for fire-suppression water-service piping.
F. Building, Fire, and Plumbing codes of New York State.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Preparation for Transport: Prepare valves, according to the following:
1. Ensure that valves are dry and internally protected against rust and corrosion.
2. Protect valves against damage to threaded ends and flange faces.
3. Set valves in best position for handling. Set valves closed to prevent rattling.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY BDA #12127
Fire Protection and Fire Alarm
For Off-Campus Housing – Phase I
FACILITY FIRE-SUPPRESSION WATER-SERVICE PIPING 21 11 00 - 2
B. During Storage: Use precautions for valves, according to the following:
1. Do not remove end protectors unless necessary for inspection; then reinstall for
storage.
2. Protect from weather. Store indoors and maintain temperature higher than
ambient dew point temperature. Support off the ground or pavement in
watertight enclosures when outdoor storage is necessary.
C. Handling: Use sling to handle valves if size requires handling by crane or lift. Rig
valves to avoid damage to exposed parts. Do not use stems as lifting or rigging points.
D. Deliver piping with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping,
storage, and handling to prevent pipe-end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt,
debris, and moisture.
E. Protect stored piping from moisture and dirt. Elevate above grade. Do not exceed
structural capacity of floor when storing inside.
F. Protect flanges, fittings, and specialties from moisture and dirt.
G. Store plastic piping protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and
bending.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate connection to water main with utility company. Pay all associated fees.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 DUCTILE-IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. Mechanical-Joint, Ductile-Iron Pipe: AWWA C151, with mechanical-joint bell and
plain spigot end. Provide pipe with single cement inside lining per AWWA C104.
B. Push-on-Joint, Ductile-Iron Pipe: AWWA C151, with push-on-joint bell and plain
spigot end. Provide pipe with single cement inside lining per AWWA C104.
C. Mechanical-Joint, Ductile-Iron Fittings: AWWA C110, ductile- or gray-iron standard
pattern or AWWA C153, ductile-iron compact pattern.
1. Glands, Gaskets, and Bolts: AWWA C111, ductile- or gray-iron glands, rubber
gaskets, and steel bolts.
2. Provide pipe with single cement inside lining per AWWA C104
D. Push-on-Joint, Ductile-Iron Fittings: AWWA C153, ductile-iron compact pattern.
1. Gaskets: AWWA C111, rubber.
2. Provide pipe with single cement inside lining per AWWA C104
E. Flanges: ASME B16.1, Class 125, cast iron.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY BDA #12127
Fire Protection and Fire Alarm
For Off-Campus Housing – Phase I
FACILITY FIRE-SUPPRESSION WATER-SERVICE PIPING 21 11 00 - 3
2.2 PE PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. PE, Fire-Service Pipe: FM Global approved, with minimum thickness equivalent to
Class 150.
B. Molded PE Fittings: FM Global approved; PE butt-fusion type, made to match PE pipe
dimensions and class.
C. Provide dual FM Global and NSF certified products while combined service for
domestic and fire protection is used.
2.3 PVC PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. PVC Pipe: AWWA C900, Class 150, with bell end with gasket, and with spigot end.
B. PVC Fittings: AWWA C900, Class 150, with bell-and-spigot or double-bell ends.
Include elastomeric gasket in each bell.
2.4 JOINING MATERIALS
A. Gaskets for Ferrous Piping and Copper-Alloy Tubing: ASME B16.21, asbestos free.
2.5 PIPING SPECIALTIES
A. Transition Fittings: Manufactured fitting or coupling same size as, with pressure
rating at least equal to and ends compatible with, piping to be joined.
B. Tubular-Sleeve Pipe Couplings:
1. Description: Metal, bolted, sleeve-type, reducing or transition coupling, with
center sleeve, gaskets, end rings, and bolt fasteners, and with ends of same sizes
as piping to be joined.
2. Standard: AWWA C219.
3. Center-Sleeve Material: Manufacturer's standard.
4. Gasket Material: Natural or synthetic rubber.
5. Pressure Rating: 150 psig (1035 kPa) minimum.
6. Metal Component Finish: Corrosion-resistant coating or material.
2.6 CURB VALVES
A. Curb Valves: Comply with AWWA C800 for high-pressure service-line valves. Valve
has bronze body, ground-key plug or ball, wide tee head, and inlet and outlet
matching service piping material.
B. Service Boxes for Curb Valves: Similar to AWWA M44 requirements for cast-iron valve
boxes. Include cast-iron telescoping top section of length required for depth of burial
of valve, plug with lettering "WATER," and bottom section with base that fits over curb
valve and with a barrel approximately 3 inches (75 mm) in diameter.
1. Shutoff Rods: Steel; with tee-handle with one pointed end, stem of length to
operate deepest buried valve, and slotted end matching curb valve.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY BDA #12127
Fire Protection and Fire Alarm
For Off-Campus Housing – Phase I
FACILITY FIRE-SUPPRESSION WATER-SERVICE PIPING 21 11 00 - 4
2.7 GATE VALVES
A. AWWA Gate Valves:
1. 200-psig (1380-kPa), AWWA, Iron, Nonrising-Stem, Resilient-Seated Gate Valves:
a. Description: Gray- or ductile-iron body and bonnet; with bronze or gray-
or ductile-iron gate, resilient seats, bronze stem, and stem nut.
b. Standard: AWWA C509.
c. Pressure Rating: 200 psig (1380 kPa).
d. End Connections: Mechanical or push-on joint.
e. Interior Coating: Complying with AWWA C550.
B. UL-Listed or FM-Approved Gate Valves:
1. 175-psig (1200-kPa), UL-Listed or FM-Approved, Iron, Nonrising-Stem Gate
Valves:
a. Description: Iron body and bonnet, bronze seating material, and inside
screw.
b. Standards: UL 262 and "Approval Guide," published by FM Global, listing.
c. Pressure Rating: 175 psig (1200) minimum.
d. End Connections: Mechanical or push-on joint.
e. Indicator-Post Flange: Include on valves used with indicator posts.
2.8 GATE VALVE ACCESSORIES AND SPECIALTIES
A. Tapping-Sleeve Assemblies:
1. Description: Sleeve and valve compatible with drilling machine.
2. Standard: MSS SP-60.
3. Tapping Sleeve: Cast-iron, ductile-iron, or stainless-steel, two-piece bolted
sleeve with flanged outlet for new branch connection. Sleeve shall match size
and type of pipe material being tapped and have recessed flange for branch
valve.
4. Valve: AWWA, cast-iron, nonrising-stem, resilient-seated gate valve with one
raised-face flange mating tapping-sleeve flange.
B. Valve Boxes: Comply with AWWA M44 for cast-iron valve boxes. Include top section,
adjustable extension of length required for depth of burial of valve, plug with lettering
"WATER," and bottom section with base that fits over valve and with a barrel
approximately 5 inches (125 mm) in diameter.
1. Operating Wrenches: Steel; with tee-handle with one pointed end, stem of
length to operate deepest buried valve, and socket matching valve operating nut.
C. Indicator Posts:
1. Description: Vertical-type, cast-iron body with operating wrench, extension rod,
and adjustable cast-iron barrel of length required for depth of burial of valve.
2. Standards: UL 789 and "Approval Guide," published by FM Global, listing.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY BDA #12127
Fire Protection and Fire Alarm
For Off-Campus Housing – Phase I
FACILITY FIRE-SUPPRESSION WATER-SERVICE PIPING 21 11 00 - 5
2.9 ALARM DEVICES
A. General: UL 753 and "Approval Guide," published by FM Global, listing, of types and
sizes to mate and match piping and equipment.
B. Supervisory Switches: Single pole, double throw; designed to signal valve in other
than fully open position. Provide type for use with indicator post valve.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EARTHWORK
A. Comply with excavating, trenching, and backfilling requirements in Cornell University
Facilities Services Design and Construction Standards Division Two-Sitework.
3.2 PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Water-Main Connection: Arrange with water utility company for tap of size and in
location indicated in water main.
B. Water-Main Connection: Tap water main according to requirements of water utility
company and of size and in location indicated.
C. Make connections larger than NPS 2 (DN 50) with tapping machine according to the
following:
1. Install tapping sleeve and tapping valve according to MSS SP-60.
2. Install tapping sleeve on pipe to be tapped. Position flanged outlet for gate valve.
3. Use tapping machine compatible with valve and tapping sleeve; cut hole in main.
Remove tapping machine and connect water-service piping.
4. Install gate valve onto tapping sleeve. Comply with MSS SP-60. Install valve
with stem pointing up and with valve box.
D. Comply with NFPA 24 for fire-service-main piping materials and installation.
E. Install ductile-iron, water-service piping according to AWWA C600 and AWWA M41.
F. Install PE pipe according to ASTM D 2774 and ASTM F 645.
G. Install PVC, AWWA pipe according to ASTM F 645 and AWWA M23.
H. Bury piping with depth of cover over top at least 5’-6”, with top at least 12 inches (300
mm) below level of maximum frost penetration, and according to the following:
I. Install piping by tunneling or jacking, or combination of both, under streets and other
obstructions that cannot be disturbed. Coordinate method with water authority.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY BDA #12127
Fire Protection and Fire Alarm
For Off-Campus Housing – Phase I
FACILITY FIRE-SUPPRESSION WATER-SERVICE PIPING 21 11 00 - 6
J. Extend fire-suppression water-service piping and connect to water-supply source and
building fire-suppression water-service piping systems at locations and pipe sizes
indicated.
1. Terminate fire-suppression water-service piping at building floor slab or wall
until building-water-piping systems are installed. Terminate piping with caps,
plugs, or flanges as required for piping material. Make connections to building's
fire-suppression water-service piping systems when those systems are installed.
K. Install underground piping with restrained joints at horizontal and vertical changes in
direction. Use restrained-joint piping, thrust blocks, anchors, tie-rods and clamps,
and other supports.
L. Comply with requirements in Section 21 13 13 “Wet-Pipe Sprinkler Systems” for fire
suppression-water piping inside the building.
M. Comply with requirements in Division 21 Sections for fire-suppression-water piping
inside the building.
N. Comply with requirements in Division 22 11 16 Section "Domestic Water Piping" for
potable-water piping inside the building.
O. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with
requirements for sleeves specified in Division 21 Section "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for
Fire-Suppression Piping."
P. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply with
requirements for sleeve seals specified in Division 21 Section "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals
for Fire-Suppression Piping."
3.3 JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Install couplings, flanges, flanged fittings, unions, nipples, and transition and special
fittings that have finish and pressure rating same as or higher than systems pressure
rating for aboveground applications unless otherwise indicated.
B. Install flanges, flange adaptors, or couplings for grooved-end piping on valves,
apparatus, and equipment having NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger end connections.
C. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from outside and inside of pipes, and fittings
before assembly.
D. Ductile-Iron Piping, Gasketed Joints for Fire-Service-Main Piping: UL 194.
E. Ductile-Iron Piping, Grooved Joints: Cut-groove pipe. Assemble joints with grooved-
end, ductile-iron-piping couplings, gaskets, lubricant, and bolts.
F. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material in size, type, and thickness
suitable for water service. Join flanges with bolts according to ASME B31.9.
G. PE Piping Heat-Fusion Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces by wiping with clean
cloth or paper towels. Join according to ASTM D 2657.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY BDA #12127
Fire Protection and Fire Alarm
For Off-Campus Housing – Phase I
FACILITY FIRE-SUPPRESSION WATER-SERVICE PIPING 21 11 00 - 7
H. PVC Piping Gasketed Joints: Use joining materials according to AWWA C900.
Construct joints with elastomeric seals and lubricant according to ASTM D 2774 or
ASTM D 3139.
I. Dissimilar Materials Piping Joints: Use adapters compatible with both piping
materials, with OD, and with system working pressure.
J. Do not use flanges or unions for underground piping.
3.4 ANCHORAGE INSTALLATION
A. Anchorage, General: Install water-distribution piping with restrained joints.
Anchorages and restrained-joint types that may be used include the following:
1. Concrete thrust blocks.
2. Locking mechanical joints.
3. Set-screw mechanical retainer glands.
4. Bolted flanged joints.
5. Heat-fused joints.
6. Pipe clamps and tie rods.
B. Install anchorages for tees, plugs and caps, bends, valves in fire-suppression water-
service piping according to NFPA 24 and the following:
1. Gasketed-Joint, Ductile-Iron, Water-Service Piping: According to AWWA C600.
2. Gasketed-Joint, PVC Water-Service Piping: According to AWWA M23.
C. Apply full coat of asphalt or other acceptable corrosion-resistant material to surfaces
of installed ferrous anchorage devices.
3.5 VALVE INSTALLATION
A. AWWA Gate Valves: Comply with AWWA C600 and AWWA M44. Install each
underground valve with stem pointing up and with valve box.
B. AWWA Valves Other Than Gate Valves: Comply with AWWA C600 and AWWA M44.
C. UL-Listed or FM-Approved Gate Valves: Comply with NFPA 24. Install each
underground valve with stem pointing up and with vertical cast-iron indicator post.
D. UL-Listed or FM-Approved Valves Other Than Gate Valves: Comply with NFPA 24.
E. MSS Valves: Install as component of connected piping system.
F. Curb Valves: Install each underground curb valve with head pointed up and with
service box.
G. Support valves and piping, not direct buried, on concrete piers. Comply with
requirements for concrete per Section 03300 of Cornell University Design Standards.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY BDA #12127
Fire Protection and Fire Alarm
For Off-Campus Housing – Phase I
FACILITY FIRE-SUPPRESSION WATER-SERVICE PIPING 21 11 00 - 8
3.6 ALARM DEVICE INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with NFPA 24 for devices and methods of valve supervision.
Underground valves with valve box do not require supervision.
B. Supervisory Switches: Supervise valves in open position.
1. Indicator Posts: Drill and thread hole in upper-barrel section at target plate.
Install switch, with toggle against target plate, on barrel of indicator post.
C. Locking and Sealing: Secure unsupervised valves as follows:
1. Post Indicators: Install padlock on wrench on indicator post.
D. Connect alarm devices to building's fire-alarm system. Wiring and fire-alarm devices
are specified in Division 28 Sections.
3.7 CONNECTIONS
A. Connect fire-suppression water-service piping to utility water main. Use tapping
sleeve and tapping valve.
B. Connect fire-suppression water-service piping to interior fire-suppression piping.
3.8 SLEEVE INSTALLATION
A. General Requirements: Install sleeve for pipes passing through penetrations in exterior
walls.
1. Exception: Sleeves are not required for core-drilled holes.
B. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.
C. For exterior wall penetrations below grade, seal annular space between sleeves and
piping using sleeve seals.
D. Seal space outside of sleeves in concrete walls with grout.
E. Install the following sleeve materials:
1. Galvanized - steel pipe sleeves for pipes smaller than NPS 6 (DN 150).
3.9 SLEEVE SEAL INSTALLATION
A. Install sleeve seals in sleeves in exterior concrete floor slabs and walls at fire-
suppression water-service piping entries into the building.
B. Select type and number of sealing elements required for pipe material and size.
Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble sleeve seal components and install in
annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that
cause sealing elements to expand and make a watertight seal.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY BDA #12127
Fire Protection and Fire Alarm
For Off-Campus Housing – Phase I
FACILITY FIRE-SUPPRESSION WATER-SERVICE PIPING 21 11 00 - 9
3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Use test procedure prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction or, as indicated in
NFPA 24.Prepare test and inspection reports, and submit to Water Authority, Owner,
and Architect/Engineer.
3.11 IDENTIFICATION
A. Install continuous underground detectable warning tape during backfilling of trench
for underground fire-suppression water-service piping. Locate below finished grade,
directly over piping. "
3.12 CLEANING
A. Clean and disinfect fire-suppression water-service piping as follows:
1. Purge new piping systems and parts of existing systems that have been altered,
extended, or repaired before use.
2. Use purging and disinfecting procedure prescribed by authorities having
jurisdiction or, if method is not prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction,
use procedure described in NFPA 24 for flushing of piping. Flush piping system
with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at points of outlet.
3. Use purging and disinfecting procedure prescribed by authorities having
jurisdiction or, if method is not prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction,
use procedure described in AWWA C651 or do as follows:
a. Fill system or part of system with water/chlorine solution containing at
least 50 ppm of chlorine; isolate and allow to stand for 24 hours.
b. Drain system or part of system of previous solution and refill with
water/chlorine solution containing at least 200 ppm of chlorine; isolate
and allow to stand for three hours.
c. After standing time, flush system with clean, potable water until no
chlorine remains in water coming from system.
d. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction.
Repeat procedure if biological examination shows evidence of
contamination.
B. Prepare reports of purging and disinfecting activities.
END OF SECTION
CORNELL UNIVERSITY BDA #12127
Fire Protection and Fire Alarm
For Off-Campus Housing – Phase I
WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 21 13 13 - 1
SECTION 21 13 13
WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DEFINITIONS
A. Standard-Pressure Sprinkler Piping: Wet-pipe sprinkler system piping designed to
operate at working pressure of 175 psig (1200 kPa) maximum.
1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTIONS
A. Wet-Pipe Sprinkler System: Automatic sprinklers are attached to piping containing
water and that is connected to water supply through alarm valve. Water discharges
immediately from sprinklers when they are opened. Sprinklers open when heat melts
fusible link or destroys frangible device.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Standard-Pressure Piping System Component: Listed for 175-psig (1200-kPa)
minimum working pressure.
B. Delegated Design: Design sprinkler system(s), including comprehensive engineering
analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and
design criteria indicated.
1. Available fire-hydrant flow test records indicate the following conditions:
a. Refer to Drawing F-001.
C. Sprinkler system design shall be approved by authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Minimum Density for Automatic-Sprinkler Piping Design:
a. Residential (Dwelling) Occupancy: 0.10 gpm over the area specified in FM
Global Data Sheet 2-5.
2. Maximum Protection Area per Sprinkler: Per UL listing or FM approval.
a. Residential Areas: 400 sq. ft. (37 sq. m) or allowed by FM approval.
b. Storage Areas: 130 sq. ft. (12.1 sq. m).
c. Mechanical Equipment Rooms: 130 sq. ft. (12.1 sq. m).
d. Electrical Equipment Rooms: 130 sq. ft. (12.1 sq. m).
e. Other Areas: According to NFPA 13 recommendations where referenced to
from NFPA 13R.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY BDA #12127
Fire Protection and Fire Alarm
For Off-Campus Housing – Phase I
WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 21 13 13 - 2
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated
1. Equipment
a. Provide manufacturer’s catalog data for each separate piece of equipment
which indicates the name of the manufacturer of each item of equipment,
with data highlighted to indicate model, size, options, etc. proposed for
installation.
B. Shop Drawings: For wet-pipe sprinkler systems. Include plans, elevations, sections,
details, and attachments to other work. Provide layout drawing of the complete
automatic sprinkler system indicating relationship of all other items including existing
HVAC equipment, lighting fixtures, structural members and all other significant items
of all piping. Complete details and sections as required to clearly define and clarify
the design including details of each type of riser assembly and pipe hangers.
C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For sprinkler systems indicated to comply with
performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data by the qualified
fire protection contractor’s NICET certified designer responsible for their preparation.
D. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.
E. Approved Sprinkler Piping Drawings: Working plans, prepared according to
NFPA 13R, that have been approved by authorities having jurisdiction, insurance
underwriter including hydraulic calculations if applicable.
F. Welding certificates.
G. Field Test Reports and Certificates: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance
with performance requirements and as described in NFPA 13R. Include "Contractor's
Material and Test Certificate for Aboveground Piping."
H. Field quality-control reports.
I. Operation and Maintenance Data: For sprinkler specialties to include in emergency,
operation, and maintenance manuals.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications:
1. Installer's responsibilities include designing, fabricating, and installing sprinkler
systems and providing services needed to assume engineering responsibility.
Base calculations on results of fire-hydrant flow test indicated on Drawing
F-001.
a. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of working plans, calculations,
and field test reports by a qualified licensed sprinkler system contractor.
Submit minimum of NICET Level III Engineering Technician qualifications.
B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler
and Pressure Vessel Code.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY BDA #12127
Fire Protection and Fire Alarm
For Off-Campus Housing – Phase I
WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 21 13 13 - 3
C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and
application.
D. Cornell University: Design and Construction Standards 15300 Fire Protection (06-18-
12)
E. NFPA Standards: Sprinkler system equipment, specialties, accessories, installation,
and testing shall comply with the following:
1. NFPA 13, "Installation of Sprinkler Systems" when referred to by NFPA 13R.
2. NFPA 13R, "Installation of Sprinkler Systems in Residential Occupancies up to
and Including Four Stories in Height"-2007 Edition.
3. NFPA 24, "Installation of Private Fire Service Mains and Their Appurtenances” -
2007 Edition.
F. FM Global Property Loss Prevention Data Sheets: 2-5 Installation Guidelines for
Automatic Sprinklers in Residential Occupancies (January 2010).
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of sprinklers with other construction that
penetrates ceilings, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, and partition
assemblies.
1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with
protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Sprinkler Cabinets: Finished, wall-mounted, steel cabinet with hinged cover,
and with space for minimum of six spare sprinklers plus sprinkler wrench.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 LEAD FREE PRODUCTS
A. Utilize lead free products where the option is available.
2.2 STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. Standard Weight, Black-Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B. Pipe ends
may be factory, shop fabrication or field formed to match joining method.
B. Black-Steel Pipe Nipples: ASTM A 733, made of ASTM A 53/A 53M, standard-weight,
seamless steel pipe with threaded ends.
C. Uncoated, Steel Couplings: ASTM A 865, threaded.
D. Uncoated, Gray-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.4, Class 125, standard pattern.
E. Malleable- or Ductile-Iron Unions: UL 860.
F. Cast-Iron Flanges: ASME 16.1, Class 125.
G. Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5, Class 150.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY BDA #12127
Fire Protection and Fire Alarm
For Off-Campus Housing – Phase I
WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 21 13 13 - 4
H. Steel Welding Fittings: ASTM A 234/A 234M and ASME B16.9.
I. Grooved-Joint, Steel-Pipe Appurtenances:
1. Pressure Rating: 175 psig (1200 kPa) minimum.
2. Uncoated, Grooved-End Fittings for Steel Piping: ASTM A 47/A 47M, malleable-
iron casting or ASTM A 536, ductile-iron casting; with dimensions matching
steel pipe.
3. Grooved-End-Pipe Couplings for Steel Piping: AWWA C606 and UL 213, rigid
pattern, unless otherwise indicated, for steel-pipe dimensions. Include ferrous
housing sections, EPDM-rubber gasket, and bolts and nuts.
J. Steel Pressure-Seal Fittings: UL 213, FM-approved, 175-psig (1200-kPa) pressure
rating with steel housing, rubber O-rings, and pipe stop; for use with fitting
manufacturers' pressure-seal tools.
2.3 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS
A. Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type L (ASTM B 88M, Type B) or ASTM B 88, Type M
(ASTM B 88M, Type C) water tube, drawn temper.
B. Cast-Copper, Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.18, pressure fittings.
C. Wrought-Copper, Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.22, pressure fittings.
D. Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, with solder-joint ends.
E. Copper Unions: MSS SP-123, cast-copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body, with ball-and-
socket, metal-to-metal seating surfaces, and solder-joint or threaded ends.
F. Copper Pressure-Seal Fittings:
1. Standard: UL 213.
2. NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Wrought-copper fitting with EPDM-rubber O-ring
seal in each end.
3. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 65 to DN 100): Cast-bronze fitting with EPDM-rubber
O-ring seal in each end.
G. Grooved-Joint, Copper-Tube Appurtenances:
1. Grooved-End, Copper Fittings: ASTM B 75 (ASTM B 75M), copper tube or
ASTM B 584, bronze castings.
2. Grooved-End-Tube Couplings: To fit copper-tube dimensions, with design
similar to AWWA C606. Include ferrous housing sections, EPDM-rubber gasket
suitable for hot and cold water, and bolts and nuts.
H. Copper-Tube, Extruded-Tee Connections:
1. Description: Tee formed in copper tube according to ASTM F 2014.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY BDA #12127
Fire Protection and Fire Alarm
For Off-Campus Housing – Phase I
WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 21 13 13 - 5
2.4 PIPING JOINING MATERIALS
A. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick
or ASME B16.21, nonmetallic and asbestos free.
1. Class 125, Cast-Iron Flanges and Class 150, Bronze Flat-Face Flanges: Full-
face gaskets.
B. Metal, Pipe-Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel unless otherwise
indicated.
C. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8/A5.8M, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for
general-duty brazing unless otherwise indicated.
D. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12M/D10.12 for welding materials
appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.
2.5 LISTED FIRE-PROTECTION VALVES
A. General Requirements:
1. Valves shall be UL listed or FM approved.
2. Minimum Pressure Rating for Standard-Pressure Piping: 175 psig (1200 kPa).
B. Ball Valves:
1. Standard: UL 1091 except with ball instead of disc.
2. Valves NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40) and Smaller: Bronze body with threaded ends.
3. Valves NPS 2 and NPS 2-1/2 (DN 50 and DN 65): Bronze body with threaded
ends or ductile-iron body with grooved ends.
4. Valves NPS 3 (DN 80): Ductile-iron body with grooved ends.
C. Bronze Butterfly Valves:
1. Standard: UL 1091.
2. Pressure Rating: 175 psig (1200 kPa).
3. Body Material: Bronze.
4. End Connections: Threaded.
D. Check Valves:
1. Standard: UL 312.
2. Pressure Rating: 250 psig (1725 kPa) minimum.
3. Type: Swing check.
4. Body Material: Cast iron.
5. End Connections: Flanged or grooved.
6. Convenience: Provide with removeable cover plate.
E. Bronze OS&Y Gate Valves:
1. Standard: UL 262.
2. Pressure Rating: 175 psig (1200 kPa).
3. Body Material: Bronze.
4. End Connections: Threaded.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY BDA #12127
Fire Protection and Fire Alarm
For Off-Campus Housing – Phase I
WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 21 13 13 - 6
F. Iron OS&Y Gate Valves:
1. Standard: UL 262.
2. Pressure Rating: 250 psig (1725 kPa) minimum.
3. Body Material: Cast or ductile iron.
4. End Connections: Flanged or grooved.
G. Indicating-Type Butterfly Valves:
1. Standard: UL 1091.
2. Pressure Rating: 175 psig (1200 kPa) minimum.
3. Valves NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller:
a. Valve Type: Ball or butterfly.
b. Body Material: Bronze.
c. End Connections: Threaded.
4. Valves NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger:
a. Valve Type: Butterfly.
b. Body Material: Cast or ductile iron.
c. End Connections: Flanged, grooved, or wafer.
5. Valve Operation: Integral electrical, 24-V dc, prewired, single-circuit,
supervisory switch and visual indicating device.
H. NRS Gate Valves:
1. Standard: UL 262.
2. Pressure Rating: 250 psig (1725 kPa) minimum.
3. Body Material: Cast iron with indicator post flange.
4. Stem: Nonrising.
5. End Connections: Flanged or grooved.
I. Indicator Posts:
1. Standard: UL 789.
2. Type: Horizontal for wall mounting.
3. Body Material: Cast iron with extension rod and locking device.
4. Operation: Wrench.
2.6 TRIM AND DRAIN VALVES
A. General Requirements:
1. Standard: UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" listing or "Approval
Guide," published by FM Global, listing.
2. Pressure Rating: 175 psig (1200 kPa) minimum.
3. Types: Angle, ball, and globe
2.7 SPECIALTY VALVES
A. General Requirements:
1. Standard: UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" listing or "Approval
Guide," published by FM Global, listing.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY BDA #12127
Fire Protection and Fire Alarm
For Off-Campus Housing – Phase I
WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 21 13 13 - 7
2. Pressure Rating:
a. Standard-Pressure Piping Specialty Valves: 175 psig (1200 kPa)
minimum.
3. Body Material: Cast or ductile iron.
4. Size: Same as connected piping.
5. End Connections: Flanged or grooved.
B. Riser Check Valve
1. Provide listed riser check valve with associated water pressure gauges and main
drain valve.
2. Provide valve consisting of cast or ductile iron body with rubber-faced clapper
and with flanged or grooved ends.
3. Provide valve with factor-finished enamel.
4. Provide with removable cover plate.
C. Automatic (Ball Drip) Drain Valves:
1. Standard: UL 1726.
2. Pressure Rating: 175 psig (1200 kPa) minimum.
3. Type: Automatic draining, ball check.
4. Size: NPS 3/4 (DN 20).
5. End Connections: Threaded.
2.8 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS
A. Double-Check, Backflow-Prevention Assemblies:
1. Standard: ASSE 1015.
2. Operation: Continuous-pressure applications unless otherwise indicated.
3. Pressure Loss: 5 psig (35 kPa) maximum, through middle one-third of flow
range.
4. Body Material: Bronze for NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller; cast iron with interior
lining complying with AWWA C550 or that is FDA approved or steel with interior
lining complying with AWWA C550 or that is FDA approved or stainless steel for
NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger.
5. End Connections: Threaded for NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller; flanged for NPS 2-
1/2 (DN 65) and larger.
6. Accessories: OS&Y gate valves with flanged ends on inlet and outlet of NPS 2-
1/2 (DN 65) and larger.
2.9 HOSE VALVE MANIFOLD ASSEMBLY FOR TESTING OF BACKFLOW PREVENTER:
1. Standard: Comply with requirements in NFPA 13
2. Header Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Schedule 40, galvanized steel with ends
threaded according to ASTM B1.20.1.
3. Header Pipe Fittings: ASME B16.4, galvanized cast-iron threaded fittings.
4. Automatic Drain Valve: UL 1726.
5. Manifold:
a. Test Connections: Comply with UL 405 except provide outlets without
clappers instead of outlets.
b. Body: Flush type, brass or ductile iron, with number of outlets required to
flow sprinkler system demand.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY BDA #12127
Fire Protection and Fire Alarm
For Off-Campus Housing – Phase I
WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 21 13 13 - 8
c. Nipples: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Schedule 40, galvanized-steel pipe with ends
threaded according to ASME B1.20.1.
d. Adapters and Caps with Chain: Brass or bronze, with outlet threaded
according to NFPA 1983 and matching local fire-department threads.
e. Escutcheon Plate: Brass or bronze, rectangular.
f. Hose Valves: UL 668, bronze with outlet threaded according to NFPA 1963
and matching local fire-department threads.
g. Exposed Parts Finish: Polished brass.
h. Escutcheon Plate Marking: Equivalent to “TEST CONNECTION”.
6. Manifold
a. Test Connections: Comply with UL 405 except provide outlets without
clappers instead of inlets.
b. Body: Exposed type, brass, with number of outlets required to flow sprinkler
system demand.
c. Escutcheon Plate: Brass or bronze, round.
d. Hose Valves: UL 668, bronze with outlet threaded according to NPA 1963
and matching local fire-department threads. Include caps and chains.
e. Exposed parts finish: Polished brass.
f. Escutcheon Plate Marking: Equivalent to “FIRE PUMP TEST”.
2.10 FIRE-DEPARTMENT CONNECTIONS
1. Non-Threaded (Storz) Inlet Connection:
a. Standard: NFPA 1963 Standard for fire hose connections.
b. Type: Exposed, projecting, 30 degree angle pattern
c. Pressure Rating: 175 psig (1200 kPa) minimum
d. Body Material: Hard-coated aluminum .
e. Inlet: 5” Non-threaded locking single inlet.
f. Cap: Blind cap with hard-coated aluminum body material with securing
wire or chain.
g. Escutcheon Plate: Cast aluminum body, round, painted red with white
lettering auto sprk.
h. Outlet: Female NPT, 4” size.
2.11 SPRINKLER SPECIALTY PIPE FITTINGS
A. Branch Outlet Fittings:
1. Standard: UL 213.
2. Pressure Rating: 175 psig (1200 kPa) minimum.
3. Body Material: Ductile-iron housing with EPDM seals and bolts and nuts.
4. Type: Mechanical-T and -cross fittings.
5. Configurations: Snap-on and strapless, ductile-iron housing with branch
outlets.
6. Size: Of dimension to fit onto sprinkler main and with outlet connections as
required to match connected branch piping.
7. Branch Outlets: Grooved, plain-end pipe, or threaded.
B. Flow Detection and Test Assemblies:
1. Standard: UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" listing or "Approval
Guide," published by FM Global, listing.
2. Pressure Rating: 175 psig (1200 kPa) minimum.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY BDA #12127
Fire Protection and Fire Alarm
For Off-Campus Housing – Phase I
WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 21 13 13 - 9
3. Body Material: Cast- or ductile-iron housing with orifice, sight glass, and
integral test valve.
4. Size: Same as connected piping.
5. Inlet and Outlet: Threaded.
C. Branch Line Testers:
1. Standard: UL 199.
2. Pressure Rating: 175 psig (1200 kPa).
3. Body Material: Brass.
4. Size: Same as connected piping.
5. Inlet: Threaded.
6. Drain Outlet: Threaded and capped.
7. Branch Outlet: Threaded, for sprinkler.
D. Sprinkler Inspector's Test Fittings:
1. Standard: UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" listing or "Approval
Guide," published by FM Global, listing.
2. Pressure Rating: 175 psig (1200 kPa) minimum.
3. Body Material: Cast- or ductile-iron housing with sight glass.
4. Size: Same as connected piping.
5. Inlet and Outlet: Threaded.
E. Adjustable Drop Nipples:
1. Standard: UL 1474.
2. Pressure Rating: 250 psig (1725 kPa) minimum.
3. Body Material: Steel pipe with EPDM-rubber O-ring seals.
4. Size: Same as connected piping.
5. Length: Adjustable.
6. Inlet and Outlet: Threaded.
F. Flexible, Sprinkler Hose Fittings:
1. Standard: UL 1474.
2. Type: Flexible hose for connection to sprinkler, and with bracket for connection
to ceiling grid.
3. Pressure Rating: 175 psig (1200 kPa) minimum.
4. Size: Same as connected piping, for sprinkler.
2.12 SPRINKLERS
A. General Requirements:
1. Standard: UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" listing and "Approval
Guide," published by FM Global, listing.
2. Pressure Rating for Residential Sprinklers: 175 psig (1200 kPa) maximum.
3. Pressure Rating for Automatic Sprinklers: 175 psig (1200 kPa) minimum.
B. Automatic Sprinklers with Heat-Responsive Element:
1. Nonresidential Applications: UL 199.
2. Residential Applications: UL 1626 and FM Global approval guide.
3. Characteristics: Nominal 1/2-inch (12.7-mm) orifice with Discharge
Coefficient K of 5.6, and for "Ordinary" temperature classification rating unless
otherwise indicated or required by application.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY BDA #12127
Fire Protection and Fire Alarm
For Off-Campus Housing – Phase I
WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 21 13 13 - 10
4. Dry sprinkler assembly shall be of the sidewall type as indicated. Assembly
shall include an integral escutcheon. Maximum length shall not exceed
maximum indicated in UL Fire Prot. Dir. Sprinklers shall have a polished
chrome finish.
C. Sprinkler Finishes:
1. Chrome plated: In apartments and egress areas.
2. Bronze: In mechanical; electrical; utility rooms.
D. Sprinkler Escutcheons: Materials, types, and finishes for the following sprinkler
mounting applications. Escutcheons for concealed, flush, and semi-recessed-type
sprinklers are specified with sprinklers.
1. Ceiling Mounting: Chrome-plated steel, one piece, flat or Chrome-plated steel,
two piece, with 1-inch (25-mm) vertical adjustment.
2. Sidewall Mounting: Chrome-plated steel, one or two piece.
E. Sprinkler Guards:
1. Standard: UL 199.
2. Type: Wire cage with fastening device for attaching to sprinkler.
2.13 ALARM DEVICES
A. Alarm-device types shall match piping and equipment connections.
B. Electrically Operated Alarm Bell:
1. Standard: UL 464.
2. Type: Vibrating, metal alarm bell.
3. Size: 6-inch (150-mm) minimum-diameter.
4. Finish: Red-enamel factory finish, suitable for outdoor use.
C. Water-Flow Indicators:
1. Standard: UL 346.
2. Water-Flow Detector: Electrically supervised.
3. Components: Two single-pole, double-throw circuit switches for isolated alarm
and auxiliary contacts, 0.25 A, 24-V dc; complete with factory-set, field-
adjustable retard element to prevent false signals and tamperproof cover that
sends signal if removed.
4. Type: Paddle operated.
5. Pressure Rating: 250 psig (1725 kPa).
6. Design Installation: Horizontal or vertical.
D. Valve Supervisory Switches:
1. Standard: UL 346.
2. Type: Electrically supervised.
3. Components: Single-pole, double-throw switch with normally closed contacts.
4. Design: Signals that controlled valve is in other than fully open position.
E. Indicator-Post Supervisory Switches:
1. Standard: UL 346.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY BDA #12127
Fire Protection and Fire Alarm
For Off-Campus Housing – Phase I
WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 21 13 13 - 11
2. Type: Electrically supervised.
3. Components: Single-pole, double-throw switch with normally closed contacts.
4. Design: Signals that controlled indicator-post valve is in other than fully open
position.
2.14 PRESSURE GAGES
A. Standard: UL 393.
B. Dial Size: 3-1/2- to 4-1/2-inch (90- to 115-mm) diameter.
C. Pressure Gage Range: 0 to 250 psig (0 to 1725 kPa) minimum.
D. Water System Piping Gage: Include "WATER" label on dial face.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 SERVICE-ENTRANCE PIPING
A. Connect sprinkler piping to water-service piping for service entrance to building.
Comply with requirements for exterior piping in Division 21 Section "Facility Fire-
Suppression Water-Service Piping."
B. Install shutoff valve, backflow preventer, pressure gage, drain, and other accessories
indicated at connection to water-service piping. Comply with requirements for
backflow preventers in Division 21 Section "Facility Fire-Suppression Water-Service
Piping."
3.2 PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate
general location and arrangement of piping. Install piping as indicated, as far as
practical.
1. Deviations from approved working plans for piping require written approval from
authorities having jurisdiction. File written approval with Architect before
deviating from approved working plans.
B. Piping Standard: Comply with requirements for installation of sprinkler piping in
NFPA 13R.
C. Use listed fittings to make changes in direction, branch takeoffs from mains, and
reductions in pipe sizes.
D. Install unions adjacent to each valve in pipes NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller.
E. Install flanges, flange adapters, or couplings for grooved-end piping on valves,
apparatus, and equipment having NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger end connections.
F. Install flashing connections for future maintenance in accordance with Section 8.16.3
of NFPA 13.
G. Install "Test Connections" in sprinkler system piping, complete with shutoff valve, and
sized and located according to NFPA 13R.
H. Install sprinkler piping with drains for complete system drainage.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY BDA #12127
Fire Protection and Fire Alarm
For Off-Campus Housing – Phase I
WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 21 13 13 - 12
I. Install sprinkler control valves, test assemblies, and drain risers adjacent to
standpipes when sprinkler piping is connected to standpipes.
J. Install automatic (ball drip) drain valve at each check valve for fire-department
connection, to drain piping between fire-department connection and check valve.
Install drain piping to and spill over floor drain or to outside building.
K. Install alarm devices in piping systems.
L. Install hangers and supports for sprinkler system piping according to NFPA 13.
Comply with requirements for hanger materials in NFPA 13.
M. Install pressure gages on riser or feed main. Include pressure gages with connection
not less than NPS 1/4 (DN 8) and with soft metal seated globe valve, arranged for
draining pipe between gage and valve. Install gages to permit removal, and install
where they will not be subject to freezing.
N. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of foundation/exterior walls and/or slabs.
Comply with requirements for sleeve seals specified in Division 21 Section "Sleeves
and Sleeve Seals for Fire-Suppression Piping."
O. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with
requirements for escutcheons specified in Division 21 Section "Escutcheons for Fire-
Suppression Piping."
3.3 JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Install couplings, flanges, flanged fittings, unions, nipples, and transition and special
fittings that have finish and pressure ratings same as or higher than system's
pressure rating for aboveground applications unless otherwise indicated.
B. Install unions adjacent to each valve in pipes NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller.
C. Install flanges, flange adapters, or couplings for grooved-end piping on valves,
apparatus, and equipment having NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger end connections.
D. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.
E. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipes, tubes, and
fittings before assembly.
F. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material in size, type, and thickness
suitable for water service. Join flanges with gasket and bolts according to
ASME B31.9.
G. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1.
Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove
burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:
1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads.
2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are
corroded or damaged.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY BDA #12127
Fire Protection and Fire Alarm
For Off-Campus Housing – Phase I
WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 21 13 13 - 13
H. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12M/D10.12, using qualified
processes and welding operators according to "Quality Assurance" Article.
1. Shop weld pipe joints where welded piping is indicated. Do not use welded
joints for galvanized-steel pipe.
I. Steel-Piping, Cut-Grooved Joints: Cut square-edge groove in end of pipe according to
AWWA C606. Assemble coupling with housing, gasket, lubricant, and bolts. Join
steel pipe and grooved-end fittings according to AWWA C606 for steel-pipe joints.
K. Steel-Piping, Roll-Grooved Joints: Roll rounded-edge groove in end of pipe according
to AWWA C606. Assemble coupling with housing, gasket, lubricant, and bolts. Join
steel pipe and grooved-end fittings according to AWWA C606 for steel-pipe grooved
joints.
L. Brazed Joints: Join copper tube and fittings according to CDA's "Copper Tube
Handbook," "Brazed Joints" Chapter.
M. Copper-Tubing Grooved Joints: Roll rounded-edge groove in end of tube according to
AWWA C606. Assemble coupling with housing, gasket, lubricant, and bolts. Join
copper tube and grooved-end fittings according to AWWA C606 for steel-pipe grooved
joints.
N. Copper-Tubing, Pressure-Sealed Joints: Join copper tube and copper pressure-seal
fittings with tools recommended by fitting manufacturer.
O. Extruded-Tee Connections: Form tee in copper tube according to ASTM F 2014. Use
tool designed for copper tube; drill pilot hole, form collar for outlet, dimple tube to
form seating stop, and braze branch tube into collar.
P. Dissimilar-Material Piping Joints: Make joints using adapters compatible with
materials of both piping systems.
3.4 VALVE AND SPECIALTIES INSTALLATION
A. Install listed fire-protection valves, trim and drain valves, specialty valves and trim,
controls, and specialties according to NFPA 13 and authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Install listed fire-protection shutoff valves supervised open, located to control sources
of water supply except from fire-department connections. Install permanent
identification signs indicating portion of system controlled by each valve.
C. Specialty Valves:
1. General Requirements: Install in vertical position for proper direction of flow, in
main supply to system.
2. Riser Check Valves: Include bypass check valve and retarding chamber drain-
line connection.
3.5 SPRINKLER INSTALLATION
A. Install sprinklers in suspended ceilings in center of narrow dimension of acoustical
ceiling panels.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY BDA #12127
Fire Protection and Fire Alarm
For Off-Campus Housing – Phase I
WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 21 13 13 - 14
B. Install dry-type sprinklers with water supply from heated space. Do not install
pendent or sidewall, wet-type sprinklers in areas subject to freezing.
C. Install sprinklers into flexible, sprinkler hose fittings and install hose into bracket on
ceiling grid.
3.6 FIRE-DEPARTMENT CONNECTION INSTALLATION
A. Install wall-type, fire-department connections.
B. Install automatic (ball drip) drain valve at each check valve for fire-department
connection.
3.7 IDENTIFICATION
A. Install labeling and pipe markers on equipment and piping according to requirements
in NFPA 13.
B. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Comply with
requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for
Electrical Systems."
3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform tests and inspections. Coordinate with local authorities to witness
tests/inspections.
B. Tests and Inspections:
1. Leak Test: After installation, charge systems and test for leaks. Repair leaks
and retest until no leaks exist. Provide hydrostatic test of piping for 2 hours at
200 psi.
2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning
controls and equipment.
3. Flush, test, and inspect sprinkler systems according to NFPA 13R, "Systems
Acceptance" Chapter.
4. Energize circuits to electrical equipment and devices.
5. Coordinate with fire-alarm tests. Operate as required.
6. Coordinate with fire-pump tests. Operate as required.
7. Verify that equipment hose threads are same as local fire-department
equipment.
C. Sprinkler piping system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and
inspections.
D. Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.9 CLEANING
A. Clean dirt and debris from sprinklers.
B. Remove and replace sprinklers with paint other than factory finish.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY BDA #12127
Fire Protection and Fire Alarm
For Off-Campus Housing – Phase I
WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 21 13 13 - 15
3.10 DEMONSTRATION
A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain specialty
valves.
END OF SECTION
CORNELL UNIVERSITY BDA #12127
Fire Protection and Fire Alarm
For Off-Campus Housing – Phase I
CONDUCTORS AND CABLES FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 28 05 13 - 1
SECTION 28 05 13
CONDUCTORS AND CABLES FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DEFINITIONS
A. Low Voltage: As defined in NFPA 70 for circuits and equipment operating at less than
50 V or for remote-control and signaling power-limited circuits.
1.2 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Do not install conductors and cables that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold
damaged.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified
testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing
agency.
1. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less.
2. Smoke-Developed Index: 50 or less.
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and
application.
2.2 FIRE ALARM WIRE AND CABLE
A. General Wire and Cable Requirements:
1. NRTL listed and labeled as complying with NFPA 70, Article 760.
2. Size circuits as recommended by system manufacturer.
3. Wire types as recommended by system manufacturer.
B. Non-Power-Limited Circuits: Solid-copper conductors with 600-V rated, 75 deg C,
color-coded insulation.
1. Low-Voltage Circuits: No. 18 AWG, minimum.
2. Line-Voltage Circuits: No. 12 AWG, minimum.
2.3 IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS
A. Comply with UL 969 for a system of labeling materials, including label stocks,
laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY BDA #12127
Fire Protection and Fire Alarm
For Off-Campus Housing – Phase I
CONDUCTORS AND CABLES FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 28 05 13 - 2
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 FIRE ALARM WIRING INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NECA 1 and NFPA 72.
B. Comply with requirements in Section 28 05 28 "Pathways for Electronic Safety and
Security.
1. Fire alarm circuits and equipment control wiring associated with the fire alarm
system shall be installed in a dedicated raceway system. This system shall not
be used for any other wire or cable.
C. Wiring within Enclosures: Separate power-limited and non-power-limited conductors
as recommended by manufacturer. Install conductors parallel with or at right angles
to sides and back of the enclosure. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal
points with no excess. Connect conductors that are terminated, spliced, or
interrupted in any enclosure associated with the fire alarm system to terminal blocks.
Mark each terminal according to the system's wiring diagrams. Make all connections
with approved crimp-on terminal spade lugs, pressure-type terminal blocks, or plug
connectors.
D. Cable Taps: Use numbered terminal strips in junction, pull, and outlet boxes,
cabinets, or equipment enclosures where circuit connections are made.
E. Color-Coding: Color-code fire alarm conductors differently from the normal building
power wiring. Use one color-code for alarm circuit wiring and another for supervisory
circuits. Color-code audible alarm-indicating circuits differently from alarm-initiating
circuits. Use different colors for visible alarm-indicating devices. Paint fire alarm
system junction boxes and covers red.
F. Wiring to Remote Alarm Transmitting Device: Install number of conductors and
electrical supervision for connecting wiring as needed to suit monitoring function.
3.2 CONNECTIONS
A. Comply with requirements in Section 28 31 11 "Digital, Addressable Fire-Alarm
System for connecting, terminating, and identifying wires and cables.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Comply with requirements in Section 28 31 11 “Digital, Addressable Fire Alarm
System” for tests and inspections.
END OF SECTION
CORNELL UNIVERSITY BDA #12127
Fire Protection and Fire Alarm
For Off-Campus Housing – Phase I
PATHWAYS FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 28 05 28 - 1
SECTION 28 05 28
PATHWAYS FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For surface pathways.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 METAL CONDUITS, TUBING, AND FITTINGS
A. General Requirements for Metal Conduits and Fittings:
1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and
marked for intended location and application.
B. EMT: Comply with ANSI C80.3 and UL 797.
C. Fittings for Metal Conduit: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 514B.
1. Fittings for EMT:
a. Material: Steel.
b. Type: Compression.
2.2 SURFACE PATHWAYS
A. General Requirements for Surface Pathways:
1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and
marked for intended location and application.
B. Surface Metal Pathways: Galvanized steel with snap-on covers complying with UL 5.
Manufacturer's standard enamel finish in color selected by Architect.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PATHWAY APPLICATION
A. Apply pathway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated:
1. Exposed, in finished spaces: Surface pathway.
2. Exposed, in unfinished spaces: EMT.
3. Concealed in Ceilings and Interior Walls and Partitions: EMT.
B. Minimum Pathway Size: 1/2-inch (16-mm) trade size.
C. Pathway Fittings: Compatible with pathways and suitable for use and location.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY BDA #12127
Fire Protection and Fire Alarm
For Off-Campus Housing – Phase I
PATHWAYS FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 28 05 28 - 2
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except where
requirements on Drawings or in this article are stricter. Comply with NFPA 70
limitations for types of pathways allowed in specific occupancies and number of floors.
B. Keep pathways at least 6 inches (150 mm) away from parallel runs of flues or hot-
water pipes. Install horizontal pathway runs above water piping.
C. Complete pathway installation before starting conductor installation.
D. Install conduits parallel or perpendicular to building lines.
E. Support conduit within 12 inches (300 mm) of enclosures to which attached.
F. Install pull wires in empty pathways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line
with not less than 200-lb (90-kg) tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches (300 mm)
of slack at each end of pull wire. Cap underground pathways designated as spare
above grade alongside pathways in use.
G. Surface Pathways:
1. Install surface pathway with a minimum 2-inch (50-mm) radius control at bend
points.
2. Secure surface pathway with screws or other anchor-type devices at intervals
not exceeding 48 inches (1200 mm) and with no less than two supports per
straight pathway section. Support surface pathway according to manufacturer's
written instructions. Tape and glue are not acceptable support methods.
H. Fasten junction and pull boxes to or support from building structure. Do not support
boxes by conduits.
3.3 PROTECTION
A. Protect coatings, finishes, and cabinets from damage and deterioration.
1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by
manufacturer.
END OF SECTION
CORNELL UNIVERSITY BDA #12127
Fire Protection and Fire Alarm
For Off-Campus Housing – Phase I
DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 28 31 11 - 1
SECTION 28 31 11
DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DEFINITIONS
A. DACT: Digital Alarm Communication Transmittor.
B. EH&S: Cornell University Environmental Health and Safety.
C. EMT: Electrical Metallic Tubing.
D. FACU: Fire Alarm Control Unit.
E. FE: Cornell University Facilities Engineering.
F. HLI: High Level Interface.
G. NICET: National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies.
H. PC: Personal computer.
1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Delegated Design: These specifications and the accompanying Drawings define the
intent of the fire alarm system to be provided. In addition to the system as specified
herein and shown on the Drawings, provide all planning, design, calculations,
equipment, devices, raceways, boxes, cabling, system programming, and any other
component or service required for a complete, fully operational and code compliant
system.
1. Premises protection includes Occupancy Group R-2.
B. System Zoning: Fire alarm control system and all associated circuits shall be
arranged to comply with zoning requirements of NFPA 72 and the following:
1. The entire building is an evacuation signaling zone for this Project.
2. Display each intelligent addressable device at the main fire alarm control unit in
accordance with the following:
a. Use a unique alphanumeric label identifying each device location.
b. Include a descriptive reference with alphanumeric label that corresponds
to devices’ specific location and zone.
c. Comply with the Owner’s labeling methodology requirements. Present
proposed labeling methodology to Owner and Engineer prior to
implementation.
C. Voltage Drop Calculations: Design system for a maximum of 10 percent voltage drop
for each notification appliance circuit.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY BDA #12127
Fire Protection and Fire Alarm
For Off-Campus Housing – Phase I
DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 28 31 11 - 2
1.3 GENERAL SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide one copy of each fire alarm system submittal to both EF and EH&S for review
and comment.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product, including furnished options and accessories.
1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions, profiles, and
finishes.
2. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, and electrical characteristics.
B. Shop Drawings: For fire alarm system. Signed and sealed by the qualified
professional responsible for their preparation. Include the following:
1. Comply with recommendations and requirements in the "Documentation"
section of the "Fundamentals" chapter in NFPA 72.
2. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
3. Include details of equipment assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads,
required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and locations.
Indicate conductor sizes, indicate termination locations and requirements, and
distinguish between factory and field wiring.
4. Detail assembly and support requirements.
5. Include circuit loading and voltage drop calculations for notification appliance
circuits.
6. Include battery-size calculations.
a. Provide battery calculations to FE and EH&S during submittal process
and at the completion of the project.
7. Include input/output matrix.
8. Include statement from manufacturer that all equipment and components have
been tested as a system and meet all requirements in this Specification and in
NFPA 72.
9. Include performance parameters and installation details for each detector.
10. Include voice/alarm signaling-service equipment rack or console layout,
grounding schematic, amplifier power calculation, and single-line connection
diagram. A detailed system/device connection diagram is not required until the
completion of the project (as a complete “as-built”).
11. Include floor plans to indicate final outlet locations showing address and circuit
number of each addressable device.
12. System labeling materials and methods.
C. Program List: Fire alarm program list to be provided to EH&S for review and approval
prior to release to fire alarm vendor.
D. General Submittal Requirements:
1. Shop Drawings shall be prepared by persons with the following qualifications:
a. Trained and certified by manufacturer in fire alarm system design.
b. NICET-certified, fire alarm technician; Level III minimum.
c. Licensed per Article 6D of the New York State General Business Law.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY BDA #12127
Fire Protection and Fire Alarm
For Off-Campus Housing – Phase I
DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 28 31 11 - 3
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For Qualified Designer and Installer.
B. Field quality-control reports.
1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fire alarm systems and components to include
in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.
1. In addition to items specified in Section 01 78 23 "Operation and Maintenance
Data," include the following:
a. Comply with the "Records" section of the "Inspection, Testing and
Maintenance" chapter in NFPA 72.
b. Provide "Fire Alarm and Emergency Communications System Record of
Completion Documents" according to the "Completion Documents" Article
in the "Documentation" section of the "Fundamentals" chapter in NFPA 72.
c. Complete wiring diagrams showing connections between all devices and
equipment. Each conductor shall be numbered at every junction point
with indication of origination and termination points.
d. Riser diagram.
e. Device addresses.
f. Record copy of site-specific software.
g. Provide "Inspection and Testing Form" according to the "Inspection,
Testing and Maintenance" chapter in NFPA 72, and include the following:
1) Equipment tested.
2) Frequency of testing of installed components.
3) Frequency of inspection of installed components.
4) Requirements and recommendations related to results of
maintenance.
5) Manufacturer's user training manuals.
h. Manufacturer's required maintenance related to system warranty
requirements.
i. Abbreviated operating instructions for mounting at FACU.
1.7 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with
protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Lamps for Remote Indicating Lamp Units: Quantity equal to 10 percent of
amount installed, but no fewer than one unit.
2. Lamps for Strobe Units: Quantity equal to 10 percent of amount installed, but
no fewer than one unit of each type.
3. Smoke Detectors: Quantity equal to 10 percent of amount of each type
installed, but no fewer than one unit of each type.
4. Detector Bases: Quantity equal to two percent of amount of each type installed,
but no fewer than one unit of each type.
5. Keys and Tools: One extra set for access to locked or tamperproofed
components.
6. Audible and Visual Notification Appliances: One of each type installed.
7. Fuses: Two of each type installed in the system. Provide in a box or cabinet
with compartments marked with fuse types and sizes.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY BDA #12127
Fire Protection and Fire Alarm
For Off-Campus Housing – Phase I
DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 28 31 11 - 4
1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Designer Qualifications: Shop drawings shall be prepared by personnel with the
following qualifications:
1. Trained and certified by manufacturer.
2. Certified by NICET as Level IV or a registered professional engineer (P.E) in fire
protection engineering.
B. Installer Qualifications: Personnel shall be trained and certified by manufacturer for
installation of units required for this Project. Installation shall be by personnel
certified by NICET as fire alarm Level III technician.
C. NFPA Certification: Obtain certification according to NFPA 72 by an NRTL (nationally
recognized testing laboratory).
1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Interruption of Existing Fire Alarm Service: Do not interrupt fire alarm service to
facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions
and then only after arranging to provide temporary guard service according to
requirements indicated:
1. Notify Owner no fewer than seven days in advance of proposed interruption of
fire alarm service.
2. Do not proceed with interruption of fire alarm service without Owner's written
permission.
B. Use of Devices during Construction: Protect devices during construction unless
devices are placed in service to protect the facility during construction.
1.10 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace fire alarm system
equipment and components that fail in materials or workmanship within specified
warranty period.
1. Warranty Extent: All equipment and components not covered in the
Maintenance Service Agreement.
2. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Source Limitations for Fire Alarm System and Components: Components shall be
compatible with, and operate as an extension of, existing system. Provide system
manufacturer's certification that all components provided have been tested as, and
will operate as, a system.
B. Noncoded, NRTL-certified addressable system, with multiplexed signal transmission
and horn/strobe evacuation.
C. Automatic sensitivity control of certain smoke detectors.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY BDA #12127
Fire Protection and Fire Alarm
For Off-Campus Housing – Phase I
DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 28 31 11 - 5
D. All components provided shall be listed for use with the selected system.
E. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and
application.
2.2 SYSTEMS OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTION
A. Signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices and systems:
1. Manual stations.
2. Smoke detectors.
3. Automatic sprinkler system water flow.
B. Fire alarm signal shall initiate the following actions:
1. Continuously operate alarm notification appliances.
2. Identify alarm and specific initiating device at fire alarm control unit and remote
annunciators.
3. Transmit an alarm signal to the remote alarm receiving station.
4. Record events in the system memory.
5. Indicate device in alarm on the graphic annunciator.
C. Supervisory signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices and
actions:
1. Valve supervisory switch.
2. User disabling of zones or individual devices.
3. Loss of communication with any panel on the network.
4. Carbon monoxide detectors.
D. System trouble signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices and
actions:
1. Open circuits, shorts, and grounds in designated circuits.
2. Opening, tampering with, or removing alarm-initiating and supervisory signal-
initiating devices.
3. Loss of communication with any addressable sensor, input module, relay,
control module, remote annunciator, printer interface, or Ethernet module.
4. Loss of primary power at fire alarm control unit.
5. Ground or a single break in internal circuits of fire alarm control unit.
6. Abnormal ac voltage at fire alarm control unit.
7. Break in standby battery circuitry.
8. Failure of battery charging.
9. Abnormal position of any switch at fire alarm control unit or annunciator.
E. System Supervisory or Trouble Signal Actions:
1. Identify specific device initiating the event at fire alarm control unit and remote
annunciators.
2. After a time delay of 200 seconds, transmit a trouble or supervisory signal to the
remote alarm receiving station.
3. Display system status on graphic annunciator.
4. Low-temperature condition.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY BDA #12127
Fire Protection and Fire Alarm
For Off-Campus Housing – Phase I
DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 28 31 11 - 6
2.3 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of
the following :
1. Gamewell-FCI; A Honeywell Company.
2. Notifier; A Honeywell Company.
3. Edwards Signaling; A UTC Company.
2.4 FIRE ALARM CONTROL UNIT
A. General Requirements for Fire Alarm Control Unit:
1. Field-programmable, microprocessor-based, modular, power-limited design with
electronic modules, complying with UL 864.
a. System software and programs shall be held in nonvolatile flash,
electrically erasable, programmable, read-only memory, retaining the
information through failure of primary and secondary power supplies.
b. Include a real-time clock for time annotation of events on the event
recorder.
c. Provide communication between the FACU and remote circuit interface
panels, annunciators, and displays.
d. The FACU shall be listed for connection to a central-station signaling
system service.
e. Provide nonvolatile memory for system database, logic, and operating
system and event history. The system shall require no manual input to
initialize in the event of a complete power down condition. The FACU shall
provide a minimum 500-event history log.
2. Addressable Initiation Device Circuits: The FACU shall indicate which
communication zones have been silenced and shall provide selective silencing of
alarm notification appliance by building communication zone.
3. Provide a copy of the fire alarm program on a USB stick to be kept at the FACU
for future work and maintenance.
B. Alphanumeric Display and System Controls: Arranged for interface between human
operator at fire alarm control unit and addressable system components including
annunciation and supervision. Display alarm, supervisory, and component status
messages and the programming and control menu.
1. Annunciator and Display: Liquid-crystal type, 40 characters, minimum.
2. Keypad: Arranged to permit entry and execution of programming, display, and
control commands.
C. Initiating-Device, Notification-Appliance, and Signaling-Line Circuits:
1. Pathway Class Designations: NFPA 72, Class A.
2. Serial Interfaces:
a. One RS 485 port for remote annunciators, Ethernet module, or multi-
interface module.
b. One USB port.
c. Full duplex RS 232 Serial interface port.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY BDA #12127
Fire Protection and Fire Alarm
For Off-Campus Housing – Phase I
DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 28 31 11 - 7
D. Notification-Appliance Circuit:
1. Audible appliances shall sound in a three-pulse temporal pattern, as defined in
NFPA 72.
2. Visual alarm appliances shall flash in synchronization where multiple
appliances are in the same field of view, as defined in NFPA 72.
E. Transmission to Remote Alarm Receiving Station: Automatically transmit alarm,
supervisory, and trouble signals to a remote alarm station.
F. Primary Power: 24-V dc obtained from 120-V ac service and a power-supply module.
Initiating devices, notification appliances, signaling lines, trouble signals, supervisory
signals shall be powered by 24-V dc source.
1. Alarm current draw of entire fire alarm system shall not exceed 80 percent of the
power-supply module rating.
G. Secondary Power: 24-V dc supply system with batteries, automatic battery charger,
and automatic transfer switch.
1. Batteries: Sealed, lead acid.
2.5 MANUAL FIRE ALARM BOXES
A. General Requirements for Manual Fire Alarm Boxes: Comply with UL 38. Boxes shall
be finished in red with molded, raised-letter operating instructions in contrasting
color; shall show visible indication of operation; and shall be mounted on recessed
outlet box. If indicated as surface mounted, provide manufacturer's surface back box.
1. Double-action mechanism requiring two actions to initiate an alarm, pull-lever
type; with integral addressable module arranged to communicate manual-
station status (normal, alarm, or trouble) to fire alarm control unit.
2. Station Reset: Key to match FACU. Keyed, latching covers of the automatic
reset type.
2.6 SYSTEM SMOKE DETECTORS
A. General Requirements for System Smoke Detectors:
1. Comply with UL 268; operating at 24-V dc, nominal.
2. Addressable: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal, alarm, or
trouble) to fire alarm control unit.
3. Base Mounting: Detector and associated electronic components shall be
mounted in a twist-lock module that connects to a fixed base. Provide terminals
in the fixed base for connection to building wiring. For devices indicated with
sound bases, the sound base shall produce a minimum of 75 dBA at the pillow,
or 15 dBA above ambient sound levels, whichever is greater.
4. Self-Restoring: Detectors do not require resetting or readjustment after
actuation to restore them to normal operation.
5. Integral Visual-Indicating Light: LED type, indicating detector has operated and
power-on status.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY BDA #12127
Fire Protection and Fire Alarm
For Off-Campus Housing – Phase I
DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 28 31 11 - 8
B. Photoelectric Smoke Detectors:
1. Detector address shall be accessible from fire alarm control unit and shall be
able to identify the detector's location within the system and its sensitivity
setting.
2. An operator at fire alarm control unit, having the designated access level, shall
be able to manually access the following for each detector:
a. Primary status.
b. Device type.
c. Present average value.
d. Present sensitivity selected.
e. Sensor range (normal, dirty, etc.).
2.7 CARBON MONOXIDE DETECTORS
A. General: Carbon monoxide detector listed for connection to fire alarm system.
1. Mounting: Adapter plate for outlet box mounting.
2. Testable by introducing test carbon monoxide into the sensing cell.
3. Detector shall provide alarm contacts and trouble contacts.
4. Detector shall send trouble alarm when nearing end-of-life, power supply
problems, or internal faults.
5. Listed and labeled as complying with UL 2075 and shall meet the sensitivity
testing and alarm thresholds of UL 2034.
6. Locate, mount, and wire according to manufacturer's written instructions.
7. Provide means for addressable connection to fire alarm system.
8. Test button simulates an alarm condition.
9. Alarm: Audible and visual temporal 4 signal.
2.8 MULTI-CRITERIA DETECTORS
A. Mounting: Twist-lock base interchangeable with smoke-detector bases.
B. Addressable: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal, alarm, or trouble) to
fire alarm control unit.
C. Automatically adjusts its sensitivity by means of drift compensation and smoothing
algorithms. The detector shall send trouble alarm if it is incapable of compensating
for existing conditions.
D. Test button tests all sensors in the detector.
E. An operator at fire alarm control unit, having the designated access level, shall be able
to manually access the following for each detector:
1. Primary status.
2. Device type.
3. Present sensitivity selected.
4. Sensor range (normal, dirty, etc.).
F. Sensors: The detector shall be comprised of four sensing elements including a smoke
sensor, a carbon monoxide sensor, an infrared sensor, and a heat sensor.
1. Smoke sensor shall be photoelectric type as described in "System Smoke
Detectors" Article.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY BDA #12127
Fire Protection and Fire Alarm
For Off-Campus Housing – Phase I
DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 28 31 11 - 9
2. Carbon monoxide sensor shall be as described in "Carbon Monoxide Detectors"
Article.
3. Heat sensor shall be as described in "Heat Detectors" Article.
4. Each sensor shall be separately listed according to requirements for its detector
type.
2.9 HEAT DETECTORS
A. General Requirements for Heat Detectors: Comply with UL 521.
1. Temperature sensors shall test for and communicate the sensitivity range of the
device.
B. Heat Detector, Combination Type: Actuated by either a fixed temperature of 135 deg F
(57 deg C) or a rate of rise that exceeds 15 deg F (8 deg C) per minute unless otherwise
indicated.
1. Mounting: Twist-lock base interchangeable with smoke-detector bases.
2. Addressable: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal, alarm, or
trouble) to fire alarm control unit.
2.10 LOW TEMPERATURE SENSOR
A. General Description: Individually addressable device capable to report system trouble
in the ambient temperature falls below 40˚ F.
2.11 NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES
A. General Requirements for Notification Appliances: Connected to notification-appliance
signal circuits, zoned as indicated, equipped for mounting as indicated, and with
screw terminals for system connections.
1. Combination Devices: Factory-integrated audible and visible devices in a single-
mounting assembly, equipped for mounting as indicated, and with screw
terminals for system connections.
B. Horns: Electric-vibrating-polarized type, 24-V dc; with provision for housing the
operating mechanism behind a grille. Comply with UL 464. Horns shall produce a
sound-pressure level of 90 dBA, measured 10 feet (3 m) from the horn, using the
coded signal prescribed in UL 464 test protocol.
C. Visible Notification Appliances: Xenon strobe lights comply with UL 1971.
1. Fire: Clear lens mounted on a red aluminum or Lexan faceplate. The word
“FIRE” is engraved in white, minimum 1-inch high letters.
2. Rated Light Output:
a. 15/30/75/110 cd, selectable in the field.
3. Mounting: Wall mounted unless otherwise indicated.
4. For units with guards to prevent physical damage, light output ratings shall be
determined with guards in place.
5. Flashing shall be in a temporal pattern, synchronized with other units.
6. Strobe Leads: Factory connected to screw terminals.
7. Mounting Faceplate: Factory finished, to match appliance.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY BDA #12127
Fire Protection and Fire Alarm
For Off-Campus Housing – Phase I
DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 28 31 11 - 10
2.12 ADDRESSABLE INTERFACE DEVICE
A. General:
1. Include address-setting means on the module.
2. Store an internal identifying code for control panel use to identify the module
type.
B. Monitor Module: Microelectronic module providing a system address for alarm-
initiating devices for wired applications with normally open contacts.
C. Control Module:
1. Operate notification devices.
2. Operate solenoids for use in sprinkler service.
2.13 DIGITAL ALARM COMMUNICATOR TRANSMITTER
A. Digital alarm communicator transmitter shall be acceptable to the remote central
station and shall comply with UL 632. DACT will not report to CUPS or County 911
Center. Coordinate with EH&S.
B. Functional Performance: Unit shall receive an alarm, supervisory, or trouble signal
from fire alarm control unit and automatically capture two telephone line(s) and dial a
preset number for a remote central station. When contact is made with central
station(s), signals shall be transmitted. If service on either line is interrupted for
longer than 45 seconds, transmitter shall initiate a local trouble signal and transmit
the signal indicating loss of telephone line to the remote alarm receiving station over
the remaining line. Transmitter shall automatically report telephone service
restoration to the central station. If service is lost on both telephone lines, transmitter
shall initiate the local trouble signal.
C. Local functions and display at the digital alarm communicator transmitter shall
include the following:
1. Verification that both telephone lines are available.
2. Programming device.
3. LED display.
4. Manual test report function and manual transmission clear indication.
5. Communications failure with the central station or fire alarm control unit.
D. Digital data transmission shall include the following:
1. Address of the alarm-initiating device.
2. Address of the supervisory signal.
3. Address of the trouble-initiating device.
4. Loss of ac supply.
5. Loss of power.
6. Low battery.
7. Abnormal test signal.
8. Communication bus failure.
E. Self-Test: Conducted automatically every 24 hours with report transmitted to central
station.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY BDA #12127
Fire Protection and Fire Alarm
For Off-Campus Housing – Phase I
DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 28 31 11 - 11
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and conditions for compliance with requirements for ventilation,
temperature, humidity, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
1. Verify that manufacturer's written instructions for environmental conditions
have been permanently established in spaces where equipment and wiring are
installed, before installation begins.
B. Examine roughing-in for electrical connections to verify actual locations of
connections before installation.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NFPA 72, NFPA 101, and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction
for installation and testing of fire alarm equipment. Install all electrical wiring to
comply with requirements in NFPA 70 including, but not limited to, Article 760, "Fire
Alarm Systems."
1. Devices placed in service before all other trades have completed cleanup shall be
replaced.
2. Devices installed but not yet placed in service shall be protected from
construction dust, debris, dirt, moisture, and damage according to
manufacturer's written storage instructions.
B. Install wall-mounted equipment, with tops of cabinets not more than 78 inches (1980
mm) above the finished floor.
C. Manual Fire Alarm Boxes:
1. Install manual fire alarm box in the normal path of egress within 60 inches
(1520 mm) of the exit doorway.
2. The operable part of manual fire alarm box shall be between 42 inches (1060
mm) and 48 inches (1220 mm) above floor level. All devices shall be mounted at
the same height unless otherwise indicated.
D. Smoke- or Heat-Detector Spacing:
1. Comply with the "Smoke-Sensing Fire Detectors" section in the "Initiating
Devices" chapter in NFPA 72, for smoke-detector spacing.
2. Comply with the "Heat-Sensing Fire Detectors" section in the "Initiating Devices"
chapter in NFPA 72, for heat-detector spacing.
3. Smooth ceiling spacing shall not exceed 30 feet (9 m) or manufacturer
requirements, whichever is less.
4. Spacing of detectors for irregular areas, for irregular ceiling construction, and
for high ceiling areas shall be determined according to in NFPA 72.
5. Lighting Fixtures: Locate detectors not closer than 12 inches (300 mm) from
any part of a lighting fixture and not directly above pendant mounted or indirect
lighting.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY BDA #12127
Fire Protection and Fire Alarm
For Off-Campus Housing – Phase I
DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 28 31 11 - 12
E. Install a cover on each smoke detector that is not placed in service during
construction. Cover shall remain in place except during system testing. Remove cover
prior to system turnover.
F. Smoke Detectors: Where more than one smoke alarm is installed within a dwelling or
suite, they shall be connected so that the operation of any smoke alarm causes the
alarm in all smoke alarms to sound.
G. Notification Appliances: Comply with NFPA 72 for mounting heights. Install all
devices at the same height unless otherwise indicated.
3.3 PATHWAYS
A. Comply with requirements in Section 28 05 28 “Pathways for Electronic Safety and
Security”.
3.4 CONNECTIONS
A. Make addressable connections with a supervised interface device to the following
devices and systems. Install the interface device less than 36 inches (910 mm) from
the device controlled. Make an addressable confirmation connection when such
feedback is available at the device or system being controlled.
1. Supervisory connections at valve supervisory switches.
3.5 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals.
B. Install framed instructions in a location visible from fire alarm control panel.
Coordinate location with Owner.
C. Provide computer-generated adhesive labels and install on the bases of all initiating
device and notification appliances, as well as any remote test and monitoring station.
The label shall indicate the address and must be legible from a standing position
below.
1. Labeling guideline for signaling line circuit (SLC): FACU/Board – Loop/cct # -
Device #
2. Labeling guideline for notification appliance circuit (NAC): FACU/Board –
Loop/cct# - Device # (where addressable)
D. Initiating, notification, signaling, and other fire alarm system wiring, circuits, and
conductors shall be color coded and identified by number at termination points (i.e.,
control panels, remote annunciators, etc.) and splice points (i.e., junction boxes, splice
boxes, etc.). Wiring shall be consistent throughout the system with no color changes
on individual loops from the FACU.
E. Junction and splice boxes containing fire alarm system wiring, circuits, and
conductors shall have red covers and marked “FIRE ALARM” in 3/4" (three-quarter
inch) white letters.
F. Fire alarm equipment supplied with 120 VAC power shall be labeled with the panel
source information, including panel name, room number and source breaker number.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY BDA #12127
Fire Protection and Fire Alarm
For Off-Campus Housing – Phase I
DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 28 31 11 - 13
G. End-of-line resistors in two-wire systems shall be located at the fire alarm control
panel, if feasible; otherwise, end-of-line resistors shall be installed in designated
junction boxes with red covers and marked in accordance with the specifications of
this section (See Section 1.07, Para. D. and E. above).
3.6 GROUNDING
A. Ground fire alarm control unit and associated circuits; comply with IEEE 1100.
Install a ground wire from main service ground to fire alarm control panel.
B. Ground shielded cables at the control panel location only. Insulate shield at device
location.
3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Field tests shall be witnessed by authorities having jurisdiction, FE and EH&S.
1. Provide minimim (72) hours prior notice to EH&S and authorities having
jurisdiction.
2. Complete and submit Program sheets to EH&S.
3. Ensure that the system is pre-tested.
4. Contractor to provide all testing equipment.
5. Smoke detectors shall be tested by smoke.
6. Heat detectors shall be tested by heat.
B. Perform tests and inspections.
C. Perform the following tests and inspections:
1. Visual Inspection: Conduct visual inspection prior to testing.
a. Inspection shall be based on completed record Drawings and system
documentation that is required by the "Completion Documents,
Preparation" table in the "Documentation" section of the "Fundamentals"
chapter in NFPA 72.
b. Comply with the "Visual Inspection Frequencies" table in the "Inspection"
section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" chapter in NFPA 72;
retain the "Initial/Reacceptance" column and list only the installed
components.
2. System Testing: Comply with the "Test Methods" table in the "Testing" section of
the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" chapter in NFPA 72.
3. Audible Testing: Field sound level testing to be performed only by EH&S.
Sound level adjustments to be performed by installing contractor.
4. Test visible appliances for the public operating mode according to
manufacturer's written instructions.
5. Prepare the "Fire Alarm System Record of Completion" in the "Documentation"
section of the "Fundamentals" chapter in NFPA 72 and the "Inspection and
Testing Form" in the "Records" section of the "Inspection, Testing and
Maintenance" chapter in NFPA 72.
D. Reacceptance Testing: Perform reacceptance testing to verify the proper operation of
added or replaced devices and appliances.
E. Smoke detectors will be checked/tested for listed sensitivity by EH&S. Clean or
replace devices that do not meet said sensitivity.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY BDA #12127
Fire Protection and Fire Alarm
For Off-Campus Housing – Phase I
DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 28 31 11 - 14
F. Fire alarm system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
G. Prepare test and inspection reports.
H. Maintenance Test and Inspection: Perform tests and inspections listed for weekly,
monthly, quarterly, and semiannual periods. Use forms developed for initial tests and
inspections.
3.8 REPROGRAMMING
A. Provide up to two reprograms of the system by the manufacturer’s representative after
the panel has been accepted by EH&S at no additional cost, charge, or fee to Cornell
University.
3.9 DEMONSTRATION
A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain fire alarm
system.
END OF SECTION